Home

Global Mapper - User`s Manual

1. 684 Krssovsky 0 0 000000 S 2ALBANA O 684 JKrasswsky 0 000000000 S 42 AZERBAUAN GEORGIA 684 JKrassosky 0 00000 S A2CZECHOSLOVAKIA 6284 JKrssosky 0 000000 S 2ESTONA 684 Krsswsky 0 0 0000 0 S 2GERMANY 684 Krssovsky 50 00000 S 2HUNGARY 684 Kasoy 0 000000000 S 42 KAZAKHSTAN 6084 JKrassovsky O O OO oS O 6284 Krssovsky o lo S 42LITHUANIA 684 Krassovsky 0 0 S 42POLAND O O 684 JKmsswsky 0 0 0 Od S 2ROMANA O O 684 JKrassosky 0 00000000 6284 Krssowsky i o S JTSK CZECH REPUBLIC 6156 BesellS4 5 SAOBRAZ Unknown International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 2 SCHWARZECK NAMIBIA 659 Beses sd CO SOLOMON 1968 GUX 1 ASTRO 6718 International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 2 SOUTHEASTBASE Unknown International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 4 SOUTHWEST BASE Unknown International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 1 SWEREF99 SWEDEN 6619 JgRSI980 O O 80 0 SWISS GRID CH1903 619 JBeselld 6 TANANARIVE 1925 GREENWICH 6297 International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 1 TANANARIVE 1925 PARIS 6810 International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 1 Everest 1830 1967 Definition 5 Built in Datums 283 Ql Global Mapper User s Manual TOKYO 6301 Bessel 1841 TRINIDAD 1903
2. ASAIO N3BEwTUZ gmg C SD ara MED SMevember2 04 vw estem ISSN 34 wf p Given Man Seal N34w114 N36W108 9mq C DataS NEDSNovember2004 WestemUS S N 344 11 SEE uude ASAT 20 M3Bw114 gmag CD ara ED SM evember2 04 yy estem OSS 34w1 2 M3Bw 1US N38wT1UZ gmg C Dara MEDSMevember2 04 yy estem IS MN 3B Dt M3BEw 114 N38w1 08 ama CA DataSNEDSNovemberz004hestemU S N 3811 gt e Show Map Bounding Boxes Add Files Add Loaded Files Remove Selected Files When Maps Not Displayed Add Directory Add Unecreen Files Remove All Files Modify Display of Raster Layers Cancel t Display Pixel is Less Than Size Save As You can obtain metadata and projection information about layers in the map catalog by right clicking on them in the Map List and selecting the appropriate option You can modify map catalogs again after loading them by opening the Overlay Control Center selecting the map catalog layer then pressing the Options button Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to create map catalogs Load Workspace Command The Load Workspace command allows the user to load a Global Mapper workspace file gsw previously saved with the Save Workspace command Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to load Global Mapper workspace files Save Workspace Command The Save Workspace command allows the user to save their current set of loaded overlays to a Global Mapper workspace file for late
3. PPE PPP PP ery epeppnHnrplr Table of Contents 234 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Aqua Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Black Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Green Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Red Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Aqua Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Black Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Green Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Red Geology Joint Closed Medium Aqua Geology Joint Closed Medium Black Geology Joint Closed Medium Green PPPPPELPDBPBIC rpeesppipiesee Table of Contents 235 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Joint Closed Medium Red Geology Joint Closed Small Aqua Geology Joint Closed Small Black Geology Joint Closed Small Green Geology Joint Closed Small Red Geology Joint Open Medium Aqua Geology Joint Open Medium Black Geology Joint Open Medium Green Geology Joint Open Medium Red Geology Joint Open Small Aqua Geology Joint Open Small Black Table of Contents Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Joint Open Small Green Geology Joint Open Small Red Geology Vertical Bedding Medium Aqua Geology Vertical Bedding Medium Black Geology Vertical Bedding Medium Green Geology Vertical Bedding Medium Red Geology Vertical Bedding Small Aqua
4. GIF a GIF format file with associated world file GLOBAL MAPPER CATALOG a Global Mapper Map Catalog file GLOBAL MAPPER GRID a Global Mapper Grid format file GML a GML format file GNIS Geographics Names Information Service GNIS file GPS TRACKMAKER a GPS TrackMaker format file GXF Geosoft Grid ASCII GXF file GPX GPS eXchange Format file HDF an HDF format raster or grid file like ASTER DEM or ASTER VNIR imagery HELAVA DEM a Helava DEM file HYPACK MATRIX a Hypack Matrix format file IBCAO Arctic bathymetry in NetCDF format IDRISI RASTER Idrisi raster elevation format file INTERGRAPH COT Intergraph COT format file JDEM a Japanese DEM mem file JPEG a JPEG file with an associated world file JPEG2000 a JPEG 2000 file LIDAR LAS a LAS file with LIDAR data LOWRANCE USR a Lowrance USR format file LULC USGS Land Use and Land Cover vector data file MAPINFO a MapInfo MIF MID of TAB MAP vector data collection MAPMAKERTERRAIN a MapMaker terrain file MARPLOT MIE a MarPlot MIE format file MAPTECH a MapTech BSB Topo or Aerial format file MICRODEM DEM a MicroDEM created DEM file MICROPATH DEM a Micropath DEM file Table of Contents 185 Global Mapper User s Manual MRSID a LizardTech MrSID image file NetCDF a NetCDF format file NIMA_GNS a NIMA GNS format file NITE NITF format imagery
5. C Track Opens Towards Start of Line Arrow Track Points Towards Start of Line Arrow Track Points Towards End of Line V Track Opens Towards End of Solid Line V Track Opens Towards Start of Solid Line Solid with Xs Through Line Table of Contents 212 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid with Diamonds along Line Solid with Empty Diamonds along Line Solid with Circles along Line Solid with Empty Circles along Line Solid with Arrow Pointing to Start a Solid with Arrow Pointing to End Solid with Empty Circle at Start Solid with Empty Circle at End Solid with Black Edges Table of Contents 213 Global Mapper User s Manual Table of Contents 214 Global Mapper User s Manual BUILT IN LINE TYPES AND DRAWING STYLES This section reviews the area line and point styles built into Global Mapper e Line Styles Line Type Features Drawing Styles Line Styles Upper line shows line types normal appearance Lower line shows how line type appears when Display Roads As Fat Lines When Zoomed In option is checked and display is zoomed in Global Mapper s View gt Background Color color designation influences which lines can be seen Any line whose color is the same as the Global Mapper Backgrond Color will not be seen Example for a white Background Color RGB 255 255 255 the Processing Closure Line will not be visible Global Mapper Built In Line Types Drawing Line or Style W
6. Global Mapper provides the ability to track the position of a serial GPS device connected to your computer s serial port or USB via a serial to USB convertor or a Garmin USB GPS device connected to your computer s USB port in real time over the top of any loaded mapping data For serial GPS devices the GPS device must communicate in either NMEA 0183 v2 x or Garmin binary format in order to be compatible with Global Mapper When tracking a GPS device you can mark the current location as a waypoint You can also choose to record a bread crumb trail or tracklog of where you have gone Below is a sample screen capture of what Global Mapper looks like when tracking a GPS device over loaded data In the sample 30 m SDTS DEM data is loaded as a backdrop with Tiger 2002 data loaded on top You can see the GPS vessel location and the tracklog of where the vessel has been The GPS Information dialog displays current GPS status information Table of Contents 156 Global Mapper User s Manual a Global Mapper REGISTERED Ele weg oos Search GPS Help ux et Hele Un ra drea fasi u Pese bi di rs j ees TNW Dunch Ed s EN NEN JD Differential Fix Curent Location Lat Lon 39 00 41 19 H 94 19 00 72 W nter Global Syste 385983 45 4318553 22 Elevator 368 6 m 1203 3 ft Accuracy EPHE 25 ft Current Speed Curert Heading 60 mph 136 a P
7. Numbers C Letters Reverse Stat at Prefix With Step Reverse Maming Columns First Then Rows Prepend Oto Numbers to Make Same Length Create Folders for Each Row or Col if Reversed Separate Rows and Columns with Underscore Grid Cell Overlap Overlap Grid Cells by ID Percent of Cell Size Skip Existing Files Use to Complete Cancelled Exports The Gridding panel provides the user with the means to easily split up data on export into a regularly spaced grid if desired using one of the following options e No Grid This option means that no gridding will be done only a single file with be exported with the full specified export bounds This is the default option e Specify Number of Rows and Columns Specifies that the data should be broken up into the given number of rows and columns of tiles Every tile will have the same width and height unless you check the Crop Right and Bottom Cells to Export Bounds option in which case the exported tiles along the right and bottom may be slightly smaller than the other so that no data from outside the specified export bounds is used e Specify Individual Grid Cell Width and Height Allows the user to specify the desired width and height in ground units that they wish each grid cell tile to be Every tile will have that width and height which means that the right most column and bottom most row of tiles could go beyond the specified export bounds If you specify negative cell widt
8. Reclassify Features Based on an Attribute and Display Label General Overview Table of Contents 163 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper script files allow the user to create custom batch processes that make use of the functionality built in to Global Mapper From a script one can import data in any of the numerous formats supported by the software reproject that data if desired and export it to a new file Global Mapper script files consist of a series of command lines Each command line begins with a command A series of parameter value pairs should follow the command These pairs should be written as parameter value No spaces should exist before or after the equal sign Individual parameter value pairs should be separated by spaces If a pair requires spaces internal to the value quotes may be used around the entire value For example for a filename with spaces the pair could look like FILENAME c my documents test tif Command lines typically consist of one line each To extend a command to another line use the backslash character at the end of the line There are a few exceptions to this including the DEFINE PROJ and DEFINE SHAPE commands and the looping functionality provided by the DIR LOOP START and DIR LOOP END commands Batch Mode Operation You can run a Global Mapper script file automatically be passing it on the command line to the Global Mapper exe file The script file will be run with no user inte
9. The Export DEM command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a native format USGS DEM file Table of Contents 23 Global Mapper User s Manual When selected the command displays the DEM Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the quadrangle name grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DTED Command The Export DTED command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to native format DTED files DTED files support a set of fixed resolutions i e DTED levels which are defined as aligning on particular boundaries When you select the DTED level to export to and the export bounds this defines which DTED tiles need to be generated to conform to the DTED standards for that level The filename that you select for the export is used as a base with the lat lon coordinates of the southwest corner of each tile appended to each filename as it is exported When selected the command displays the DTED Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a DTED Options panel which allows the user to set up the DTED level and other options a Gridding panel and an
10. General Esport Bounds Quadrangle Name Vertical Units Resolution AAMS 30 meters AMIE 30 meters IF vau wish ta change the ground units that the resolution is specified in you need to change the current projection by going to Canfig Projection Iv Interpolate to Fill Small Gaps in Data The General panel allows the user to specify the quadrangle name DEMs only vertical units and grid spacing of an elevation grid being exported The Quadrangle Name field allows the user to enter the quad name to place in the header of a native format USGS DEM being exported The Vertical Units field allows the user to select the vertical units to use when exporting the data 1 e meters or feet Any input data not in the selected vertical units will be automatically converted on export The Resolution section allows the user to selected the grid spacing to use when generating the elevation data set The default value is the average of the grid spacings of all the currently loaded elevation overlays When selected the nterpolate to Fill Small Gaps option specifies that small gaps in between and within the data sets being exported will be filled in by interpolating the surrounding data to come up with an elevation for the point in question This is useful when data sets do not line up exactly and so have small gaps in between them Table of Contents 80 Global Mapper User s Manual Image Rectification G
11. NOS GEO a NOS GEO format chart file NTF GRID a NTF grid format file OPTIMI GRID an Optimi terrain or clutter grid format file OZI an OziExplorer format waypoint WPT or track PLT file PCX a PC Paintbrush PCX format file PCX5 a Garmin PCX5 format waypoint WPT or track TRK file ROCKWORKS GRID a RockWorks Grid format file RPF Raster Product Format database like CADRG RPF FRAME single frame from a Raster Product Format database like CADRG S57 a S 57 chart file SDTS a SDTS transfer SEGPI a SEGPI seismic shotpoint file SHAPEFILE an ESRI Shapefile SURFERGRID a Surfer grid format file SWEDISHDEMGRID a Swedish DEM grid format file TERRASCAN a TerraScan LIDAR format file TIGER LINE a Tiger Line format file USGS DEM a native format USGS DEM file VPF a Vector Product Format file such as VMAP or DNC data e VULCAN 3D a Vulcan3D triangulation file ZMAP PLUS a Geographix Zmap Plus format file e PROMPT IF TYPE UNKNOWN set to NO if you don t want the user to be prompted to select a file type if the type cannot automatically be determined useful when looping e HIDDEN set to YES to cause this overlay to be hidden from view after it is loaded The default is to show the overlay e ANTI ALIAS elevation and raster only specifies whether to remove jagged edges by making a subtle transition between pixels Turning off this option he
12. 6931 ntemational1909 Hayford Intl 1924 EGYPT197 629 Hemeti900 0 0 EGYPT GULF OF SUEZS 650TL 6706 Helmeti900 1 0 0 ESTIONIA 1997 6180 S980 ETRSSO 58 JgRSI90 0 FD 1958 ARAQ O 6132 akel880 RGS O O o FINLAND HAYFORD 6123 jntemational 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 GDA 94 AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1994 6283 GRSI9S0 O ooo GGRS87 GREECE 6021 S980 GOOGLE MAPS SPHERE RADIUS 6378137 Unknown Sphere Radius 6378137m GRS80ELLIPSOID Unkown JGRS1980 GUAMI93 oO 6675 akel8 O HARTEBEESTHOEK 1994 S AFRICA 6148 QGRSI9S0 O Z o O 00 HERAT NORTH AFGHANISTAN 6055 Itemational 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 HERMANNSKOGEL Unknown jBesell amp 4 HJORSEY195 6658 Itemational 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 HONGKONG193 6738 Jntematonal 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 HUNGARIAN DATUM 1972 637 GRS19G7 ndonsin1974 INDIAN BANGLADESH Unknown Everest 1830 INDIAN MEAN VALUE Unknown Everest1830 INDIAN NEPAL O 616 Ewes 0 INDIAN THAILAND Unknown Everest 1830 INDIAN 1954 O 639 jEvees i30 INDIAN 1975 O 6M0 jEvees i 0 INDONESIA 1974 638 GRSI9G7 ndonsinl974 IRENETIS O 615
13. Export Polish MP cGPSMapper File Command Export SEGPI Command Export Shapefile Command Export Simple ASCII Text File Command Export Surfer BLN Command Export SVG Command Export Tom Tom OV2 File Command Export Tsunami OVR Command Export WAsP MAP File Command Export ZMap XYSeglId File Command e Export Web Formats Google Maps VE WW etc Export Google Maps Tiles Command Export KML KMZ Command Export SVG Command Export VRML Command Export Virtual Earth Tiles Command Export World Wind Tiles Command e Batch Convert Reproject e Combine Terrain Layers e Generate Contours Command e Print Command e Print Preview Command e Print Setup Command e Exit Command Open Data File s Command u The Open Data File s command allows the user to open additional data files into the main Global Mapper view If no other data is already loaded and the user has not explicitly set a projection the view will adopt the projection and datum of the first data file selected for loading If other data is already loaded the selected data files will be displayed in the current projection datum Note Global Mapper automatically opens files with tar gz extensions without the use of a decompression tool such as Winzip This is particularly useful for SDTS transfers which are typically distributed in a tar gz Table of Contents Global Mapper User s Manual format Open Generic ASCII Text File s Command The Open
14. If you are currently tracking a GPS device the Information command will display the GPS Information dialog pictured below This dialog displays status information about the current GPS connection as well as the current GPS location in both lat lon and the current global coordinate sytem speed heading and accuracy estimate GPS Information r Connection Status 3D Fix Current Location Lat Lon 39 37 3 2280 N 104 54 13 7100 W Global System 104 9038083333 39 6192300000 Accuracy EFH 0 0 m POOP 1 90 Copy Location to Clipboard Mum Sats Used 10 Curent Elevation 1737 3 m 5699 792 ft 1 Current Speed Current Heading 0 0 kph 222 Manage GPS Vessels The Manage GPS Vessels command will display the Manage GPS Devices dialog pictured below This dialog displays a list of all GPS devices that are currently being tracked and provides the ability to modify several settings related to the GPS devices such as device icon and track style allowed boundary etc This dialog can be considered the central command center for fleet management operations when tracking multiple GPS devices through a compatible receiver Table of Contents 159 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper v10 01 REGISTERED File Edit view Tools Search GPS Help n alala o esl a x fnere BB dal M GNE BEY GPS Devices Mame Group El
15. MNComy Dodg MN COUNTY DOUGLAS 6152 MNCounty Douglas MN COUNTY GOODHUE 6152 MNCouny Goodhue MN COUNTY GRANT 6132 MNComy Gran MN COUNTY HOUSTON 6152 MNCouny Houston MNCOUNTY ISANT 6152 MNCouy Isanti MN COUNTY ITASCANORTH 6122 MNCounty ItascaNorth MN COUNTY ITASCA SOUTH 6152 MNCounty ItascaSouth MN COUNTY JACKSON 6152 JjMNCoumty Jakson MN COUNTY KANABEC 6152 MN County Kanabec MN COUNTY KANDIYOHI 6152 MN County Kandiyohi Built in Datums 2 9 1 2 5 Global Mapper User s Manual MN COUNTY LAKE OF THE WOODS NORTH 6152 MNCounty Lakeofihe Woods North MN COUNTY LAKE OF THE WOODS SOUTH 6152 MNCounty Lakeofihe Woods South __ MN COUNTY E SUEUR 6152 MIN County Le Sueur MN COUNTY LINCOLN 6152 MNCounty Lincoln MN COUNTY LYON 612 MNComy Lyn MN COUNTY MAHNOMEN 6152 jMNComty Mahomen MN COUNTY MARSHALL 6152 MNComty Mamhill MN COUNTY MCLEOD 6152 jMNComy Mdeod MN COUNTY MEEKER 6152 MNComy Mekr MN COUNTY MORRISON 6152 MNCounty Morrison MN COUNTY MOWER 612 MNComy Mowr MNCOUNTY MURRAY 612 MNComy Mury MN COUNTY NOBLES 6152 IMNCounty Nobles MN COUNTY NORMAN 612 jMNComy Noman MN COUNTY OLMSTED 6152 MNCouny Olmsted MN COUNTY POLK 652 jMNComy Pok 6152
16. Run Script in the Contest of the Main View Le Use Already Loaded Data Hun Script Close The Script File pane displays the currently loaded script file To load a new script file for processing press the Load Script button at the bottom left corner of the dialog If you would like the script file to make use of data already loaded in the main view and to also affect what is displayed in the main view check the Run Script in the Context of the Main View option prior to running the script To run the loaded script file press the Run Script button Any warning error or status messages generated while running the script will be output to the Script Results pane When you are done processing scripts press the Cancel button to close the dialog Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to run Global Mapper script files Capture Screen Contents to Image Command Table of Contents 18 Global Mapper User s Manual The Capture Screen Contents to Image command allows user to save the current contents of the Global Mapper window to a JPEG PNG Geo TIFF or Windows Bitmap BMP file In addition the generated image can be generated in a higher resolution than the screen to provide greater fidelity Also a world file for georeferencing in other software packages as well as a projection PRJ file describing the native ground reference system of the image can be optionally generated as well Unlike the raster export
17. The Receiver Elevation section allows the user to specify the minimum height above the ground or sea level from which the transmitter must be visible for the point to be considered visible Most of the time you ll want to specify an elevation above ground but specifying an elevation above sea level can be useful for aviation purposes Optionally you can also specify that the receiver elevation should be calculated based on an elevation angle relative to the horizon from the transmitter This is useful if you have something like a radar dish that points up at some angle and you want to see where the signal can be seen Table of Contents 136 Global Mapper User s Manual Optionally you can also specify that the receiver elevation should be calculated based on an elevation angle relative to the horizon from the transmitter This is useful if you have something like a radar dish that points up at some angle and you want to see where the signal can be seen Finally you can also specify a transmission angle range for a beam transmitted from the transmitter Then the view shed will depict where that beam would hit the terrain surface or some user specified distance above the surface The View Radius section allows the user to specify how far in each direction from the transmitter to check for visibility Typically you d want to set this to the effective range of your transmitter If you want to ignore areas close to the transmitter you can als
18. The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Global Mapper window To display or hide the status bar use the Status Bar command in the View menu The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items and toolbar icons The left area of the status bar will also show color or elevation of the current pixel if it s over a raster image or the description of the closest vector overlay component If the nearest line feature to the cursor contains recognized addressing information the address nearest the cursor will be displayed The right areas of the status bar indicate the current view scale and the current mouse position in both the global ground reference system and in the Position Display Format currently selected from the Configuration dialog Background The Background command brings up a color dialog box from which the user can select a color to be the new background color of your Global Mapper window The background color selected will also be used to fill in areas of no data in exported raster imagery i e GeoTIFF and JPG files Center on Location The Center on Location command allows the user to manually enter a location to recenter the view on providing a quick and easy way to center yourself on a particular location Properties Properties The Properties command displays a dialog listing properties about the current view window Full View The Full View command zooms such that all of the currently loaded overlays
19. Vertical Bedding Small Aqua Geology Vertical Bedding Small Black Geology Vertical Bedding Small Green Geology Vertical Bedding Small Red Table of Contents 276 Global Mapper User s Manual Built in Datums The following is a list of the datums built in to Global Mapper and the transformation parameters used to convert those datums All parameters are given with respect to transforming from the given datum to WGS 84 dx AIN EL ABD BAHRAIN 6204 jternational 909 Hayford Inl 1924 1 1 ARATU BRAZIL 6208 International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 1 1 1 m ARCIS0 O 609 Carel880 0 ARCIG0 O 610 eo ASTRODOS7IA Unknown international 1909 Hayford Inl 1924 BEDING 1954 6M4 jKussosky S BUKITRIMPAH 609 Beens m E 4 f 4 4 i w Iw I cae 22 eo j CARTHAGE 223 Clarke 880 CHAD WG1998 Unknown GSD D 8SLOVENIA Unknown Bessel i84i 6 DEALULPISCULUII970 6317 JKmsovky O DUTCH RD 689 Bessa 5 EASTER ISLAND 967 6719 jternatonall909 Hayford in 1924 2 ED50 SICILY 6230 International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 ED50 SPAIN PORTUGAL 6230 International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 Built in Datums 2 1 NO Global Mapper User s Manual ED 6668 Jntrma onall967 EDS J
20. Widely Spaced Left Only Ium med UA Comb Widely Spaced Right Only Comb Long amp Short Teeth Left Only Table of Contents 208 Global Mapper User s Manual Comb Long amp Short Teeth Right Only Comb Double Teeth Left Only Comb Double Teeth Right Only Comb Triplet Left Only oe D Rake Narrow Spaced Left Only Rake Narrow Spaced Right Only Rake Widely Spaced Left Only Rake Widely Spaced Right Only Table of Contents 209 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid with Minus Signs on Left EG Solid with Minus Signs on Right E Solid with Plus Signs on Left fo Solid with Plus Signs on Right Ex a ee ee Yd F 4 F H Solid with Dots on Left Solid with Dots on Right BE I Solid with Ts on Right Solid with Rectangles on Left Table of Contents 210 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid with Rectangles on Right Solid with Squares on Left Solid with Squares on Right Half Circles Tightly Spaced Left Only Half Circles Tightly Spaced Right Only Dd Half Circles Widely Spaced Left Only Half Circles Widely Spaced Right Only Solid with Diamonds on Left Solid with Diamonds on Right Table of Contents 211 Global Mapper User s Manual Se uie cs S V Track Opens Towards End of Null Line EL EL S xL NL a 2222 2 2 22 V Track Opens Towards Start of Null Line SA Pe PP eS C Track Opens Towards End of Line
21. You can setup the input range for each color channel and what output range to map it to as well as specify a saturation value Table of Contents 120 Global Mapper User s Manual Raster Options Display Color Contrast Adjustment Cropping Palette Feathering Color Grade Projection Red Color Channel Grading Input Range 65 to 211 oo Output Range Oto 255 _ oe E Green Color Channel Grading Input Range Oto 255 p Output Range 84 to 138 Blue TU Channel Grading Input Range Oto 255 p Output Range 0 to 2755 Elevation Data Options Selecting the Options button while only gridded elevation overlays are selected displays the Elevation Options dialog The Elevation Options dialog consists of two tabs one for controlling the display of the overlay s and the other for modifying the elevation values within the overlay s The Display tab pictured below contains controls allowing you to control the color intensity brightness darkness color transparency blending anti aliasing and color shading of the selected layers Table of Contents 121 Global Mapper User s Manual Elevation Options Display Alter Elevation Values Color Intensity Lighter Default Translucency Can You See Through It 100 0 Transparent z 4 Opaque Blend Mode No Blend Transparent Set Transparent Color Iv Anti Alias Pixels Interpolate Shader Defau
22. for each successive row or column If the Reverse Naming option is checked the column name will come before the row name in the export filename otherwise the row name will be before the column name If the Prepend 0 to Numbers to Make Same Length option is checked the longest number will be found for both the column and row names and all other column row names will have 0 s prepended to make them all the same length If the Create Folders for Each Row or Col if Reversed option 1s checked a separate output sub folder will be created for each row or column that is exported preventing too many files from being placed in a single folder The Separate Rows and Columns with Underscore option causes an underscore to be used to separate row and column values in the output filenames If not checked then no separator character will be used The Grid Cell Overlap section allows the user to specify that the generated grid cells should overlap each other by a certain percentage of the cell size This option is useful for loading the slightly overlapping result files into something like Photoshop for color matching between cells If the Skip Existing Files option 1s checked any grid cell file that already exists at the destination location will be skipped This makes it easy to resume a cancelled export as the already exported files would not be re exported Table of Contents 79 Global Mapper User s Manual Elevation Export General Options Panel
23. pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a DGN Options panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Table of Contents 42 Global Mapper User s Manual DGN Export Options DGN Options Gridding Export Bounds Text Size Smaller Left Bigger Right 1 00 Unit Resolution 0000 Generate Projection PRJ File Iv Generate 3D DGN File if 3D Features Present Generate Tags for Feature Attributes m Set Global Origin to the Lower Left of Design Plane Rather than at the Center of the Design Plane Replace Dark Line Colors with White This is Useful if the Exported DGH File will be Used in Other Software that Uses a Default Black Background i Cancel spp Help The Text Size section allows the user to control how large display label text will be in the created file The Unit Resolution value is used to specify the resolution unit saved in the DGN file If the Generate PRJ File option is checked a prj projection file describing the projection of the coordinates in the file will automatically be created If the Generate 3D DGN File if 3D Features Present option is checked the entire DGN file will be marked as 3D and any features that have a elevation data associated with them will be stored as 3D features If the Generate Tags for Feature Attributes option is checked any attributes
24. 0 and black will be a value of 1 but you can reverse this by selecint the Grayscale Min Is Black palette option e Elevation 16 bit integer samples This option generates an elevation GeoTIFF using the currently loaded elevation grid data sets Elevation samples will be stored as signed 16 bit integers There are only a handful of software packages that can recognize a vertical GeoTIFF properly so only use this if you know it works e Elevation 32 bit floating pointr samples This option generates an elevation GeoTIFF using the currently loaded elevation grid data sets Elevation samples will be stored as 32 bit floating point values There are only a handful of software packages that can recognize a vertical GeoTIFF properly so only use this if you know it works When generating a 256 color 8 bits per pixel GeoTIFF it is necessary to select a palette indicates what 256 colors will be used to describe the image being exported The following choices of palette are available e Image Optimized Palette The palette generated will be an optimal mix of up to 256 colors that will closely represent the full blend of colors in the source images This option will generate the best results but can more than double the export time required if any high color images are present in the export set If all of the input data is palette based and the combined palette of those files has 256 colors or less then the combined files of the input file will jus
25. 6302 Clarke 1858 WGS72 6322 WGS72 WGS4 626 JWGSE 00 WI COUNTY SHEBOYGAN 6152 WlCouty Sheboygan ZANDERIJ SURINAME 6311 International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 Built in Ellipsoids 6378249 200 6377276 345 Helmert 1906 Interplanetary Mars 2001 3396190 000 Interplanetary Mercury 2439000 000 Built in Ellipsoids 284 Global Mapper User s Manual Interplanetary Moon 1737400 000 Interplanetary Neptune 24712000 000 Interplanetary Pluto 1175000 000 Interplanetary Saturn 60268000 000 605 1800 000 Interplanetary Venus 1985 Krassovsky MN County Anoka 6378490 569 6378454 907 Built in Ellipsoids 285 Global Mapper User s Manual 6378525 621 6378434 181 6378498 189 6378403 701 MN County Rice Built in Ellipsoids 286 Global Mapper User s Manual Mercury 1960 6377304 063 6356752 314 6378137 000 Built in Ellipsoids 28
26. Border Border Area Type Example Fill Pattern Fill Color Width Style Color Anchorage Area No Fill Solid Fill 0 235 0 Anchorage Area 0 0 0 aH y B a B p S a County Subdivision 0 0 0 p Solid ubdivision a a a a Null e e Solid Solid 128 128 128 Solid Coverage Quad Coverage uad No Fill T oA Ul 5 Intermittent Dry Lakebed 5 Water Pattern Intermittent Water Pattern Null 0 0 0 132 130 255 Null 0 0 0 Intermittent Lake 132 130 255 Null 0 0 0 Table of Contents 199 Global Mapper User s Manual Intermittent Stream River Intertidal Area Intertidal Area Isobath Area Iso height Area Iso height Area Lake lt 0 5 sq mi Lake 500 sq mi L z Lake 1 5 sq mi Lake 10 30 sq mi Table of Contents Intermittent Water Pattern Solid Fill No Fill Solid Fill No Hill Solid Fill Solid Fill Solid Fill Solid Fill Solid Fill 132 130 255 192 240 188 132 130 255 c 0 0 211 0 0 211 0 0 211 0 0 211 0 0 211 Null Null Solid Null Solid Null Null Null Null 0 0 0 0 0 0 128 64 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 200 Global Mapper User s Manual Lake 100 250 sq mi Solid Fill 0 0 211 Null 0 0 0 Lake 250 500 Solid Fill sq mi 0 0 211 Null 0 0 0
27. C No Contrast Adjustment Linear Percentage Stretch Most Common Stretch Size Standard Deviations 2 f Linear Minimum Maximum Stretch I Share Contrast Adjustment with Other Layers The Color Balance sliders allow you modify the relative amounts of red green and blue in the image thus allowing precise control over the color balance in the image The Contrast Adjustment options are used to adjust the contrast of imagery The Linear Percentage Stretch contrast adjustment method applies a standard deviation contrast adjust to each color channel in the image You can specify how many standard deviations from the mean that the range is stretch to for rendering although you ll generally want to stick with the default of 2 This is particularly useful for improving the display of dark or satellite imagery such as IKONOS images and is required for the display of imagery with more than 8 bits per color channe The Linear Min Max Stretch method finds the minimum and maximum values in each color channel and stretches that range to a range of 0 to 255 For most imagery with 8 bits or less per color channel this will have no effect but can produce a good result for high color imagery The Share Contrast Adjustment with Other Layers checkbox allows you to specify that the calculated contrast adjustment used should be based on all loaded raster layers that have contrast adjustment enabled rather than just the color histogram for this singl
28. Custom Links m Dk Descriptions Las Vegas NV 0 Cancel Image URL ecwp waw earthetc com images usa Laseg di The Group Name drop list allows the user to select which group if any to place the new link in Any of the predefined groups can be selected or a new group name can be entered Leaving the group name blank will cause the new link to appear at the root level of the tree The Description field is where you enter the human readable description of the link This is what will be displayed for the link on the main dialog Leaving this blank will cause the URL to be displayed instead The URL field is the most important piece of this dialog This is where you specify the address of the ECW file to load The URL should begin with the prefix ecwp with the remainder being a valid path to an ECW file served using ER Mapper s Image Web Server software When you ve completed entering information about the new web link press the OK button to complete your entry and have it added to the web link tree in the Load Image From Web dialog Pressing the Edit Link button allows the user to edit the currently selected web link Note that the built in web links cannot be edited Pressing the Delete Link button will delete the currently selected web link or group from the web link tree If you get an error message indicating that your settings have been updated to support the ECWP protocol whenever you try to load an ECW layer f
29. DGN color number for each feature to be appended to the feature description level number DXF DWG Import INSERT entities as point features if checked this option specifies that the content of INSERT entities i e blocks in DXF and DWG files should be loaded as a single point feature at the location of the INSERT DXF DWG Create New Types from Layers if checked this option will cause new Global Mapper types to automatically be created for every DXF DWG layer name encountered for which a Global Mapper type does not already exist Show Pixel Location in Status Bar if checked this option causes the native pixel location of the topmost raster or gridded elevation file to be displayed in the status bar as you move the cursor around in addition to the color and or elevation data Use DOS Character Set for Default Label Fonts if checked this option specifies that default display label fonts should use the OEM character set code page 437 rather than the ANSI character set code page 1252 This option can be helpful if you are having problem with accented characters not displaying correctly from some data sets those data sets encoded in code page 437 rather than 1252 Use Path to First Loaded File as Default Export Path if checked this option specifies that when exporting a new file the default export path will be the path of the first loaded file during this session rather than the path to the last exported file in any session Use CR
30. Default Attribute for All Features option is checked the attribute selected in the Default Attribute Code panel will be used for all features Otherwise the selected attribute will only be used for those features whose Global Mapper classification could not be automatically mapped to one of the CDF attributes Table of Contents 40 Global Mapper User s Manual CDF Export Options COF Options Export Bounds Default Attribute Code Di and Gas Fields Use Default Attribute Code for All Features Text Size 8 pt font 40 feet high test Smaller J Larger Projection Use the options below to control what projection the data exported to the package file will be in You can choose to either export the data be in the current view projection or you can save everthing with lat lan coordinate values C Use Currently Selected View Projection f Save Data in Geographic Lat Lon Projection Cancel Ap Help Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export CSV Command The Export CSV command allows the user to export any loaded point data sets to a CSV Comma Separated File file When selected the command displays the CSV Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Options panel which allows the user to set up whether or not to include an elevation attribute for each point as well as whether to include the nam
31. EXPORT VECTOR FILENAME SDIRSSFNAME WO EXT CONTOURS DXF TYPE DXF GEN PRJ FILE YES Export the contours to a 3D shape file EXPORT VECTOR FILENAME DIRS FNAME WO EXT CONTOURS SHP TYPE SHAPEFILE SHAPE TYPE LINES GEN 3D LINES YES GEN PRJ FILE YES End the loop DIR LOOP END Reclassify Features Based on an Attribute and Display Label GLOBAL MAPPER SCRIPT VERSION 1 00 Import the file to modify IMPORT FILENAME C Temp export testNtiger wyandotte sample gmp Assign the type railroad to all features with a CFCC attribute with a value of A41 and a display label with 74 in it somewhere ASSIGN TYPE LINE TYPE RAILROAD COMPARE STR CFCC A41 COMPARE STR amp ltFeature Name amp gt 74 Table of Contents 197 Global Mapper User s Manual BUILT IN AREA TYPES FILL PATTERNS AND BORDER STYLES This section reviews the area line and point styles built into Global Mapper e Area Styles Area Types Area Fill Patterns Area Border Styles Area Styles Using the Area Styles panel users can configure how areas of a given type will be displayed in Global Mapper Area fill border style and color can be modified on a type by type basis The Show Labels for Areas of This Type option allows users to turn area labels off on a type by type basis Area Types are shown in the Global Mapper Area Types table Tables showing the Global Mapper Fill Patterns and Border Styles follow the Area Types table Global Mapper re
32. Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DXF 3D Face File Command The Export DXF 3D Face File command allows the user to export any loaded gridded elevation data sets to a DXF 3D Face file When selected the command displays the DXF 3D Face Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DXF Mesh Command The Export DXF Mesh command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a 3D DXF Mesh file When selected the command displays the DXF Mesh Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DXF Point Command The Export DXF Point command allows the user to export any loaded
33. Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export JPG2000 Command Table of Contents 31 Global Mapper User s Manual The Export JPG2000 command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to a JPG2000 format file JPG2000 files are highly compressed and great for storing things like satellite imagery There is no size restriction on exported JPG2000 files so you can store many terabytes worth of imagery within a single highly compressed JPG2000 file When selected the command displays the JPG2000 Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing and target compression ration a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export If you would like to generate a lossless JPG2000 format file simply slide the Target Compression Ratio slider all the way to the right 1 1 target compression ration Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export KML KMZ Command The Export KML KMZ command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to a KML KMZ format file for display in Google Barth If you are wanting to export a vector KML KMZ file from loaded vector data use the File gt Export Vector Data gt Export KML KMZ menu command instead
34. Hed band grayscale STYLE Visual Green band grayscale STYLE Visual Blue band grayscale STYLE Near lA band 1 Landsat band 4 grayscale STYLE Near lA band 2 Landsat band 5 grayscale STYLE Near lA band 2 Landsat band 7 grayscale SATH reflectance magnitude 30m taa Open All Files in a Directory Tree Command The Open AII Files in a Directory Tree command allows the user to open all of the files matching a user specified filename mask under a user selected directory You will first be prompted to select a folder from which to load the files After selecting the folder you will be prompted to enter a filename mask for all Table of Contents 13 Global Mapper User s Manual of the files that you would like to attempt to load After selecting a filename mask all files under the selected folder which match the filename mask and are recognized by Global Mapper as a known data type will be loaded The filename mask supports the and wildcard characters The default mask of will check all files under the selected folder You can also cause data to only be loaded from selected folders as well For example if you had a large collection of folders with data split up into 1x1 degree blocks with the folder names depecting the 1x1 degree block they held you could use a directory name mask to load only those blocks that you wanted For example you might use a mask of N4 W10 tif to load all TIFF files between
35. LF in World Files TFW Instead of LF if checked this specifies that lines in generated world files will be terminated using a carriage return CR and linefeed LF character as is customary on Windows systems rather than just a LF character Use this if your world files are not being recognized by your Windows based applications Automatically Create Backup Copies of Workspace Files if checked this option will cause your current workspace file to automatically be backed up every so often 1 e after so many vector edits etc These backup copies will be created in the same folder as the workspace file and have the suffix auto backupX where X is a number from 0 to 9 Lock Active Workspace File to Prevent Sharing if checked this option prevents other users from opening and using the same workspace file that you are using while you have it open This is useful in network environments where you don t want one person s work to accidentally overwrite anothers If you try to open a locked workspace it will automatically be opened in read only mode which will prevent you from overwriting the original workspace file when saving Center on Cursor when Zooming with Mouse Wheel when this option is checked or when holding down Ctrl and you rotate the mouse wheel over the map the map will zoom in and out and maintain the location under your cursor at the same location rather than just zooming in and out on the current screen center Export Keep
36. Main Connected GPS Device Default Group 0 0 mph chal 1r324n DEMO 00 z Default Group gt 1 2 mph 166 0 528 2251 Demo O71 Default Group 3 1 mph 136 0 B32 4321 Speed Heading B E P Ww i A RGB 106 106 106 Pix 0 0 TerraServer DOQ Denver Colorado United States 1 1667 GEO WG584 104 90414688 The dialog buttons perform the following functions e Set Track Display Style Allows you to select the drawing style to use when displaying the track log for the selected device e Select Device Icon Allows you to select the what icon to use for the selected device on the main map display You can choose from one of the available point symbols or choose to use the GPS vessel selection which allows for direction of travel to be easily visualized e Set Device Boundary Allows you to select a rectangular or polygonal boundary to restrict the selected GPS device s to If a device travels outside its allowed boundary a warning message will be Table of Contents 160 Global Mapper User s Manual displayed e Set Device Display Name Sets the name to use for the selected GPS device when displaying it on the map display and in the device list e Set Device Display Font Allows you to select the font to use when displaying the name of the selected device on the map You can also right click on the device list to
37. Mapper User s Manual BIL BIP BSQ Export Options Options Gridding Export Bounds C BIF Band Interleaved Pixel Raster Imagery BSQ Band Sequential Raster Imagery Grayscale Imagery 8 bits per pixel C Elevation 2 Bytes 16 bits per Sample C Elevation 4 Bytes 32 bits per Sample Sample Spacing A axis 30 meters Y axis 30 meters i Always Generate Square Pixels If you wish to change the ground units that the spacing is specified in you need ta change the curent projection by going to Contig gt Projection Vertical Units TERE i Save Scale Elevation Legend Gnd if Displayed Save Vector Data if Displayed Iv Generate a World File BLW file for BIL Generate ERS ERMapper Header File Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export BT Binary Terrain Command The Export BT Binary Terrain command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a BT Binary Terrain format file When selected the command displays the BT Binary Terrain Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing to use a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DEM Command
38. Medium Black Geology Dip Bedding Medium Green Geology Dip Bedding Medium Red Geology Dip Bedding Small Aqua Geology Dip Bedding Small Black Geology Dip Bedding Small Green Geology Dip Bedding Small Red Geology Dip Overturned Medium Aqua Geology Dip Overturned Medium Black EELELPPPBEL tlele HHE Ee Table of Contents 232 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Dip Overturned Medium Green Geology Dip Overturned Medium Red Geology Dip Overturned Small Aqua Geology Dip Overturned Small Black Geology Dip Overturned Small Green Geology Dip Overturned Small Red Geology Foliation Closed Medium Aqua Geology Foliation Closed Medium Black Geology Foliation Closed Medium Green Geology Foliation Closed Medium Red Geology Foliation Closed Small Aqua HPPRPPELEELEL epos Table of Contents 233 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Foliation Closed Small Black Geology Foliation Closed Small Green Geology Foliation Closed Small Red Geology Foliation Open Medium Aqua Geology Foliation Open Medium Black Geology Foliation Open Medium Green Geology Foliation Open Medium Red Geology Foliation Open Small Aqua Geology Foliation Open Small Black Geology Foliation Open Small Green Geology Foliation Open Small Red
39. N40 and N50 and W110 and W100 You can also specify multiple masks if you need more than one to describe the set of files that you would like to load Simply separate the masks with a space Open ECW File from the Web Command The Open ECW File from the Web command allows the user to open an ER Mapper Compressed Wavelet ECW image file directly from an Image Web Server URL While these files may be terabytes in actual size only the portion needed for the current display window is downloaded allowing for the browsing of extremely large data sets Selecting the Open ECW File from the Web command displays the Load Image From Web dialog pictured below This dialog allows the user to either select a predefined web link for loading or to enter the URL of any available ECW file served by Image Web Server Load Image From eb H Africa Australia Cancel did Canada Help Cosa Denmark Finland Ikonos Japan OK Add Link B 1941 tenorac E dit Link 1meter calif 2000_tenoroc Delete Link dii The tree on the left of the dialog allows the user to select which data file they wish to load Global Mapper comes with several dozen useful links already entered into the tree To access your own ECW image from the web press the Add Link button This button causes the Add New Web Link dialog pictured below to be displayed Table of Contents 14 Global Mapper User s Manual Group M ame My
40. Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export PNG Command The Export PNG command allows the user to export any loaded data sets to a PNG file When selected the command displays the PNG Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of an Options panel pictured below which allows the user to select whether to export an 8 bit palette based PNG or a 24 bit RGB PNG file as well as other applicable options a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export PNG Export Options PHG Export Options Gridding Export Bounds File Type C 24 bit AGB Larger Size Full Color Palette Image Optimized Palette Sample Spacing A axis D 00027777777 7789941 arc degrees Y awis 0 000277777777799941 arc degrees Iv Always Generate Square Pixels IF you wish to change the ground units that the spacing is specified in you need to change the current projection by going to Config Projection Save Scale Elevation Legend Grid if Displayed Save Vector Data if Displayed i Generate orld File i Generate Projection PAJ File iw Make Background Vaid Pixels Transparent Cancel Help Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export RockWorks Grid Command Table of Contents 35 Global Mapper User s Manual The Export RockWo
41. Pixel if any Part is Inside Crop Area when this option is checked and you are cropping a raster elevation export to a selected area feature an exported pixel cell will be kept if any corner of that cell is within the crop area rather than the default requirement of the center of the cell being in the crop area Table of Contents 91 Global Mapper User s Manual The Restore Default Settings button will restore all Global Mapper settings from the Configuration dialog to their default values Vector Display Options The Vector Display panel pictured below controls options for the display of vector data areas lines and points Configuration Point Styles Vertical Options Shader Options Projection General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles Render Select From Filter W Areas Areas Iv Lines Iv Lines Lines Iw Points lv Points Points Vector Map Detail ess More Vector Laver Ordering During Draw Order Vector Features by Type Before Layer Order f Vector Data Will Always Draw on Top of Loaded Raster Layers This is the Default Setting Order Vector Features by Layer Order First Then Type Within a Layer This Allows Flaster Layers to Overlay Vector Data Render Area and Line Vertices Shitt Render Deleted Features Iw raw Feature Labels Always Display All Labels Render Line Direction Arrow Cancel Help The Render section contains the settin
42. Selected Features to Clipboard 9 Cut Selected Features to Clipboard 0 Paste Features from Clipboard 0 Paste Features from Clipboard Keep Copy 9 Select All Features with Digitizer Tool c View Menu 9 Toolbars 9 Status Bar 9 3D View 9 Background Color 9 Center on Location Properties 9 Full View 9 Zoom In 9 Zoom In Micro 9 Zoom Out 9 Zoom Out Micro 9 Zoom To Scale 9 Save Current View 9 Restore Last Saved View d Tools Menu 9 Zoom 9 Pan Grab and Drag 9 Measure 9 Feature Info 9 Path Profile LOS Line of Sight 9 View Shed Analysis 0 Digitizer Edit Creating New Features Editing Existing Features Copying Features Cut Copy Paste Snapping to Existing Features When Drawing Snapping Vertically Horizontally When Drawing Table of Contents Global Mapper User s Manual Un doing Digitization Operations Additional Feature Operations 9 Coordinate Convertor Control Center 9 Configure e Search Menu f GPS Menu 0 Start Tracking GPS 0 Stop Tracking GPS 9 Keep the Vessel On Screen 9 Mark Waypoint 9 Vessel Color 9 Vessel Size Setup 9 Information 9 Manage GPS Vessels 0 View NMEA Data Log 9 Clear Tracklog 9 Record Tracklog 0 Save Tracklog g Help Menu 9 Online Help Q User s Group 9 Register Global Mapper 9 Check for Updates 9 Automatically Check for Updates at Startup 9 About Global Mapper 4 OVERLAY CONTROL CENTER a Currently Opened Overlays b Meta
43. The GCP record consists of 5 comma delimited fields the control point name the pixel X and Y coordinates and the corresponding ground X and Y coordinates A separate GCP parameter and value should be used for each control point used in the rectification As an alternative the GCP FILENAME parameter see below can be used instead GCP FILENAME specifies the name of a control point file used to rectify the file being imported GCP PROJ NAME specifies the name of the projection that the ground control points are provided in This name must have been defined with a prior DEFINE PROJ command Use this if you want to specify control points in a projection other than what you want to define as the native projection for the file Note that you must also explicitly specify the name projection of the file using either the PROJ NAME PROJ EPSG CODE or PROJ FILENAME parameters GCP PROJ FILENAME specifies the name of the projection prj file that contains the projection definition for the projection that the ground control points are provided in Use this if you want to specify control points in a projection other than what you want to define as the native projection for the file Note that you must also explicitly specify the name projection of the file using either the PROJ NAME PROJ EPSG CODE or PROJ FILENAME parameters GCP PROJ EPSG CODE specifies the EPSG code of the projection that the ground control points are provided in Use this if you want t
44. Toolbar An open window will appear This window can be set to display only files of selected types with the Files of Type subwindow Files of type AI Supported Types Cancel D l LULC Files lulc az gir Geol IFF DRG DOG DEM Files f tff SOTS Transfer CLG DEM Files catd ddf USGS CDED DEM Files dem dem gez c JPG Files pa DOG Quarter Quad Files sec nec swe HED GTUP O 3O0 BIL Files bil dem tar There is support for opening USGS DLG O DEM and several other file types directly from gzipped archives In addition SDTS DLG SDTS DEM and most other file types can be opened directly from tar gz tgz and zip archive files This means that you no longer need to extract all of those SDTS files to their own directory before opening them Global Mapper will do that automatically Loading Multiple Files Global Mapper will display multiple data sets in correct geospatial positions that is adjacent data sets can be mosaicked and vector data can be displayed on top of raster and elevation data Choose Open Data Files icon from the Toolbar and select files The registered version Global Mapper has no limit on the number of overlays that can be viewed simultaneously A maximum of four files of any type may be viewed simultaneously in the unregistered version of Global Mapper You can also load all of the files under a directory and all subdirectories under that dire
45. Type View Shed Coverage Area New Type Z Edit Type Delete Type Attributes 5 s Pattem Solid Fill Color Add Custom Fill Pattem Delete Fill Pattem 5 Border Width Style Nul Jc Color Es Transparency Haw See How See Through is is the Area 100 r Transparent Opaque Iv Show Labels for Areas of This Type Select Label Font Line Styles REFERENCE GUIDE ALERT Built In Line Types and Styles A graphical reference guide to the line types and drawing styles built in to Global Mapper The Line Styles panel pictured below allows the user to configure how lines of a given type will be displayed in Global Mapper The line style width color and label font can be modified on a type by type basis When selecting a line width you can choose a fixed width in screen pixels which means that the line will draw the same width regardless of your zoom level or you can choose the option to specify the line width as a New Table of Contents 95 Global Mapper User s Manual Fixed Width in Meters When you do that your line will be drawn at a given number of meters in width which means it will get thicker as you zoom in and smaller as you zoom out to maintain the same width in ground units In addition the Show Labels for Lines of This Type When Present option allows users to tur
46. User s Manual When you select the command the Virtual Earth Export Options dialog pictured below appears allowing you to setup the export This dialog allows you to specify the display name of the map set in your web browser the zoom level setup the format of the imagery and some additional options There is also an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Virtual Earth Export Options Virtual Earth Options Export Bounds Data Set Name Blue Springs DEM Zoom Level Setup Select the resolution ta use for the maximum detail level in the exported tiles The default selection will preserve full detail for any loaded raster elevation data set Level 14 4 8 meters pixel Number of Zoom Levels to Use 5 Tile Image File Format t JPG Good for Imagery f PNG Good for Scanned Maps and Vector Data Transparency How See Through is the Map Transparent SIL Opaque Save Vector Data if Displayed v Make Image Tiles Transparent PNG Format Only Skip Existing Tiles Use to Resume Cancelled Export Note Users without a permanent registration key that export Virtual Earth tiles will get a large diagonal DEMO symbol across the image Registered users will not see that symbol on their output Export World Wind Tiles Command The Export World Wind Tiles command allows the user to export any loaded data to JPG or PNG files tiled in the configuration required by N
47. Video Tutorial _Georectifying Imagery PDF Files 101 9 Video Tutorial Importing ASCII files into Global Mapper Video Tutorial Exporting to Google Maps 9 Video Tutorial Creating Range Rings Importing Title Blocks and Address Searching Reference Guide Generic ASCII Format Reference Guide Generic ASCII Format Field Descriptions Reference Guide Shortcut Key Reference Reference Guide Supported Datum and Ellipsoid List Reference Guide Built In Area Line and Point Types and Styles 3 MENUBAR AND TOOLBAR a File Menu e Open Data File s Command e Open Generic ASCII Text File s Command e Open All Files in a Directory Tree e Open ECW File from the Web Command e Open Data File at Fixed Screen Location e Unload All Command e Create New Map Catalog Command e Find Data Online Command e Download Online Imagery Topo Terrain Maps Open Printable Searchable Copy PDF Format 1 Global Mapper User s Manual e Load Workspace Command e Save Workspace Command e Save Workspace As Command e Run Script Command e Capture Screen Contents to Image Command e Export Global Mapper Package File e Export Raster and Elevation Data e Export Vector Data e Export Web Formats Google Maps VE WW etc e Batch Convert Reproject e Combine Terrain Layers e Generate Contours Command e Rectify Georeference Imagery Command e Print Command e Print Preview Command e Print Setup Command e Exit Command b Edit Menu 9 Copy
48. When selected the command displays the KML KMZ Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a KML KMZ Options panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export The KML KMZ Options panel allows the user to set up the target image format for storage and the sample spacing as well as other options such as whether to store all of the resulting files in a KMZ file recommended and whether or not to render and save loaded vector data There is also an option to automatically grid the data on export this creates what is known as a SuperOverlay Enabling this option allows very large quantities of data to be efficiently viewed using Google Earth When using this option you can also control the tile size to use when creating the super overlays For very large exports the larger sizes 1024x1024 or 2048x2048 are recommended Table of Contents 32 Global Mapper User s Manual KML KMZ Export Options KML KMZ Options Gridding Export Bounds Export Image Format C PNG Supports Transparency C TIFF Palette TIFF 24 bit RGB Color Sample Spacing A axis 0 000353019822498609 arc degrees 0 000273471253538473 arc degrees Click Here to Calculate Spacing in Other Units Visibility Range Controls lt minLodPixels gt Value This setting controls how far you have to zoom in before your dat
49. You can move area line and point features simply by selecting the feature s that you wish to move then selecting the Move XXX Feature s option from the right click popup menu Once you ve done that simply hold down the left mouse button and drag the features to the desired new location If you d only like to move the selected feature s either horizontally or vertically you can hold down either the X or Y keys on the keyboard to restrict the movement to that axis Holding down both keys will move the feature s diagonally If after moving a feature you decide that you want to undo the move simply select the feature s that you want moved back and select the Restore Original Shape from the right click popup menu If you need to shift offset selected features a particular distance you can also simply right click when the feature s to move are selected and select the Shift Offset Selected Feature s option This will bring up a dialog allowing you to specify a distance to shift the selected features by in both the X and Y direction or some distance along a specified bearing Changing the Shape of Area and Line Features You can change the shape of area and line features in several different ways You ll first have to enable the Show Area and Line Vertices option Shift V is a keyboard shortcut to toggle this setting before having access to the features described below You ll also need to select the vertices to work with before performing
50. Z offsets such as COORD_OFFSET 100000 0 200000 0 0 0 COORD_SCALE specifies the scale factor to apply to any coordinates read in from the file Each coordinate will be multiplied by these scale factor after being read in from the file The scale factors should be specified as a comma delimited list of the X Y and Z scale factors such as COORD_SCALE 0 1 0 1 1 0 NO_DATA_DIST_MULT specifies how far from an actual data point a grid cell has to be before it is treated as a no data value This number is given as a multiple of the diagonal size of a single grid cell as nominally determined by the gridding algorithm or specified with the SPATIAL_RES parameter A value of 0 means that all points should be considered as valid SPATIAL_RES specifies spatial resolution to use when generating an elevation grid from the data Defaults to a good value for maintaining the full spatial resolution of the provided point data if not specified Should be formatted as x_resolution y_resolution The units are the units of the projection specified for the file For example if UTM with meter units was the file projection and you wanted to export at 30 meter spacing the parameter value pair would look like SPATIAL_RES 30 0 30 0 Table of Contents 191 Global Mapper User s Manual e LABEL FIELD specifies the name of the attribute field to use as the label attribute for the features in the file e AREA TYPE specifies the name of the Global Mapper type to use f
51. a pal file describing the palette to use for the export A pal file should be a text file with one line per color with the red green and blue color components for each color in the palette separated by a comma You can save a pal file for an existing palette based file by opening the Overlay Control Center selecting the palette based layer press Options then the Transparent Color button then selecting the option to save a color palette file e 24 bit RGB Create a full 24 bit color image with no palette This will create the best resulting image but will also take the most space e Keep Same as Source File The new file will use the same color encoding as the source file either palette based 24 bit RGB or grayscale The additional list of options varies depending on the particular conversion being performed The meaning of those options is defined below Table of Contents 61 Global Mapper User s Manual e Add Watermark Image when this option is checked you will be prompted to select an image to use as a watermark for your raster format export You will also be allows to select display options for your watermark image such as transparency to provide the desired effect The selected watermark image will be stretched to cover the entire output image for each converted file e Adjust Image Contrast causes the contrast of any input file to be automatically adjusted prior to being exported This is useful for improving the displa
52. a template file that specified a different recognized datum Global Mapper will instead convert to that datum automatically In any case Global Mapper will always automatically do the right thing Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export SEGP1 Command The Export SEGP1 command allows the user to export any loaded 3D line and point vector data sets to a SEGPI format file When selected the command displays the SEGP Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Table of Contents 53 Global Mapper User s Manual Export Shapefile Command The Export Shapefile command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to ESRI Shapefile format files When selected the command displays the Shapefile Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a File Selection panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Shapefile Export Options File Selection Gridding Export Bounds v Export Areas File CXTemp export test iblue_spr Select Iv Export Lines CTemp export
53. allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets i e areas lines and points to a delimited ASCII text file Each vertex in an area or line and the position of each point will be represented When selected the command displays the ASCII Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of an Options panel pictured below and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 55 Global Mapper User s Manual ASCII Export Options Options Coordinate Offset Scale Gridding Export Bounds Coordinate Separator t Semicolon Tab Feature Separator t Mone Blank Line t Custom use n for newline t for tab Coordinate Order X Longitude Easting Coordinate First Then Y C Y Latitude Morthina Coordinate First Then X Iw Export Elevations for Each Vertex Iw Include Feature Attributes Before Coordinate Data Include Drawing Style Attributes Before Coordinate Data Generate PRJ Projection File Cancel S pipi Help The Options panel allows the user to specify what character to user to separate the x y and z coordinates of each vertex In addition the user can specify that they wish to separate each vector feature with a blank line or some other custom separator text The Coordinate Order section allows the user to control the order in which the X easting longitude and Y no
54. allows you to delete the selected vertices To quickly do this without using the right click menu the CTRL Delete hot key will also delete selected vertices e Set Position of Selected Vertices This option displays a dialog allowing you to manually position the selected vertices by entering their new position in either latitude longitude coordinates or coordinates in the currently configured view projection datum If the selected vertices are from a 3D line or area feature you will also be able to set the elevation value to use for the vertex Insert Vertex This option allows you to insert a new vertex into the selected area or line feature To insert the vertex select the menu option then left click at the location where you want the new vertex inserted The vertex will be inserted on the area or line feature at the clicked location along the nearest segment of the feature Alternately if you hold down the SHIFT key while left clicking the new vertex will be placed on the selected feature s at the nearest location to the click location You can also use this feature to extend features The newly created vertices will be automatically selected If you need to add multiple vertices to the selected feature s simply hold down the T key when left clicking to place the vertex and you will remain in the insert vertex mode If after modifying the shape of an area or line feature you decide that you want to undo the changes and restore the feature to its
55. any of the described operations except inserting new vertices The following options are available for reshaping area and line features e Move Selected Vertices This option allows you to move selected vertices to a new location To do this simply hold down the left mouse button and move the vertices to the desired location then release the left mouse button You can continually to refine the location by repeating Right clicking or pressing the ESC key will complete the operation Note that while moving a single vertex you can use the Snapping feature to help align the vertex with existing features If you d only like to move the selected vertices either horizontally or vertically you can hold down either the X or Y keys on the keyboard to restrict the movement to that axis Holding down both keys will move the vertices Table of Contents 150 Global Mapper User s Manual diagonally e Join Selected Vertices This option allows you to set multiple vertices to the same location which is handy for ensuring that there are no gaps along the seams of features Once you ve selected this option hold down the left mouse button and move the vertices to the new desired location then release the left mouse button Right click or press the ESC key to complete the operation once you re done Note that while joining vertices you can use the Snapping feature to help align the vertices with existing features Deleted Selected Vertices This option
56. are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to file to save the data to e TYPE type of elevation file we re exporting to ARCASCIIGRID export an Arc ASCII Grid format file BIL export to a BIL format file simple binary format with header BT export to a BT Binary Terrain format grid file DXF 3DFACE export a DXF 3D face format file DXF MESH export a 3D DXF mesh format file DXF POINT export a 3D DXF point format file ERDAS export to an Erdas Imagine IMG format file FLOATGRID export a Float Grid format file GEOSOFT GRID export to a Geosoft grid format file GEOTIFF export to a GeoTIFF format file GLOBAL MAPPER GRID export to a Global Mapper Grid format file GRAVSOFT GRID export to a Gravsoft Grid format file HE2 export to a HF2 HFZ format file IDRISI RASTER export to an Idrisi elevation format file LEVELLER HF export to a Leveller heightfield file LIDAR LAS export to a Lidar LAS file MAPMAKERTERRAIN export to a MapMaker Terrain format file ROCKWORKS GRID export to a RockWorks Grid format file STL export to a STL format file SURFERGRID export to a Surfer Grid format file The FORMAT parameter specifies whether it is an ASCII or binary format Surfer Grid file TERRAGEN export to a Terragen terrain file USGS DEM export to a native format USGS DEM file VRML export to a VRML file VULCAN 3D export to a Vulcan3D triangulation
57. as text and the feature itself to the Windows clipboard for pasting elsewhere such as in a text editor or as a new feature in a running session of Global Mapper In addition you can right click on any attribute value to see additional options specific to the selected attribute value pair You can copy the selected pair to the Windows clipboard treat the value as a web URL and open that location in a web browser or treat the value as a filename either absolute or relative to the path of the source file from which the feature was read and load that file either into Global Mapper or with the program associated with that file type in Windows You can also choose to zoom the main map view to the extents of the selected feature Clicking the Vertices button for line or area features displays the Feature Vertex List dialog pictured below which allows you to view edit and remove the individual vertex coordinates including Z and timestamp values if present for the selected feature The X and Y coordinates are listed in the native projection of the layer and the Z coordinates will have the elevation units defined for the layer on the Projection tab of the Options dialog for the layer You can also easily add per vertex elevation values to features that do not already have them by pressing the Add Elevs button on the Feature Vertex List dialog If timestamp values are present like for a GPS tracklog speed and bearing columns will also be displaye
58. be specified as number of rows number of columns For example if you want to tile the export into a grid of 8 rows each 4 tiles across you would use GRID TYPE ROWS COLS z 8 4 GRID OVERLAP specifies how much to overlap tiles when gridding an export into multiple tiles This is a percentage value from 0 to 100 and only applies when on of the GRID TYPE parameters is used For example to make your grid tiles overlap by 5 of the grid tile size use GRID_OVERLAP 5 0 The default value is 0 0 meaning that the tiles do not overlap GRID KEEP CELL SIZE specifies that the size of the grid cells should be maintained over sample spacing This means that if you specify a grid of 4 rows and 5 columns each grid cell will be exactly 25 of the total export height and 20 of the total export width The sample spacing may be slightly smaller than what is specified in order to achieve this By default the sample spacing is exactly maintained and each grid cell may be slightly larger than specified to maintain an integer number of exported cells Use GRID KEEP CELL SIZEZYES to enable GRID NAMING specifies how to name tiles when gridding an export into multiple tiles The value should be SEQUENTIAL for sequential numeric naming starting at 1 SEPARATE for separate prefix appending by row and column or SEPARATE COLS FIRST for separate prefix appending by columns and rows For the SEPARATE options use the GRID NAMING COLS and GRID NAMING ROWS parameters to
59. best guesses available based on the currently loaded data The user is free to change the values to fit their needs DLG O Export Options x DLG O Options Export Bounds Banner JUSGS NMD ELG DATA CHARACTER FORMAT 09 OCU Name GRAND CANYON AZ Category ROADS AND TRAILS OF Cancel Aly Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DXF Command The Export DXF command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to an AutoCAD DXF format file When selected the command displays the DXF Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a DXF Options panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Table of Contents 44 Global Mapper User s Manual DXF Export Options DAF Options Gridding Export Bounds Display Labels for Area and Line Features t Do Not Include Display Labels f Include Display Labels as Separate Text Layer f Include Display Labels as Attributes Note that some software may be unable to deal with attributes f you have trouble with an exported DXF with this option enabled disable this option and try again Text Size Left Smaller Right Bigger 1 00 Layer Names f Use Feature Description for Layer Name t Use Feature Display Label for Layer Name t Use Feature Sou
60. command PROJ FILENAME specifies the name of the projection prj file to use for this file this will override any projection information stored in the file PROJ EPSG CODE specifies the numeric EPSG projection code that defines the projection for this file this will override any projection information stored in the file For example use PROJ_EPSG_CODE 26715 to define a UTM zone 15 projection with NAD27 as the datum and meters as the units PROMPT IF PROJ UNKNOWN set to NO if you don t want the user to be prompted to select a projection if the projection of the file cannot be automatically determined ELEV UNITS specify elevation units to use for this file if it contains gridded elevation data FEET export in US feet DECIFEET export in 10ths of US feet METERS export in meters DECIMETERS export in 10ths of meters CENTIMETERS export in centimeters SKIP COLUMNS specifies the number of columns to skip at the start of a coordinate line before trying to read the coordinates For example if the X and Y coordinates of a line were in the 3rd and 4th columns of the coordinate line you d use a value of SKIP COLUMNS 2 The default value is 0 meaning that coordinates must be in the first two columns COORD OFFSET specifies the offset to apply to any coordinates read in from the file This offset will be added to each coordinate read in from the file The offset should be specified as a comma delimited list of the X Y and
61. command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a KML KMZ format file for use with Google Earth When selected the command displays the KML KMZ Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a KML KMZ Options panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Table of Contents 47 Global Mapper User s Manual KML KMZ Export Options KML KMZ Options Gridding Export Bounds 3D Line Export Draw 3D Lines Above Terain Elevations Relative ta Sea Level Draw 3D Lines Above Terain Elevations Relative to Ground Level 3D Area Export Draw 3D Areas on Terain Surface Draw 3D Areas Above Terain Elevations Relative to Sea Level ry Draw 3D Areas Above Terain Elevations Relative to Ground Level M Extrude Areas Fill to Ground Make Buildings Fake 2D Area Heights to Maintain Area Draw Order Filled Area Translucency 75 Clear Opaque Iw Create Compressed KMZ File Recommended Iv Include Attribute Values in Feature Description Hide Point Features by Default When Loading File Display Labels for Area and Line Features Cancel S pipi Help The 3D Line Export and 3D Area Export sections allow the user to control whether or not area and line features with elevation values associated with them are drawn at
62. data to come up with an elevation for the point in question This option is off by default specify FILL_GAPS NO to turn off e POLYGON CROP FILE specifies the full path and filename of a vector file containing a polygon feature to which the operation should be cropped If multiple polygons are found in the specified file the polygon which has the largest intersection with the data to be combined will be used as the crop polygon see POLYGON CROP USE ALL for exception e POLYGON CROP NAME specifies the name of a polygon shape previously defined using the DEFINE SHAPE command to which the export should be cropped The coordinates in the shape need to have been provided in whatever projection the new terrain layer will be in i e the current projection e POLYGON CROP USE ALL specifies that if a POLYGON CROP FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the operation will be cropped to all polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon Table of Contents 166 Global Mapper User s Manual DEFINE_PROJ The DEFINE_PROJ command allows a projection including datum to be associated with a name The projection name can then be used in later IMPORT IMPORT ARCHIVE IMPORT ASCII and LOAD PROJECTION commands to specify a projection as needed The DEFINE PROJ command consists of a single command line followed by a series of lines describing the projection in the format of an ESRI PRJ file The easiest way to determine the text
63. feature or the display label for Survey Section area types The following attribute values names are recognized for each field e Township Attributes TOWNSHIP or TWP e Township Direction Attributes TDIR must have value of N or S e Range Attributes RANGE or RNG e Range Direction Attributes RDIR must have value of E or W e Section Attributes SECTION SECT or SEC e Meridian Attributes MERIDIAN or MER Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export PLS CADD XYZ File Command The Export PLS CADD XYZ File command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a PLS CADD XYZ format file These files can be used with the PLS CADD software application When selected the command displays the PLS CADD XYZ Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Polish MP cGPSMapper Command TUTORIAL ALERT Getting Started with Global Mapper and cGPSMapper Fantastic Guide to Creating Garmin format Maps using Global Mapper cGPSMapper and the other supporting applications required to get your data into a Garmin unit as a new map The Export Polish MP command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to Polish MP format files The Pol
64. file must be currently loaded e AYER BOUNDS EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER BOUNDS EXPAND z 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom e AYER DESC specifies the name to assign to this layer If no layer description is provided a default name will be assigned e NO DATA DIST MULT specifies how far from an actual data point a grid cell has to be before it is treated as a no data value This number is given as a multiple of the diagonal size of a single grid cell as nominally determined by the gridding algorithm or specified with the SPATIAL_RES parameter A value of O the default means that all points should be considered as valid e GRID FILL TO BOUNDS specifies that the grid values should be filled out to the entire bounds of the gridded data rather than just to the convex hull of the data being gridded Use GRID FILL TO BOUNDSZzYES to enable this e GRID FLATTEN AREAS specifies that area features with elevation values should be flattened to the elevation
65. fit in the view window This command also places the overlays in the center of the view window Zoom In The Zoom In command zooms the current view in by a factor of 2 Zoom In Micro Table of Contents 69 Global Mapper User s Manual The Zoom In Micro command zooms the current view in by a small amount Zoom Out The Zoom Out command zooms the current view out by a factor of 2 Zoom Out Micro The Zoom Out Micro command zooms the current view out by a small amount Zoom To Scale The Zoom To Scale command zoom the current view to a user specified scale For example to make one inch on the screen be equivalent to 1 mile of ground truth you would enter a scale of 63360 this is the number of inches in a mile Zoom To Spacing Pixel Size The Zoom To Spacing command zoom the current view so that each pixel on the screen represents a user specified number of ground units Save Current View The Save Current View command saves the current map view bounds The saved view can later be restored by using the Restore Last Saved View command This feature allows you to save a view at one spot then pan and zoom around and load additional data then restore your view to the saved spot in one simple operation Restore Last Saved View The Restore Last Saved View command restore the map view to the location last saved using the Save Current View command Restore Last Drawn View The Restore Last Drawn View command restore the map view
66. for a projection is to setup a projection on the Projection tab of the Tools gt Configuration and then use the Save to File button to create a new prj file Then just open the prj file up in Notepad and copy the contents to the lines following the DEFINE PROJ command line The DEFINE PROJ command is terminated with a single line containing only the text END DEFINE PROJ For a sample of the DEFINE PROJ command in use load some data and then save a Global Mapper workspace file from the File gt Save Workspace menu command Open the resulting gmw file in an editor and you can see how the DEFINE PROJ command is used to define a view projection and the set it The following parameters are required by the DEFINE PROJ command e PROJ NAME specifies the name to associate with the projection DEFINE SHAPE The DEFINE SHAPE command allows a multi point shape like a polygon to be associated with a name The projection name can then be used in later commands for things like cropping and feathering to polygonal boundaries The DEFINE SHAPE command consists of a single command line followed by a series of lines describing the series of XY coordinate pairs that define the shape Each line should have a single coordinate value with the X and Y coordinates separated by a comma The DEFINE SHAPE command is terminated with a single line containing only the text END DEFINE SHAPE The following parameters are required by the DEFINE SHAPE command e S
67. for cropping NONE no collar cropping is performed Table of Contents 186 Global Mapper User s Manual AUTO automatically remove a USGS DRG style collar or a 3 75 DOQQ collar LAT LON crop the collar to a a specified set of bounds specified in arc degrees in the native datum of the layer The bounds should be specified using the CLIP COLLAR BOUNDS parameter NATIVE crop the collar to a specified set of bounds specified in the native projection system and datum of the layer The bounds should be specified using the CLIP COLLAR BOUNDS parameter PIXELS crop a given number of pixels off of each side of the layer The number of pixels to remove from each side should be specified using the CLIP COLLAR BOUNDS parameter SNAP DEGREES crop the collar by snapping each edge to a specified degree boundary specified in arc degrees in the native datum of the layer The bounds should be specified using the CLIP COLLAR BOUNDS parameter For example to crop the west and east edges to a half degree boundary and the north and south edges to a one degree boundary use the following CLIP COLLAR BOUNDSZ20 5 0 25 0 5 0 25 POLY crop to a polygon provided with the CLIP COLLAR POLY parameter e CLIP COLLAR BOUNDS raster only specifies the bounds of the collar to be clipped off when the CLIP COLLAR parameter is enabled The coordinates should be specified in arc degrees native layer coordinates or pixel counts as a comma delimited
68. get additional options including the ability to set text to display when hovering over the device with the mouse cursor on the map as well as the ability to group the devices and set styles by group View NMEA Data Log The View NMEA Data Log command will display the VMEA GPS Logging dialog pictured below This dialog displays a list of recently received NMEA sentences when tracking a connected GPS device in NMEA mode This is a useful diagnostic tool and also allows you to save received NMEA data to a file for later playback NMEA GPS Logging GPG5 3 1 03 01 38 103 3 7 02 23 215 00 04 38 237 37 05 00 328 00 PL GP5V 3 2 13 07 7 7 233 47 11 07 067 000 156 74 041 47 2030044 43 73 GPFa5V 3 5 03 24 1 2 202 00 4D GPFGLL 3553 5235 M 13338 5570 E 002454 A A 4F GPBOD T M4 SPGRME 8 5 H 3 5 M 12 3 M 15 PGRM2 51 Pou HOHDG 101 1 7 1 wesc PGPRTE A 1c GPAMC 002456 4 3553 5295 M1 3938 B5 7D E 0 0 43 1 180 7200 7 1 Ww A amp 3D s Save to File Clear Tracklog If you are currently recording a tracklog of where your GPS device has been the Clear Tracklog command will clear whatever is currently recorded that has not yet been saved using the Save Tracklog command Record Tracklog The Record Tracklog command controls whether or not a bread crumb trail 1 e tracklog will be recorded to log where the GPS device has traveled This tracklog can be saved to any of the supported vector export formats The dr
69. ground coordinates you must enter them in the coordinate system indicated by the Ground Control Point Projection portion of the dialog otherwise you will get incorrect results The one exception is that if you enter a value that looks like a lat lon coordinates but a projected system is selected you will be prompted to select whether or not the entered coordinates are lat lon coordinates or coordinates in the selected projection system Once the coordinates are entered press the Add GCP to List button to add the GCP to the list of GCPs to be used when rectifying the image The Update Selected GCP button allows you to update the coordinates associated with a previously entered GCP You can also use Alt R to simulate pressing the Update Selected GCP button Ground Control Point GCP Projection This portion of the dialog allows you to select the projection that ground coordinates are entered in as well as what projection the image will be natively treated as when rectified it can be reprojected later using the normal Global Mapper reprojection mechanisms See the IMPORTANT note above for more details When rectifying new imagery you can control the default projection used by creating a default rectification prj file in your Global Mapper installation folder If present the default rectification projection selected when you open the rectification dialog will be whatever projection is specified in that PRJ file Ground Control Points List T
70. if the transformation method is based on a simple set of equations Entire Image View The Entire Image View portion of the Image Rectifier dialog displays as you might expect a view of the entire image being rectified Any ground control points GCPs will also be depicted on this view with a big red X The current portion of the image being displayed in the Zoomed View section will be highlighted as well You can use the mouse in the Entire Image View to control what portion of the image is visible in the Zoomed View Clicking the left mouse button anywhere in the Entire Image View will cause the Zoomed View to be recented on the click position Dragging a rectangle with the left mouse button will cause the Zoomed View to recenter and zoom to the box If you also hold down the CTRL key when clicking the left mouse button the Reference Image view will also be recentered on the associated point if there have been enough control points entered to convert the coordinates Zoomed View The Zoomed View portion of the Image Rectifier dialog allows the user to pan and zoom around the image as well as select pixel coordinates for control point entry Any ground control points GCPs will be depicted in this view as well with a big red X You can drag a box with the left mouse button to zoom in on a particular area in this view Right clicking will zoom out If you hold down the CTRL key when right clicking will zoom out to the full extents For tho
71. of Contents 242 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid Fill 0 235 0 Mni o Solid Fill 255 128 0 OET Solid Fill 0 0211 Coral Pattern 255 0 0 Solid Fill 0 0 211 E Ff ete im Us D iz Table of Contents Regional River Solid Fill 104 133 138 Sand Pattern 255 255 0 pi pi Null Null Null Solid Null Null Null Null Null 243 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid Fill 0 255 0 dodi ob obo oe ooo dede e e Joop d d Scrub Area Sx VOCE AEn oos em h A ARRAK IEH POR H IER IUE duda one cal Maro Aea Solid Fill 255 247 181 Area owg Snow or Glacier Solid Fill 255 255 255 Glacier i ENNND le NN i n i MEE Unclassified Unclassihed Area Feature No Fill 0 0 0 Area Feature Table of Contents 244 Scattered Trees Null 0 0 0 0 128 128 Null 0 0 0 Null 0 0 0 Null 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Null 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Null 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Global Mapper User s Manual Unknown Area Unknown Area Type No Fill 9 Type View Shed View Shed Coverage Area No Fill mu Coverage Area Solid Fill ssn p 7 777 Backwards Wooded Area 7 corr MN ooded AL T A Diagonal 165 145 97 1 e A rur ae Cross Hatch Area Fill Patterns Global Mapper Fill Patterns Fill Pattern u L B Backwards Diagonal Cross Hatch Cross Hatch Table of Contents 245 Global Mapper User s Manual Diagonal Cross Hatch Fo
72. of data file we re loading AUTO automatically determine the type default ACE Altimetry Corrected Elevation ACE format file ARCASCIIGRID Arc ASCII Grid format file ARCBINARYGRID Arc Binary Grid format file AVC Arc Vector Coverage format file BIL BIL format file BSB BSB format file usually has KAP extension Table of Contents 184 Global Mapper User s Manual BT a BT Binary Terrain format grid file CANADASD Canada 3D format file COMPEGPS a CompeGPS RTE TRK or WPT file CTM DEM a CTM DEM format file DBF DBase file with point features DHM25 a Swiss DHM terrain format file DLGO USGS DLG O DGN MicroStation DGN files earlier than v8 DIVAGIS GRID a DIVA GIS grid format file DMDF a Digital Map Data Format DMDF format file DOQQ USGS DOQ in JPEG format DTED Digital Terrain Elevation Data DTED format DXF DXF format ECW ER Mapper Compressed Wavelet ECW format file EME a Windows Enhanced Metafile EMF format file ENVI DEM ENVI DEM format file ERDAS Erdas Imagine format file ERDAS GIS Erdas GIS format file ERM GRID ERM grid format file ESRI PGEO ESRI personal geodatabase format file ETOPO2 ETOPO2 format file FAST L7A a Landsat FAST L7A format file FLOATGRID FLOAT GRID format file GEOSOFT GRID a Geosoft Binary Grid format file GEOTIFF GeoTIFF format file
73. on screen segment the default unchecked behavior or should remain fixed on the center of the longest segment of the line regardless of whether it is on screen or not Checking this can prevent your line labels from jumping around as you zoom in and out but can result in a lot of unlabeled lines if you zoom in too far The Only Snap to Area and Line Vertices by Default option controls whether or not the snapping behavior of the Digitizer Tool will snap to anywhere on existing area and line vertices the default unchecked behavior or will only snap to vertices on area and line features Holding down the V key when drawing will toggle this behavior The Only Display Area Labels when Completely Inside Area option allows you to easily disable the display of any area label when that label is not completely contained within the area feature that it is labeling This is useful to keep area labels from displaying until you are zoomed in far enough on the area for a label to be appropriate Area Styles REFERENCE GUIDE ALERT Built In Area Types and Styles A graphical reference guide to the area types and border fill styles built in to Global Mapper The Area Styles panel pictured below allows the user to configure how areas of a given type will be displayed in Global Mapper The area fill and border style and color can be modified on a type by type basis You can also use the Add Custom Fill Pattern option to provide your own image to use as a fi
74. one format to another format When the command is selected the user is first prompted to select the file type to convert from using the dialog pictured below Once an input file type is selected another dialog with a list of all compatible export file types is displayed allowing the user to select what type of file to convert the input files to Finally after the input and output file types are selected the Batch Convert dialog pictured below is displayed allowing the user to set up the batch conversion Select File Type to Convert From Select Type ACE Altitude Comected Elevation Arc Vector Coverage File Arc Infa ASCII Grid File Arc Infa Binary Grid File AutaCAD OF Drawing Interchange File BSE M LIEN Select File Type to Convert To Select Type Arc Infa ASCH Grid File BIL Band Inerleaved Imagery BIL 16 bit Elevation Samples BIL 32 bit Elevation 5 amples BIF Band Interleaved Fisel BSO Band Sequential Imagery DEM USGS ASCII DEM Formati Table of Contents 59 Global Mapper User s Manual Batch Convert Source Files Destination Files LIF Directory E SDATASIMABERYTS3BSMSUw Elevation Drape 1 T d fl GADATAIMAGER YB athurst Inlet Morth tif fe eae eis eee es Cancel GADATAMMAGE R Burlington Standard NatColor i GADATAMMAGE A Y Burlington Standard NatColor C Specify output directory Help G ADATAMMAGERYSC3DDS213 NW 20 zip _ GADATANMAGERYSNTSS5R07 95403 01 1
75. only raster overlays are selected displays the Raster Options dialog The Raster Options dialog consists of several tabs each allowing you to control various aspects of how the selected raster layers are displayed Display Tab The Display tab pictured below contains controls allowing you to control the color intensity brightness darkness color transparency blending anti aliasing and texture mapping of the selected layers Raster Options Cropping Feathering Projection Display Color Contrast Adjustment Color Intensity 0 Lighter Darker Default Translucency Can You See Through It 100 0 Transparent Opaque Transparency v Transparent Make Very Similar Colors Transparent as Well Blend Mode Color Bum Anti Alias Pixels Interpolate Texture Map The Color Intensity setting controls whether displayed pixels are lightened or darkened before being displayed It may be useful to lighten or darken raster overlays in order to see overlaying vector data clearly The Translucency setting controls to what degree you can see through the overlay to overlays underneath the overlay The default setting of Opaque means that you cannot see through the overlay at all Settings closer to Table of Contents 113 Global Mapper User s Manual Transparent make the overlay increasingly more see through allowing you to blend overlapping data The Blend Mode setting controls how an overla
76. original shape simply select the feature s that you want restored and select the Restore Original Shape from the right click popup menu Combining Line Features You can combine multiple line features into a single line feature by first selecting the line features to combine then selecting the Combine Selected Line Features right click menu option This option will connect any lines that you have selected that join at an endpoint Any lines that are succesfully joined into a new one will be marked as deleted Adding Islands to Area Features You can make one area feature become an island or hole within another area by first selecting the area that you want to make into an island then right click and select the Make Selected Area an Island in Another Area menu option You will then need to left click in the area feature that you would like to make the selected area an island of The parent area must completely enclose the selected area in order for it be successfully added as an island Splitting Areas into Two New Area Features You can split an existing area feature into two new area features by selecting the two vertices across which you would like to split the area then right clicking and selecting the Split Selected Area at Selected Vertices menu option This will generate two new area features by splitting the selected area feature across the segment between the two selected vertices Note in some situations you will get invalid ar
77. panel pictured below is used to modify the projection and datum that the currently loaded data is displayed in Configuration General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles Point Styles Vertical Optians Shader Options Projection Projection Load From File UTM Save To File Zone Init From EPSG 15 B amp W S0 W Northem Hemisphere Datum NAD27 CONUS Add Datum Planar Units METERS Parameters Atnbute 0 o Value CENTRAL MERIDIAN SCALE FACT 0 989600000 CENTRAL MERIDIAN 33 00000000 ORIGIN LATITUDE D 00000000 FALSE EASTING m 500000 FALSE NORTHING m 0 Table of Contents 105 Global Mapper User s Manual Use the Projection pull down menu to select the projection you wish to view the currently loaded data in The Geographic projection is really the absence of a projection It is just a linear mapping of latitude longitude to a grid For a good description of most of the other supported projection systems and a discussion of the tradeoffs in using various projections we suggest visiting http www progonos com furuti MapProj Normal TOC cartTOC html The Datum pull down is used to select the datum to use in association with the projection The most commonly used datums are WGS84 NAD27 and NAD83 If you find that the datum that you need is not available you can use the Add Datum button to add your datum When that button is pressed the Crea
78. points to generate in the path This must be at least two For example to create 1000 points use POINT COUNTZz1000 You can use the POINT SPACING parameter rather than this to specify how far apart sample points should be e POINT SPACING specifies the point spacing in meters to use between sample points along the path For example to create points spaced 10 meters apart use POINT SPACING z 10 0 Table of Contents 183 Global Mapper User s Manual e START_POS specifies the start position for the path profile The coordinates must be given in the current global coordinate system For example if UTM if the current projection you might specify and easting northing as follows START_POS 480000 43 10000 e END POS specifies the end position for the path profile The coordinates must be given in the current global coordinate system For example if UTM if the current projection you might specify and easting northing as follows START_POS 480000 43 10000 e ADD LAND USE CODES specifies whether to query loaded LULC data sets for the land use code at each point and to include that land use code after the elevation Use ADD LAND USE CODESzYES to turn on adding land use codes for each point e APPEND TO FILE specifies that the elevations between the start and end locations should be appended to the file specified if it already exists rather than a new file being created e SAVE DIST Z FILE specifies that the output file should contain dista
79. present only for some conversions and controls the palette if any used in the output files The palette values are defined as follows e Image Optimized Palette The palette generated will be an optimal mix of up to 256 colors that will closely represent the full blend of colors in the source images This option will generate the best results but can more than double the export time required if any high color images are present in the export set If all of the input data is palette based and the combined palette of those files has 256 colors or less then the combined files of the input file will just be used with no additional export time being required e Grayscale Palette This palette consists of 256 scales of gray ranging from black to white e DRG Optimized Palette This palette is optimized for the exporting USGS DRG data The palette consists of only the standard DRG colors e DRG DOQ Optimized Palette As the name suggests this palette is optimized for exporting a mixture of USGS DRG data and grayscale satellite photos 1 e USGS DOQs The palette consists of the 14 standard DRG colors with the remaining 242 colors being a range of gray values ranging from black to white e Halftone Palette The palette consists of a blend of 256 colors evenly covering the color spectrum This palette is the best choice when exporting anything but DRGs and grayscale satellite photos e Custom Palette from File This option allows the user to choose
80. should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude eL AYER BOUNDS specifies that the import should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to import to the bounds of the file c test tif you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded eL AYER BOUNDS EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER BOUNDS EXPAND z 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom Table of Contents 192 Global Mapper User s Manual ANTI ALIAS specifies whether to remove jagged edges by making a subtle transition between pixels Turning off this option helps maintain the hard edges of the pixels as they are rasterized Use ANTI ALIASZYES to turn on Anything else turns it off e CONTRAST MODE raster only specifies the type of contrast adjustment to apply to the data N
81. should be created in the shapefile The elevation stored for each vertex point will be the first of the following which is available e The elevation associated with the vertex point in question e The elevation associated with the entire feature being exported For example the elevation of a contour line e The first elevation obtained by searching the loaded elevation grid layers at the position of the vertex point e A value of 0 0 will be used if no elevation could be obtained via any of the prior methods If selected the Add Feature Type LAYER Attribute to DBF option specifies that the type description for each exported feature will be added as a LAYER attribute to the DBF file generated with the SHP file If selected the Split Into Separate Files by Feature Layer Description option specifies that the export will be split into separate files based on the description for each feature The description of the features stored in each file will be appended on to the end of the selected filenames WARNING The Shapefile format uses a DBF file for attribute storage which means that any attribute names are limited to 10 characters Any attribute names longer than that will be truncated with a number potentially added on to maintain uniqueness among multiple long attribute names Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Simple ASCII Text File Command The Export Simple ASCII Text File command
82. should generate a separate Shapefile for each layer type in the input data e KML AREA DISPLAY ABOVE TERRAIN KML only specifies that area features with associated elevation value should be displayed at height above the terrain surface in Google Earth Use KML AREA DISPLAY ABOVE TERRAINZYES to enable e KML AREA ELEVS RELATIVE KML only specifies that the elevation values associated with 3D area features are relative to the terrain surface rather than relative to sea level Use KML AREA ELEVS RELATIVE ZYES to enable e KML AREA EXTRUDE KML only specifies that 3D area features displayed in Google Earth should be extruded from the surface to create volumetric objects like buildings Use KML AREA EXTRUDEZzZYES to enable e KML AREA FAKE HEIGHTS KML only specifies that fake elevation values should be assigned to area features exported to ensure that the draw order remains correct in Google Earth This may be necessary to keep overlapping area features drawing correctly Use KML AREA FAKE HEIGHTS YES to enable e KML AREA TRANSLUCENCY KML only specifies how see through filled area features will be in the generated KML file The values should range from 1 to 100 and represent a opacity percentage Table of Contents 180 Global Mapper User s Manual with 100 being completely opaque and 1 being almost completely transparent The default value is KML AREA TRANSLUCENCY 75 e KML LINE DISPLAY ABOVE TERRAIN KML only specifies that
83. specified color To perform a view shed analysis first select the view shed tool as your current tool Press and release the left mouse button at the position where you wish to place the transmitter At this point the View Shed Setup dialog pictured below will appear allowing you to setup the view shed calculation Table of Contents 135 Global Mapper User s Manual View Shed Setup Description View Shed Analysis 1 Transmitter Elevation i 00 METERS above Ground Receiver Elevation f Use an explicit height value far the receiver elevation 2 METERS above Ground 7 Use a transmission angle fram the transmitter for receiver elevation degrees above the horizon t Use a transmission angle range to view where beam hits surface to degrees above the horizon Check at meters above the ground surface View Angle D North 50 East 180 South 270 West View Radius 25 kilometers Minimum view radius 0 Cancel Help Sample Spacing The sample spacing controls the interval at which elevation samples are examined to determine visibility Smaller values result In more accurate but more slowly generated view sheds P axis 30 meters Y asis 30 meters IF you wish to change the ground units that the spacing is specified in vau need to change the current projection by going to Config Projection Fresnel one Specification iM Check Clearance with Respect to Fir
84. specify the details of how to name the rows and columns If no GRID NAMING parameter is supplied the last selected grid naming options selected in the user interface will be used GRID NAMING COLS specifies how to name the column portion of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE or GRID NAMING ZSEPARATE COLS FIRST parameter The value of this field is a comma delimited list with the following field values Naming type Can have the following values 0 NUM name using numbers in ascending order 0 NUM REVERSE name using numbers in descending order 9 ALPHA name using letters in ascending order 9 ALPHA REVERSE name using letters in descending order Table of Contents 174 Global Mapper User s Manual Starting value for numbering or lettering 1 e 1 or A Prefix string to use before the numeric or alphabetic value Step value for numeric naming default is 1 You can leave values blank if they don t apply or you want to use the default As an example to do numeric naming starting at the number 100 increasing by 10 each time with a prefix of DEM you would use GRID NAMING COLS Z NUM 100 DEM 10 e GRID NAMING ROWS specifies how to name the row portion of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE parameter See the documentation for the GRID NAMING COLS parameter above for details on the format e GRID NAMING PREPEND ZEROES specifies whether or not to prepend zeroes to the start of grid co
85. subtracts the values of the second layer from the first and saves the magnitude of the result AVERAGE saves the average of the values from the first and second layers MINIMUM saves the smaller of the values from the first and second layers MAXIMUM saves the larger of the values from the first and second layers e LAYER DESC specifies the name to assign to the newly generated terrain layer If no layer description is provided the default name of Combined Elevation Grid will be used e ELEV UNITS specify elevation units to use in new terrain layer FEET export in US feet DECIFEET export in 10ths of US feet METERS export in meters DECIMETERS export in 10ths of meters CENTIMETERS export in centimeters e SPATIAL RES specifies spatial resolution Defaults to the minimum spatial resolution of the two layers if not specified Should be formatted as x resolution y resolution The units are the units of the current global projection For example if UTM was the current global projection and you wanted to export at 30 meter spacing the parameter value pair would look like SPATIAL_RES 30 0 30 0 e GLOBAL BOUNDS specifies the combine bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum y e GLOBAL BOUNDS SIZE specifies the combine bounds in units of the curr
86. that a MapInfo TAB file should be generated in addition to the GeoTIFF file Use GEN TAB FILEZYES to turn on GRID TYPE CELL SIZE specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with each tile having the given size in the export projection The value should be specified as cell width cell height For example if you are exporting in a metric projection and want to tile the export into cells that are 10 000 meters wide by 5 000 meters tall you would use GRID TYPE CELL SIZE z 10000 0 5000 0 GRID TYPE PIXEL SIZE specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with each tile having the given size in pixels samples The value should be specified as cell pixel width cell pixel height For example if you want to tile the export into cells that are 800 pixels wide by 600 meters tall you would use GRID TYPE PIXEL SIZE 800 600 GRID TYPE ROWS COLS specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with a given number of rows and columns of tiles The value should be specified as number of rows number of columns For example if you want to tile the export into a grid of 8 rows each 4 tiles across you would use GRID TYPE ROWS COLS z 8 4 GRID OVERLAP specifies how much to overlap tiles when gridding an export into multiple tiles This is a percentage value from 0 to 100 and only applies when on of the GRID TYPE parameters is used For example to make your grid tiles overlap by 5 of the gr
87. the Grid Spacing to Use A axis meters Y axis meters f you wish ta change the ground units that the resolution is specified in you need to change the curent projection on the Projection tab of the Configuration dialog Hevation Grid Mo Data Distance Criteria This setting controls how far from a known data point that an elevation grid cell has to be before it is considered invalid The default setting assumes all grid points are valid Lower values make the valid grid stay tighter around known data points Tight fee Iv Use 3D Line Features as Constraints j e Breaklines Iw Flatten 3D Area Features gnore Zero Elevations Save Triangulation Network TIN as a Vector Layer Heights Relative to Ground Using Loaded Grid Layers Fill Entire Bounding Box Instead of Just Inside Convex Hull Export Grids Directly to Global Mapper Grid Files Rather Than Displaying in the Main Map View Use with Gridding Tab options to Allow Gridding of Very Large Data Sets Cancel amp ppli Help The following options are also available when generating the grid e Use 3D Line Features as Constraints i e Breaklines If this option is checked any line and area features that have elevation values associated with them will be treated as constraints breaklines This will ensure that elevation values along the line area boundary will be consistent with the elevation that should be along the line e Flatten 3D Area
88. the final map will be viewable at More detail results in a map that better represents the shape of the source data but that requires zooming further in to see the map while less detail will result in a rougher map that shows up sooner You should tailer this to the approximate scale of your source data will the lowest detail setting approximating source vector data of around 1 250K scale and the highest detail setting representing 1 24K or better scale data Most built in types already have a default zoom scale at which they will show up in built MP maps this will translate to a Levels value for the feature in the exported MP file based on the levels in the MP file header For custom types and for types that you want to change the default zoom scale for you can add a MP_BIT_LEVEL attribute to the feature itself or to the default attribute list for a feature type The value of this attribute should specify the minimum MP zoom bit level that a feature should appear at For example if you use the maximum Map Detail setting with no template file you will get a map with populated zoom levels at 24 22 and 20 bits If you wanted a feature to show up in just the lower 2 zoom levels of that map the 24 and 22 bit resolution layers you could add a MP_BIT_LEVEL attribute with a value of 22 to your feature or the default attribute list for that type then that feature would get a Levels 2 value written to the exported MP file If your map had less detail sa
89. the names displayed in the shader drop down in Global Mapper such as Atlas Shader or Global Shader or the name of a custom shader e AMBIENT LIGHT LEVEL this sets the ambient lighting level The valid range of values is 0 0 1 0 with smaller numbers meaning completely black 1 e no light and 1 0 being full lighting e VERT_EXAG this sets the vertical exaggeration to use when rendering elevation overlays This effects the hill shading The valid range of values is 0 0 100 0 eLIGHT ALTITUDE this sets the altitude angle of the light source that creates shadows on elevation data The valid range of values 1s 0 0 90 0 with 0 0 meaning a light source at the horizon and 90 0 meaning a light source directly overhead e LIGHT_AZIMUTH this sets the direction angle of the light source that creates shadows on elevation data The valid range of values is 0 0 360 0 with 0 0 meaning a light source from the top of the screen i e north 90 0 meaning from the right i e east etc e ENABLE WATER this setting controls whether or not water will be displayed on top of elevation values at or below the currently configured water level Use YES to enable water display and NO to disable water display eWATER COLOR this setting controls the color that water drawn on top of elevation data is rendered in The format of this value is RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt For example to use a water color of blue use WATER COLOR RGB
90. the option that elevations are relative to the height of any underlying terrain the new terrain surface will have heights equal to the original height of the terrain at each sample location within the area offset by the elevation value of the area feature This functionality is useful for adjusting all elevation values within an area by some amount the area elevation This feature provides a very easy way to do things like flatten an area like a lake in underlying terrain layers Just assign an ELEV ATION attribute to your area feature then select it and choose this option to flatten everything inside that area to the elevation attribute value This is also a nice way to create an elevation grid representing a city scape from building outlines with ELEVATION attributes Adding Address Information to Points from Nearby Road Features If one or more point features are selected the Add Address Information from Roads to Selected Point s option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will cause each point to be examined to find the nearest line feature and if it contains addressing information for the address of the nearest point on the line to the point feature to be stored as address attributes with the point feature A dialog will appear to prompt you for how far from each point that you want to search for a line feature with addressing information Table of Contents 154 Global Mapper User s Manual The following attrib
91. the units of the current global projection For example if UTM was the current global projection and you wanted to use a grid with a 30 meter spacing the parameter value pair would look like SPATIAL_RES 30 0 30 0 GLOBAL BOUNDS specifies the contour bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum y GLOBAL BOUNDS SIZE specifies the contour bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y LAT LON BOUNDS specifies the contour bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude LAYER BOUNDS specifies that the contour generation should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to generate contours to the bounds of the file c Mest tif you would use LAYER BOUNDS z c Mest tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded LAYER BOUNDS EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the c
92. the user to setup the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export This format costs of one line per each input coordinate with the X coordinate followed by the Y coordinate followed by the feature index in the file The following is short sample of an output file with a couple of features 923500054 10999239050 e OO POS 103908400 bs 9ISO23 0 l0596976 0 24d 914174 0 10579248 0 l IIAEO TOSTO ALC 1s dud an leo ares 105692597 30 E sg 9339 qu L05691359 0 is 938324 3 D05459674 0 jx 937359 9 L0596493 0 ies 934460 2 1059325540 dt uod de 10994221 2409 l 924800 1 TOS9323370 1 864645 6 LOS TZ TL an So T5435 10549545 0 Zs 893822 6 l0540949 0 s 900584 8 10539400 0 zs 90639049 1L0545204 0 is 90792979 105543730 Z4 900584 6 105559695 2x SIO Ll 10567414 0 zs 886094 7 LOS 6596520 a 884645 6 LOSS 72 le 0 Z STOOL T6 103524427 sQ 3 4 SOLIS a4 1404 96 9519 om 865808 5 103128340 Su 861944 4 1050306037 0 ON 965029116 104949635 0 oe 811121 6 104939970 SF 880781 6 TO49689 50 Su 889475 8 1049979370 ox 990924 8 1030993 0x0 is 889475 8 LOS Loi TSO S 884645 6 1052491040 35 9 TO9TT 6 10524427 0 cr Table of Contents 58 Global Mapper User s Manual Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Batch Convert Reproject The Batch Convert Reproject command allows the user to easily convert multiple files in
93. to an Arc Ungenerate format file ARC UNGENERATE POINTS export point features to an Arc Ungenerate format file CDF export to a Geographix CDF format file CSV export point features to a CSV format file DELORME DRAWING export features to a DeLorme drawing text file DELORME TRACK export line features to a DeLorme track text file DELORME WAYPOINT export point features to a DeLorme waypoint text file DGN export to a DGN V8 file DLGO export to a native format USGS DLG O file DXF export to an AutoCAD DXF format file Table of Contents 176 Global Mapper User s Manual GARMIN TRK exports lines to a Garmin TRK PCX5 format file GARMIN WPT exports names points to a Garmin WPT PCX5 format file GPX exports line and point features to a GPX GPS eXchange Format file KML export to a KML or KMZ format file LANDMARK GRAPHICS export to a Landmark Graphics format file LIDAR LAS export to a Lidar LAS file LOWRANCE USR export to a Lowrance USR format file MAPGEN export to a MapGen format file MAPINFO export to a MapInfo MIF MID format file MATLAB export to a MatLab format file MOSS export line and area features to a MOSS format file NIMA ASC export to a NIMA ASC format file PLATTE RIVER export to a Platte River ASCII Digitizer format file POLISH MP export to a Polish MP format file SEGPI export to a SEGPI format file SHAPEFILE
94. to an Idrisi raster format file Table of Contents 172 Global Mapper User s Manual JPEG export to a JPG format file JPEG2000 export to a JPEG2000 format file KML export to a raster KML KMZ format file for display in Google Earth PNG export to a PNG format file e SPATIAL RES specifies spatial resolution Defaults to the minimum spatial resolution of all loaded data if not specified Should be formatted as x resolution y resolution The units are the units of the current global projection For example if UTM was the current global projection and you wanted to export at 30 meter spacing the parameter value pair would look like SPATIAL_RES 30 0 30 0 e PIXEL SIZE specifies the desired size in pixels of your export Use this instead of SPATIAL RES if you know exactly how many pixels in size your export should be The format is PIXEL SIZE widthxheight For example to make your export have dimensions of 1024 pixels wide by 768 pixels tall use PIXEL SIZE 1024x768 e FORCE SQUARE PIXELS if this value is set to YES the spatial resolution of the resultant raster file will be set so that the x and y pixel size are the same with the minimum default size being used for both e GLOBAL BOUNDS specifies the export bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum
95. to unload If an empty value is passed in all layers that were created by the script such as those from a GENERATE CONTOURS command will be unloaded You can also pass in the value USER CREATED FEATURES when running a script in the context of the main map view or loading a workspace to have the User Created Features layer unloaded You can also pass in the full description of the loaded layer to use in case you want to unload a layer not loaded from a file Crop Merge and Reproject 4 USGS DRGs into new GeoTIFF and JPEG files GLOBAL MAPPER SCRIPT VERSION 1 00 UNLOAD ALL Import the four 24K DRGs that we want to merge We use the CLIP COLLAR option to indicate that we want the collar to be automatically removed from the DRGs when they are imported IMPORT FILENAME C DATA DRG KANSAS CITYNO39094B2 TIF TYPE AUTO ANTI ALIAS NO AUTO CONTRAST NO CLIP COLLAR AUTO TEXTURE MAP NO IMPORT FILENAME C DATA DRG KANSAS CITYNO39094A1 TIF 1 TYPE AUTO ANTI_ALIAS NO AUTO_CONTRAST NO CLIP_COLLAR AUTO TEXTURE_MAP NO IMPORT FILENAME C DATA DRG KANSAS CITYNO39094A2 TIF N TYPE AUTO ANTI ALIAS NO AUTO CONTRAST NO CLIP COLLAR AUTO TEXTURE MAP NO IMPORT FILENAME 2 C NDATANDRGNKANSAS CITYNO39094B1 TIF b IYPE AUTO ANTI ALIAS NO AUTO CONTRAST NO CLIP COLLAR AUTO TEXTURE MAP NO Table of Contents 196 Global Mapper User s Manual Load a projection file to set the global projection to geographic lat lon arc degrees with a datum of N
96. up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export PGM File Command The Export PGM File command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a PGM grayscale grid file These grid files can be used with any software application that supports PGM files When selected the command displays the PGM Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export PLS CADD XYZ File Command The Export PLS CADD XYZ File command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a PLS CADD XYZ format grid file These grid files can be used with the PLS CADD software application Table of Contents 34 Global Mapper User s Manual When selected the command displays the PLS CADD XYZ Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note
97. whether you should face north or south Then you read the angle and either turn that many degrees to the east or west depending on the second hemisphere notation Finally you move distance units in that direction to get to the next station Creating New Point Features After selecting the Create New Point Feature popup menu option you can proceed place the point feature by left clicking at the desired location of the point You can cancel creation of the new point at any time by pressing the Escape key You can also use the Create New Point Feature at Specified Position option to create a new point feature at a manually specified location When you select this option a dialog appears allowing you to enter the location for the new point feature in either latitude longitude coordinates or coordinates in the current view projection Once you ve placed the point the Modify Feature Info dialog will appear allowing you to setup the label classification drawing style and attribution for the new point feature See Editing Feature Attributes and Drawing Styles for more details Once you have completed have completed creating the point feature the Digitizer Tool will remain in the point creation mode so you can simply left click to place another point or right click to choose a different mode You can also create new point features from the centroids of selected area features or from the vertices of selected line and area features by selecting on
98. y e GLOBAL BOUNDS SIZE specifies the export bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y eL AT LON BOUNDS specifies the export bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude e AYER BOUNDS specifies that the export should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to export to the bounds of the file c test tif you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded e AYER BOUNDS EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER BOUNDS EXPAND z 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom e GEN WORLD FILE specifies that a world file should be generated in a
99. 0 O Z O Z o Z NAD83 NEW ENGLAND HPGN 6152 GRSI980 0 NAD83 NEW JERSEY HPGN 6152 GRS1980 0 NAD83 NEW MEXICO HPGN 6152 GRS1980 0 o NAD83 NEW YORK HPGN 652 JGRS1980 amp 0 NAD83 NORTH DAKOTA HPGN 6152 JGRSI980 O o Z o Z 6152 GRS1980 o ooo o o NAD83 OKLAHOMA HPGN 6152 GRS1980 O Z o Z o Z NAD83 PENNSYLVANIA HPGN 6152 GRSU98D O o Z o Z NAD83 PUERTO RICO VIRGIN ISLANDS HPGN 6152 GRSI980 o NAD83 SOUTH DAKOTA HPGN 6152 JGRSI980 O o Z o Z o NAD83 TENNESSEE HPGN 6152 GRS1980 O O Z o Z NAD83 TEXAS EAST HPGN 6132 GRSI980 00 NAD83 TEXAS WEST HPGN 6152 GRSI980 0 NAD83 UTAH HPGN 6152 GRSI980 oO 0 0 NAD83 VIRGINIA HPGN 652 GRSI980 O o Z oOo o NAD83 WASHINGTON OREGON HPGN 6132 JGRSI980 O Z o Z lt NAD83 WEST VIRGINIA HPGN 6152 GRSU98D O O Z o Z NAD83 WISCONSIN HPGN 652 GRSI980 O O Z oO Z o o o NAD83 WYOMING HPGN 652 JGRSI980 O Z o Z o NAHRWAN UAE 6270 Clarke 1880 RGS O O o Z NEW ISRAELI DATUM NID 6a GRSU980 0 o oo NGO 1948 GREENWICH MERIDIAN 6273 jBessel Modified NGO 1948 OSLO MERIDIAN 6817 Bessel Modified NORTH SAHARA 19596307 1880 NTF FRANCE GREENWICH MERIDIAN 6275 Clarke1880 O Z O Z o NTF FRANCE PARIS MERIDIAN
100. 0 0 255 e WATER LEVEL this setting specifies the height in meters below which water should be displayed if enabled e WATER ALPHA this setting controls how see through the water is when displayed The valid range of values is 0 255 with 0 meaning the water is completely see through i e invisible and 255 meaning that the water color is completely opaque such that you can t see any of the shaded relief below it Table of Contents 195 Global Mapper User s Manual SHOW_3D_VIEW The SHOW_3D_VIEW command displays the 3D view window with the loaded data The following parameters are supported by the command e MAXIMIZE specifies whether or not the 3D view window should be maximized or not Use MAXIMIZE YES to force the window to be maximized when displayed UNLOAD_ALL The UNLOAD_ALL command unloads all currently loaded data This command takes no parameters The following parameters are supported by the command e VECTOR ONLY specifies that only layers containing vector data shall be unloaded All raster and gridded elevation layers will remain loaded Use VECTOR ONLYZzYES to enable unloading just the vector layers UNLOAD LAYER The UNLOAD LAYER command allows you to unload all previous loaded layers with a given filename This is useful if you don t want to unload all previously loaded layers just to get rid of a few of them The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME filename of the layer
101. 0 255 I 0 0 211 0 0 0 NO 58 Global Mapper User s Manual Unclassified Line Feature Unknown Line Type 128 128 128 Global Mapper Drawing Styles mE RR mg a CHEN ER a CENE E73 D e RITE peg ee eene Unpaved Road Drawing Styles st es ENT NNNM E C etme rennon E et on Ronon r r cin ity Sp any ct is Sony ETT cin ing to any Senne er ss Table of Contents 259 Global Mapper User s Manual nk oe oy a ent Oe ony me EETITUUT ENERO MUTTER ee ee O pg sai gta Table of Contents 260 o F Global Mapper User s Manual V Track Opens Towards Start of Null Line C Track Opens Towards End of Line ae ee ae ee es SC oue C Track Opens Towards Start of Line 2223 2 2 x 2 dou o Arrow Track Points Towards Start of Line Arrow Track Points Towards End of Line V Track Opens Towards End of Solid Line V Track Opens Towards Start of Solid Line Solid with Xs through Line Solid with Diamonds along Line Solid with Empty Diamonds along Line Solid with Circles along Line Solid with Empty Circles along Line Solid with Arrow Pointing to Start Solid with Arrow Pointing to End Solid with Empty Circle at Start Solid with Empty Circle at End Solid with Black Edges Point Styles Using the Point Styles panel users can configure what symbol will be used to display points of a given type In addition the Show Label
102. 0 3500000000 94 27 30 00 w 39 0p O000 N 0 00 aem Point 4 432241 6097 38 9425000000 3500000000 9415 00 00 w 39 0p 0000 N 0 00 Help The Image Rectifier dialog is the heart of the image rectification process This dialog contains everything that you need to rectify an image from graphical views of the image to lists of ground control points to an Options menu for selecting the rectification and resampling methods to use Each part of this dialog is covered in detail below File Menu The File menu provides options allowing you to save the current ground control point list to a file and to add additional ground control points from a file The file specifying the ground control points should be a comma delimited file in the following format amp ltx pixel location amp gt amp lty pixel location amp gt amp ltx ground location amp gt amp lty ground location amp gt amp ltpoint name optional amp gt amp ltpoint error in pixels optional amp gt There are also options on the File menu for loading control points and projection information from an OziExplorer map CompeGPS imp and Touratech TTQV cal files as well as saving your control point information to world TFW JGW etc files Options Menu The Options menu allows you to setup various options related to the rectification process as described below Table of Contents 83 Global Mapper User s Manual e Rectification Method the Rectification Method submenu a
103. 0 is east etc rather than elevation values at each sample location When selected the command displays the Float Grid Point Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 25 Global Mapper User s Manual Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Geosoft Grid Command The Export Geosoft Grid command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Geosoft Binary Grid format file When selected the command displays the Geosoft Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing to use a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export GeoTIFF Command The Export GeoTIFF command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation data sets to a GeoTIFF format file When selected the command displays the GeoTIFF Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The di
104. 0 qup From Y Marthing Latitude KE 01 23 8772 N Input Coordinate System Output Coordinate System UTM Geographic Latitude Lonaitude DATUM NADES DATUM NAD83 UNIT meters UNIT arc degrees UTM ZONE 15 96 90 Northern H Select Input Coordinate System Select Output Coordinate System Center on Output Coordinates Close Create Mew Point at Output Coordinates Control Center Command E Selecting the Control Center menu item or toolbar button displays the Overlay Control Center dialog This dialog is the central control center for obtaining information and setting options for all loaded overlays See the Overlay Control Center section for complete details Configure Command si Selected the Configure menu item or toolbar button displays the Configuration dialog This dialog provides for general setup of Global Mapper display options See the Configuration section for complete details Table of Contents 139 Global Mapper User s Manual Digitizer Tool a The Digitizer Tool allows you to modify existing vector features as well as to create new ones This tool encompasses a lot of functionality from modifying the shape and position of area line and point features to editing the attribution and drawing styles of individual vector features The major activities available with the Digitizer Tool are described below e Creating New Features Creating New Area Features Creating New Line
105. 128 dear _ _ Opaque Cancel ppl Help The Shader selection box allows for the selection of the algorithm used to color and shade any loaded elevation data The following shading algorithms are available e The Atlas Shader is the default shader It generally provides good results for any loaded elevation data e The Color Ramp Shader displays ramps color from blue for low elevations to red for the highest elevations by default e The Daylight Shader colors all elevations the same and is only useful when hill shading is turned on e The Global Shader is designed for shading elevation data sets covering large areas of the earth such as Terrain Base and GTOPO30 The results are quite stunning for data sets such as these e The Gradient Shader moderates the color with elevation between the low elevation and the high elevation The actual colors ramped between can be selected on the Shader Options panel e The HSV Shader maps the elevations onto the HSV hue saturation value color space The mapping can be configured on the Shader Options panel e The Slope Shader colors loaded terrain data by the slope of the terrain rather than the absolute elevation This shader allows you to identify the portions of the terrain that are relatively flat vs those that are relatively steep The definitions of flat and steep are user configurable on the Shader Options panel e The Slope Direction Shader colors loaded terrain data by dir
106. 3 soo S ISN93 ICELAND 6659 GRS 1980 00 0000 JAD2001QAMAICA200 6758 wass O JAD69 JAMAICA 1960 62 Clarke 1866 KERTAUI948 6M5 jEvees i30 KOREANI08S 6162 BesellR l KOREAN GEODETIC DATUM KGD 6737 GRSI90 00000 LEIGON GHANA 650 Clarke 880 Built in Datums 2 8 2D Global Mapper User s Manual LUZON PHILIPPINES 653 Clarke 1866 MPORALOKO GABON 6266 Clarke 1880 MERCHICH MOROCCO 6261 Carel880 MGIAUSTRIA 63 jBeselldl MINNA CAMEROON 063 Clarke 1880 MINNA NIGERIA 669 Clarke 1880 MNCOUNTY ANOKA 6152 JjMNComty Anka 0 0 MN COUNTY BECKER 6152 jMNComty Beker MN COUNTY BENTON 6152 MNComty Benon MN COUNTY BIG STONE 6152 MN County Big Stone MN COUNTY BLUE EARTH 6152 MNCouny Blue Earth MN COUNTY BROWN 652 MNComy Bown MN COUNTY CARLTON 6152 jMNComty Caltn MN COUNTY CASS NORTH 6152 jMNCouty CasNoth MN COUNTY CASS SOUTH 6152 MNCounty Cass South MN COUNTY CHIPPEWA 6152 MIN County Chippewa 6152 MN County Chisago MN COUNTY COOK NORTH 6152 jMNCouty CockNoth MN COUNTY COOK SOUTH 6152 MNCounty Cook South MN COUNTY COTTONWOOD 6152 MNCounty Cottonwood MN COUNTY DAKOTA 612 MNCouny Dakota MN COUNTY DODGE 6152
107. 6807_ Clarke 1880 NZGD200 1 Gs GSB NZGDA49 6072 International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 OBSERVATORIO 1966 Unknown International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 OCOTEPEQUE COSTARICA Unknown Clarke 1866 O Z O Z o OLDHAWAIANMEAN 6267_ Clarke 1866 OLD ISRAELI DATUM OID 6281 Clarke 1880 Palestine OMAN Unkown Clarke 1880 Built in Datums 282 alvivi m MR NO E Global Mapper User s Manual 6277 PICO DE LAS NIEVES 6728 ntemnational 1909 Hayfor In 1924 3 POINTE NOIRE 1948 CONGO 682 gakel880 o d PORTUGESE 1973 DATUM 73 6274 Itemational 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 2 POSGAR94 ARGENTINA 694 JGRSI980 O Z o O POTSDAM DHDN GERMANY 6314 Bessel 840d 5 PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN Unknown _ International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 PRS92 PHILIPPINES 668 JjClrel8 o Ja PSADS6 PROV S AMERICAN 1956 6248 International 1909 Hayford Inl 1924 2 PUERTORICO 6139 JQakel866 O O 0 0 000 QND95 QATAR 6614 Itemationa 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 1 QORNOQ J 6287 ntemationa 1909 Hayford Int 1924 1 REUNION ISLAND 6626 Itemationa 1909 Hayford Int 1924 REYKJAVIK 1900 6659 Danishir y RGF9 O 671 sg ROME1940 6265 jntemationali909 Hayfori lInl 1924 2 RT90 Bessette dd 4 S 42 PULKOVO 1942
108. 85 1 Change E SDATASIMABERTScompressed tif example tif B SDATASIBABGERHTSev11555 land shallow topo File M ames E SBDATASIMAGERT sa chafiaral tf f ee Source File Name G SDATASIMAGER TSsDBT2Dal tif G ADATANMMAGERYSseco resamp rect tif Append to Filename GDA TAIMAGE A smallliz tif C Projection f Use Source File Projection Specify Projection Change Setup Gridding i e Tiling Setup Sample Spacing Harz Datum Source D atum Si Uze Other Source Files As Filler Add Files TOM Generate Projection PR Files Generate World Files TF JB Add Directory Remove All Force Square Pixels in Output i Remove Collar From Image Add Loaded Files Add nscreen Files Pisaura Contrast The Source Files section displays the list of source files currently selected to be converted Pressing the Add Files button allows the user to select additional files for conversion Pressing the Add Directory allows the user to easily add an entire directory s worth of source files to the to be converted list All directories under the added one can be recursively searched if so desired by answering Yes to the dialog that pops up immediately after selecting the directory Pressing the Add Loaded Files button causes all files loaded into the main Global Mapper view that match that batch convert input type to be added to the list of files to be converted Pressing the Add Onscreen Files butto
109. AD83 LOAD PROJECTION FILENAME C NDATANPRJ FilesNgeo degrees nad83 prj Use the EXPORT RASTER command to generate a new 8 bit per pixel GeoTIFF file EXPORT RASTER FILENAME C DATA EXPORTED DATA merged_drg_8bpp tif X IYPE GEOTIFF PALETTE OPTIMIZED Now use the EXPORT RASTER command to generate a grayscale GeoTIFF file Lets also create a world file for this one EXPORT RASTER FILENAME C NDATANEXPORTED DATANmerged drg gray tif TYPE GEKOTIFF PALETTE GRAYSCALE GEN WORLD FPFILE YES Create a JPEG file using the EXPORT RASTER command Also create a world file and a projection file to make it easier to load in other places EXPORT RASTER FILENAME C DATA EXPORTED DATAWMmnerged drg jpg N TYPE JPEG GEN WORLD FILE YES GEN PRJ FILE YES Generate Contours from all USGS DEMs in a Folder and Export them to DXF and Shape files GLOBAL MAPPER SCRIPT VERSION 1 00 UNLOAD ALL Loop over all DEM files in a folder and convert them DIR LOOP START DIRECTORY C DATA SDTS_DEM 24K FILENAME MASKS DEM STDS TAR GZ RECURSE D Import an archived SDTS DEM file Global Mapper will automatically determine that this is an archived SDTS DEM file and load it correctly IMPORT FILENAME SFNAME W DIRS ANTI ALIAS YES Generate 50 ft contours from the loaded DEM data GENERATE CONTOURS INTERVAL 50 ELEV UNITS FEET Export the contours to a new DXF file The created file will have 3D polyline features for the contours
110. AL 35513 251 661 0989 SO 35 11 03 MN 88 1D 4 McPeak Dwight 5548 Heath Row Dr Birmingham AL 35242 205 331 8862 33 23 5b 21 86 4a McPeak Fave 146 Larkin St NewMarket AL 35761 25b 3 9 41b 34 5424 77M 8B 25 ol McPeak Faye 345 Dupree Dr Huntsville AL 35806 2596 03 2607 34 4 74319 M ab 43 2 3 4 z b B d Create Points from Geocoded Addresses Export Results to File Help Menu The Help menu offers the following commands e Online Help Command e FAO Command e User s Group Command e Register Global Mapper Command e Check for Updates Command e About Global Mapper Command Online Help Command The Online Help command open the table of contents for the Global Mapper User s Manual in your browser window You must be connected to the Internet in order to access the online manual FAQ Command Table of Contents 74 Global Mapper User s Manual The FAQ command opens the Frequently Asked Questions FAQ for Global Mapper in your browser window You must be connected to the Internet in order to access the FAQ User s Group Command The User s Group command open the Global Mapper Yahoo User s Group in your browser window You must be connected to the Internet in order to access the user s group Register Global Mapper Command The Register Global Mapper command displays the Registration dialog which allows the user to enter their registration name and code they obtained after purchasing a lice
111. ASA s World Wind application This command will create both the image tiles and the XML file required for World Wind to use the data You should place the generated xml file in the Config Earth folder under your World Wind installation folder in order for it to be picked up by World Wind When you select the command the World Wind Export Options dialog pictured below appears allowing you to setup the export This dialog allows you to specify the display name of the map set in World Wind the base directory to which the directory tree of map tiles will be exported the zoom level setup the format of the imagery and some additional options There is also an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 38 Global Mapper User s Manual World Wind Export Options World Wind Options Export Bounds Data Set Name Blue Springs DEM Tile Export Location Select the root folder for saving all of the Word Wind tiles in the export The appropriate zoom level folder names will be created based on the other export parameters C Temp export test Select Zoom Level Setup Select the resolution ta use for the maximum detail t level in the exported tiles The default will preserve full detail for any loaded raster elevation data set Level 14 2 304 m 0 77 arc PET C Use Level 0 Tile Size of Quee Number of Zoom Levels to Lise 5 Tile Im
112. CII format cousins so if you can use the binary format I would suggest it When selected the command displays the Surfer Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Terragen Terrain File Command The Export Terragen Terrain File command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Terragen terrain file When selected the command displays the Terragen Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Vulcan3D Triangulation File Command The Export Vulcan3D Triangulation File command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Vulcan3D triangulation file When selected the command displays the Vulcan3D Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to se
113. Distance Bearng LOGO Values Distance Bearing or COGO Easting Northing Set Start Position Selected Start Paint 3rag4b 37 41324892 7245 FOO meters at 180 3 8333 275 41324392 414 Remove Last Point M 45 ww HL meters arang 548 4324 50 574 Load from File Closure Distance 383 6 m Save to File One Handed Entry of Values You can achieve very fast entry of large collections of distance bearing of quadrant distance bearing values by simply using the number pad and pressing Enter after each value This will take you to the next field and finally add the point when you press Enter on the last field This will also take you back to the first field to allow continuously adding points with only one hand keeping your other hand free to mark your place on the list of values Notes on Bearings When entering data using the Specify Separate Distance and Bearing Values option the bearing values are degrees clockwise from true north so 0 degrees is north 90 degrees is east etc For the Specify Using Quadrant Bearing Distance option you specify a quadrant value of 1 to 4 with 1 being the NE quadrant 2 being the SE quadrant 3 being the SW quadrant and 4 being the NW quadrant The bearing values are then east of the NS line for quadrants 1 and 2 and west of the NS line for quadrants 3 and 4 It is also important to remember that any bearing are specified relative to true north so if your projection isn t oriented so that straight up
114. Feature Info from the menu bar Press and release the left mouse button near the objects s to be picked Holding down the P key when left clicking causes only area features at the clicked location to be considered When an object is picked it will be highlighted and a feature info dialog picture below will be displayed Right clicking the mouse button cycles through each of the elements located near the selection point displaying the information in the dialog box Table of Contents 128 Global Mapper User s Manual W Feature Information Name N7athDr 000000000 Feature Type Residential Road Geometry 4 vertices Length 1908 ft Map Mame KS Wyandotte 0000000 Description hborhood and rural road city street unseparated Right click on an entry for more options i e open UAL etc Attribute CFEC FA_ADDA_L TO_ADDR_L FR amp DDR HR TU A amp DDH H FLACE L Kansas City FLACE H Kansas City COUNTY L Wyandotte Edit Delete V ertices Copy to aa As you can see you can view a lot of information about a selected object in the Feature Info dialog The object s name description geometry information including length and enclosed area when applicable attribute value list and map name are all displayed Buttons are also available allowing you to edit the selected feature s information and drawing style marking the selected feature as deleted as well as to copy all of the feature information
115. Features Create New Line Features with Distance Bearing COGO Input Creating New Point Features Creating New Range Ring Features Creating Shape e g Circle Rectangle etc Features Create Strike and Dip Geology Related Features e Editing Existing Features Selecting Features Selecting Vertices Editing Feature Attributes and Drawing Styles Deleting Undeleting Features Moving Features Changing the Shape of Area and Line Features Combining Line Features Adding Islands to Area Features Splitting Areas into Two New Area Features e Copying Features Cut Copy Paste e Snapping to Existing Features When Drawing e Snapping Vertically Horizontally When Drawing e Un doing Digitization Operations e Additional Feature Operations Adding Elevation Values from Terrain to Point Features Generating a 3D Path Profile from a Line Feature Calculating Elevation Statistics within Selected Area Features Calculating Cut and Fill Volumes for Area and Line Features Working with Feature Measurements i e Length Enclosed Area Automatically Inserting Vertices at Line Intersections Finding Non Connected Line Endpoints i e Connectivity Checks Finding Nearby Points Flattening Terrain Using Area Features Adding Address Information to Points from Nearby Road Features Adding Coordinate Attributes to Point Features Adding Attributes to Areas from Included Point Features Creating New Features At any time that the Digi
116. File option is checked all of the point features exported to the file will be hidden by default in Google Earth so as not to clutter up the display with a bunch of point icons If the Display Area and Line Labels option 1s checked each exported line or area feature with a display label Table of Contents 48 Global Mapper User s Manual will also be marked with a clickable placemark displaying the label for that area or line feature This is the only way to get line or area features to display labels in Google Earth Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Landmark Graphics Command The Export Landmark Graphics command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a Landmark Graphics format file When selected the command displays the Landmark Graphics Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Lidar LAS Command The Export Lidar LAS command allows the user to export any loaded 3D vector data sets like 3D point clouds loaded from other LAS files to new Lidar LAS format files When selected the command displays the Lidar LAS Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a Gridding panel
117. For All Types v Display Roads As Fat Lines When Zoomed In Table of Contents 96 Global Mapper User s Manual Point Styles REFERENCE GUIDE ALERT Built In Point Types and Symbols A graphical reference guide to the point types and symbols built in to Global Mapper The Point Styles panel pictured below allows the user to configure what symbol will be used to display points of a given type and at what angle if any to rotate the symbol when displaying it on the map Symbols can be rotated relative to either the map display where O degrees is always straight up or relative to true north where 0 degrees always points directly to the North Pole Rotated symbols are good for use in geology maps and for adding things like north arrows to your maps In addition the Show Labels for Points of This Type When Present option allows user to turn point labels off on a type by type basis The Custom Symbols section allows users to create new symbols from their own bitmap and icon files which they can then use as the symbol to display for a given type The New Type button allows the user to create a new point feature type and specify how it should be displayed The Edit Type button allows the user to edit point types that were previously created with the New Type button and the Delete Type button allows the user to remove point types that were previously created with the New Type button With the Attributes button you can specify a set of defa
118. GS DEMS for the same area ll 3D View fe amp n al al eite a XS mum i Gi Table of Contents 125 Global Mapper User s Manual Tools Menu The Tools Menu offers the following commands e Zoom Allows the user to zoom in on a specific point in the display e Pan Grab and Drag Drag the view to a new location e Measure Measures length as well as an enclosed area e Feature Info Chooses an object to display its attributes e Path Profile LOS Generate 3D path profile and perform line of sight LOS calculations e View Shed Analysis Perform view shed analysis using loaded elevation grid data e Digitizer Modify existing vector features and create new ones e Coordinate Convertor Easy reprojection conversion of coordinates e Control Center Central control for all loaded overlays e Configure General Global Mapper setup Zoom Tool al The Zoom command selects the zoom tool as the current tool To zoom in on a specific point choose the Zoom tool from the toolbar or Tool Zoom from menu bar A magnifying glass icon should appear on the screen To zoom in left click without dragging the mouse The view is centered on where the mouse was clicked and will zoom in by a factor of two To zoom out right click without dragging the mouse The view will zoom out by a factor of two centered on where the mouse was clicked You can also hold down the Ctrl key while right clicking to restore the view to the last zo
119. Generic ASCH Text File s command allows the user to import data from a wide variety of generic ASCII text formats Selecting the Open Generic ASCII Text File command prompts the user to select the file s to load and then displays the Generic ASCII Text Import Options dialog pictured below This dialog allows the user to specify how the text file s are formatted so that they can be imported Global Mapper supports coordinates in decimal format as well as degree minute and degree minute second coordinates Generic ASCII Text File Import Options Import Type Paint Only All Features are Points f Point Line and Area Features t Elevation Grid from 3D Point Data Coordinate Column Order t x Easting 4 Longitude Coordinate First t OY Northing Latitude Coordinate First Columns to Skip at Start af Line i Coordinate Line Prefix None Coordinates appear immediately at the start T 7 ol any lines in the text file that they appear in All coordinate lines begin with the text string specified below For example some ASCI formats may begin a coordinate line with x E Coordinate D elimeter Select the characters that are used to separate the coordinates ini a coordinate line fram the File Select the Auto Detect option if you are not sure f Auto Detect t Space or tab C Tab Cancel Help C Comma f Semicolon Feature Classification Assign Loaded amp rea Features the Classification Scat
120. Geology Vertical Bedding Small Black Geology Vertical Bedding Small Green Geology Vertical Bedding Small Red HEELPPPELES epp Table of Contents 237 Global Mapper User s Manual BUILT IN AREA LINE AND POINT TYPES This section reviews the area line and point styles built into Global Mapper e Area Styles Area Types Area Fill Patterns Area Border Styles e Line Styles Line Type Features Drawing Styles e Point Styles Point Type Features Symbols Basic Symbols Geology Area Styles Using the Area Styles panel users can configure how areas of a given type will be displayed in Global Mapper Area fill border style and color can be modified on a type by type basis The Show Labels for Areas of This Type option allows users to turn area labels off on a type by type basis Area Types are shown in the Global Mapper Area Types table Tables showing the Global Mapper Fill Patterns and Border Styles follow the Area Types table Global Mapper recognizes five field attributes as containing information for the display appearence of an Area Type They are GM TYPE BORDER COLOR BORDER WIDTH BORDER STYLE FILL COLOR FILL STYLE The FILL_ALPHA field attribute is recognized by Global Mapper to set an Area Type s transparency Values for FILL_ALPHA range from 0 Transparent to 255 Opaque To determine the transparency value setting simply multiply the percentage by 255 and round off to
121. Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper User s Manual Download Offline Copy If you would like to have access to the Global Mapper manual while working offline click here to download the manual web pages to your local hard drive To use the manual offline unzip the downloaded file then double click on the Help_Main html file from Windows Explorer to start using the manual If you would like context sensitive help from Global Mapper to use the help files that you have downloaded rather than the online user s manual create a Help subdirectory under the directory in which you installed Global Mapper by default this will be C Program Files GlobalMapper10 and unzip the contents of the zip file to that directory Open Printable Searchable Copy PDF Format Table of Contents 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL a System Requirements b Download and Installation c Registration 2 TUTORIALS AND REFERENCE GUIDES Tutorial Getting Started with Global Mapper and cGPSMapper Guide to Creating Garmin format Maps Video Tutorials Supplied by http globalmapperforum com 9 Video Tutorial Changing the Coordinate System and Exporting Data 9 Video Tutorial Creating a Custom 3D Map 9 Video Tutorial Downloading Free Maps Imagery from Online Sources 9 Video Tutorial Exporting Current Zoom Level Using the Screenshot Function 9 Video Tutorial Exporting Elevation Data to a XYZ File 9 Video Tutorial Creating Maps and Overlays for Google Earth 9
122. HAPE NAME specifies the name to associate with the shape Here is an example of a DEFINE SHAPE command used to define a feather polygon with a name of FEATHER POLY DEFINE SHAPE SHAPE NAME FEATHER POLY 37 7493 234 43239 74 0196 24190945 9959 4 310507064109 381101 955 4314414 750 23017014 109 451717949795 906975 119 423522400 000 381869 766 4324588 266 Table of Contents 167 Global Mapper User s Manual OI 1G 344547 45209742016 END DEFINE SHAPE DIR LOOP END The DIR LOOP END command ends a loop of commands over all of the folders within a directory See the DIR LOOP START command for details DIR LOOP START The DIR LOOP START command begins a loop of commands over all of the folders within a directory and optionally its subdirectories that match one or more filename masks This is a powerful feature allowing you to do things like easily batch convert a collection of files or perform any other supported operation over a collection of files You end a loop over the files in a folder using the DIR LOOP END command Note that it is also possible to nest loops For any commands found within a DIR LOOP START DIR LOOP end pair defining a loop the following special character sequences can be used anywhere examples of what the values will be based on a current filename of C data my_file dem are listed e DIR full path to current file value is C data e ZFNAME_W_DIR full path and filename of curre
123. Half Circles Tightly Spaced Left Only UL Half Circles Tightly Spaced Right Only Dd LL LL P Half Circles Widely Spaced Left Only Half Circles Widely Spaced Right Only Solid with Diamonds on Left Table of Contents 251 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid with Diamonds on Right gt gt PPP RRP RF V Track Opens Towards End of Null Line LLLE SILLEE V Track Opens Towards Start of Null Line gt Pe PP eS C Track Opens Towards End of Line C Track Opens Towards Start of Line Arrow Track Points Towards Start of Line Arrow Track Points Towards End of Line V Track Opens Towards End of Solid Line V Track Opens Towards Start of Solid Line Table of Contents 252 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid with Xs Through Line Solid with Diamonds along Line Solid with Empty Diamonds along Line Solid with Circles along Line Solid with Empty Circles along Line Cop Solid with Arrow Pointing to Start Solid with Arrow Pointing to End Solid with Empty Circle at Start Solid with Empty Circle at End Table of Contents 253 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid with Black Edges Line Styles Using the Line Styles panel users can configure how lines of a given type will be displayed in Global Mapper The line style width color and label font can be modified on a type by type basis In addition the Show Labels for Lines of This Type option allows users to turn line lab
124. IGHT COLOR BURN COLOR DODGE DARKEN LIGHTEN DIFFERENCE EXCLUSION Table of Contents 193 Global Mapper User s Manual APPLY COLOR APPLY COLOR REVERSE KEEP RED KEEP GREEN KEEP BLUE LOAD PROJECTION The LOAD PROJECTION command imports a projection from a PRJ file and makes it the current global projection This projection will be used for all exports after this command until another LOAD PROJECTION command is encountered to change the global projection The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to PRJ file to load the projection from e PROJ NAME specifies the name of the projection to use This name must have been defined with a prior DEFINE PROJ command e PROJ EPSG CODE specifies the numeric EPSG projection code that defines the projection For example use PROJ_EPSG_CODE 26715 to define a UTM zone 15 projection with NAD27 as the datum and meters as the units RESTORE LAST SAVED VIEW The RESTORE LAST SAVED VIEW command restores the last view saved with the SAVE CURRENT VIEW command or the last view saved with the View gt Save Current View menu command in the Global Mapper user interface This command does not take any parameters SAVE CURRENT VIEW The SAVE CURRENT VIEW command saves the current view window for later restoration using the RESTORE LAST SAVED VIEW command This command does not take any parameters SAVE PROJECTION The SAVE PROJEC
125. IMPORT ASCII command imports data from a generic ASCII text file for later use The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to file to load the data from e TYPE type of import that we re doing POINT ONLY all lines with coordinate data will result in a new point object begin created POINT AND LINE both point and line features will be created from coordinate data in the file Line features will be created when coordinate data lines are back to back in the file All individual coordinate lines will result in a point object being created ELEVATION all lines in the file with 3 coordinate values x y and elevation will be used to create an elevation grid The data will be triangulated and gridded automatically resulting in a fully usable elevation grid that can be exported to any of the supported elevation data formats e COORD DELIM specifies the delimeter between coordinates in coordinate lines AUTO automatically detect the delimeter type default WHITESPACE coordinates are separated with one or more space and or tab characters COMMA coordinates are separated by commas SEMICOLON coordinates are separated by semicolons TAB coordinates are separated by tabs e COORD ORDER specifies the order of the coordinates in coordinate lines X FIRST x coordinates i e easting or longitude come first followed by y coordinates i e northing or latitude default Y FIRST y coordinates i
126. J File option is checked a describing the projection of the coordinates in the file will automatically be created If the Make Background Void Pixels Transparent option is checked for 24 bit RGB or JPEG in TIFF files an alpha channel will be added to the created GeoTIFF file to indicate which pixels should be treated as transparent Note that this will create a larger file and not all applications will support TIFF files with alpha channels Export Global Mapper Grid Command The Export Global Mapper Grid command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Global Mapper Grid format file The Global Mapper Grid format is a highly compressed elevation grid format that loads and draws very quickly and requires very little memory If you have a choice for what format to store your gridded elevation data in we suggest using the Global Mapper Grid format When selected the command displays the Global Mapper Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Table of Contents 29 Global Mapper User s Manual Export Google Maps Tiles Command The Export Google Maps Tiles command allo
127. LINE features with associated elevation value should be displayed at height above the terrain surface in Google Earth Use KML LINE DISPLAY ABOVE TERRAINZYES to enable e KML LINE ELEVS RELATIVE KML only specifies that the elevation values associated with 3D line features are relative to the terrain surface rather than relative to sea level Use KML LINE ELEVS RELATIVEZYES to enable GENERATE CONTOURS The GENERATE CONTOURS command allows for the generation of contour lines isolines of equal elevation from any or all currently loaded elevation data The following parameters are supported by the command e ELEV UNITS specify elevation units to use in export FEET export in US feet METERS export in meters e INTERVAL specifies the contour interval to use This must be a whole number greater than 0 The units are specified with the ELEV UNITS parameter described above If you wanted to generate a contour file with an interval of 20 feet you would use INTERV AL 20 ELEV_UNITS FEET in the parameter list If no interval is provided a default one is guessed based on the elevation range of the loaded elevation data SPATIAL RES specifies spacing of grid points used to determine contour position A smaller grid spacing results in higher fidelity but larger contours Typically you ll want to use the default value which is the minimum spatial resolution of all loaded data Should be formatted as x resolution y resolution The units are
128. Lake 30 100 Solid Fill sq mi 0 0 211 Null 0 0 0 Lake 5 10 sq mi Solid Fill 0 0 211 Null 0 0 0 Lake Unknown Area Solid Fill 0 0 211 Null 0 0 0 nan Land Area Solid Fill 220 212 148 Null 0 0 0 Null 0 0 0 a iene Large Metro Area Solid Fill 255 247 181 0 0 0 Major National Solid Fill 0 235 0 Null 0 0 0 Park Major River ete Solid Fill 0 0 211 Null 0 0 0 Table of Contents 201 Global Mapper User s Manual Major State Park Map Catalog Layer Bounds Marine Info Area Marine Traffic Area Misc Manmade Structure n e Table of Contents Solid Fill 0 235 0 Diagonal Cros Hatch 2900009 No Fill 255 0 255 Backwards Diagonal 255 0 255 Cross Hatch Horizontal Hatch a Solid Fill 255 247 181 Solid Fill 0 0 211 Solid Fill 255 64 64 Solid Fill 0 235 0 Solid Fill 0 0 211 Null 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 0 2 gt gt 202 Global Mapper User s Manual Null Orchard or Solid Fill 255 128 0 Plantation R gt un Solid Null Emm B Null Null D m e Scattered Trees Null Null Sand Pattern 255 255 0 Solid Fill UAI A a Aa E OC MC CER PO MU at a ee a o a a qa a EES Diagonal Scrub Area a SUC S STET ak teeta a an a a a eee ak dee moe c Ro C Hatch POS OR Eee X CONT T CO C ross Hatc PS LRL IL RM I OC M I OM I OR P RR t I ee I OC SR Table of Contents 203 0 255 0 Null 0 128 128 N
129. Layers This option causes all layers that are currently marked as hidden 1 e have their display checkbox unchecked to be closed e Hide All Offscreen Layers This option causes all layers that are currently completely off of the main map view to be marked as hidden i e have their display checkbox unchecked e Move Selected Overlay s Up Down These options allow you to modify the order in which overlays are displayed in the main view The large arrow buttons on the right hand side of the dialog also perform these functions Create Elevation Grid from 3D Vector Data Selecting the Create Elevation Grid from 3D Vector Data option on the popup menu that appears when right clicking on vector layers in the Overlay Control Center displays the Elevation Grid Creation Options dialog pictured below Using this dialog you can configure how you want the elevation grid to be created using the selected vector data as well as what portion of the selected overlays to use when creating the elevation grid You can also use the Gridding tab to specify that your data should be gridded in sections This makes it possible to grid data sets that are too large to grid all at once Table of Contents 109 Global Mapper User s Manual Elevation Grid Creation Options Grid Options Gridding Grid Bounds Description RUS OMe EE eensne ner Vertical Units METERS r Grid Spacing Automatically Determine Optimal Grid Spacing t Manually Specify
130. METERS above Ground Cancel To Sight Elevation 100 METERS above Ground Fresnel one Specification i Check Clearance with Respect to First Fresnel Zone Frequency GHz 5 Percent Clear 60 Earth Curvature Ignore Earth Curvature Atmospheric Correctior i 333330035 The earth curvature settings are used to simulate the curvature of the earth when performing line of sight analysis For short distances the curvature typically doesn t affect the path profile much but the effect over large distances can be significant Atmospheric carection it used ta account For the effect the earth s atmosphere has on different kinds of transmissions For example a value of 1 333 is often used to emulate how microwave transmissions travel through the atmosphere iw Exclude Endpoints hen Finding Minimum Clearance The From Sight Elevation section allows the user to select the height at the start position left side of graph to use in the line of sight calculations This height can be specified in either feet or meters above the ground or above sea level The To Sight Elevation section provides the same functionality for the end position right side of graph The Fresnel Zone Specification section allows you to have the line of sight analysis also check that a certain portion the Percent Clear value of the first Fresnel zone for a transmission of a particular frequency is clear The typical standard is that good visibilit
131. MN County Pope MN COUNTY RAMSEY 612 jMNComty Ramsey MNCOUNTY REDLAKE 6152 MNCouty Redlake MN COUNTY REDWOOD 6152 MNCouny Redwood MN COUNTY ROCK 652 MNCowy Rock MN COUNTY ROSEAU 6152 jMNComty Rosau MN COUNTY SCOT 652 MNCowny Scot MN COUNTY STEARNS 6152 MNCouny Steams MN COUNTY STEELE 6152 MN County Steele MN COUNTY STEVENS 6152 MN County Stevens Built in Datums 280 Global Mapper User s Manual MN COUNTY TODD 612 MNComy Tol MNCOUNTY WABASHA 6152 MNCouny Wabasha MN COUNTY WADENA 6152 MNCouny Wadena MN COUNTY WASECA 6152 MNCouny Waseca MN COUNTY WATONWAN 6152 MNCouny Watonwan NAD 0267 Oe 0 0 00 0 NAD27 ALASKA 667 Clarke 1866 NAD27 ALEUTIAN ISLANDS EAST 6267 Clrkel866 000 NAD27 ALEUTIANISLANDS WEST 6267 Clakel8 NAD27 BAHAMAS 667 Omwei 0 0 NAD27 CANADA 667 Clarke 1866 NAD27 CANALZONE 6267 Clarke 1866 NAD27 CARIBBEAN 6267 Clarke 1866 Clarke 1866 NAD27 CENTRAL AMERICA 6267 Clarke 1866 NAD27 CONUS 667 Clarke 1866 0 00 0 NAD27 CUBA O 667 Cakel866 0 0 NAD27 GREENLAND 6167 Clarkel866 0 00 0 NAD27 MEXICO 667 Carkel8 0000 NAD27 SANSALVADOR 6067 Clarke 1866 NAD27 YUMA PROVING GROU
132. Mapper are able capture the screen to an image file Export Raster and Elevation Data The commands on the Export Raster and Elevation Data submenu allow the user to export loaded raster and elevation data to various formats Export Arc ASCII Grid Command The Export Arc ASCII Grid command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to an Arc ASCII Grid format file When selected the command displays the Arc ASCII Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export BIL BIP BSQ Command The Export BIL BIP BSQ command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and or elevation grid data to a BIL BIP or BSQ format file When selected the command displays the BIL BIP BSQ Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of an Options panel pictured below which allows the user to set up type of export to perform the sample spacing vertical units and other applicable options a Gridding Panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 22 Global
133. Measure Attributes of Selected Feature s option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will add measurement attributes to the selected features that do not already have them or update the measurement attributes of features that do The measure attributes include LENGTH for lines and PERIMETER and ENCLOSED AREA for areas In addition to adding updating the measure attributes for the selected feature s the combined length and or enclosed area of the selected line and area features will also be reported by this command You can also select the Display Feature Measurements option to display a dialog pictured below listed the measurements and attributes of each selected line and area feature as well as the total combined enclosed area and perimeter length of the features This dialog also allows you to easily export the results to a CSV file Feature Measurement Information Selected Feature Informatian Feature Mame Feature Type Encloszed Area zLenath Ferimeter PRACTICE FAIRWAYS T Practice Practice 13 67 acres 1 139 km F airway Fairways 0 1085 acres B3 4m 0 Fairway Fairways 0 0758 acres bm U Tees Tees 0 3705 acres 154 5 m Tees Tees 0 4027 acres 157 1 m Bunkers Bunkers 0 04637 acres b3 2m lt Total Enclosed Area 15 17 acres Total Lenath Perimeter 2 446 km Export ta CSV File Automatically Inserting Vertices at Line Intersections If two of more line features are selected the In
134. NDS 6267 Clake1866 NADSS 869 GRS1980 S NAD83 ALABAMAHPGN 612 GRSI90 00000 NADS3 ARIZONAHPGN 612 GRS1980 000000 NADS3 ARKANSASHPGN 612 GRSI980 0000000 NADS3 CALIFORNIA NORTH HPGN 6152 GRSI980 0 NADS3 CALIFORNIA SOUTH HPGN 6152 GRSI9880 0 0000 NADS3 COLORADOHPGN 6152 GRSI980 NADS3 FLORIDAHPGN 612 GRSI980 000 NADS3 GEORGIAHPGN 612 GRSI980 0000 NAD83 HAWAITHPGN 612 GRSI980 0000 NAD83 ILLINOISHPGN 612 GRSI980 0000000 NAD83 INDIANAHPGN 612 GRS1980 0000000 NADS3QOWAHPGN 612 GRSI980 0 0000000 NADS3 KANSASHPGN 6122 GRS1980 0 0000 NAD83 KENTUCKY HPGN 61S2_IGRS 980 NAD83 LOUISIANAHPGN 6152 GRSI980 0 NAD83 MAINEHPGN 612 GRSI980 O Built in Datums 281 Global Mapper User s Manual NAD83 MARYLAND DELAWAREHPGN 6132 GRSI980 O o Z lt o NAD83 MICHIGAN HPGN 6152 GRS1980 Z O Z o Z NAD83 MINNESOTA HPGN 652 GRSU98D O Z OZ o NAD83 MISSISSIPPI HPGN 6152 GRSU98D O o Z o Z o NAD83 MISSOURI HPGN 652 GRS1980 O Z o Z o o o NAD83 MONTANA EAST HPGN 6152 GRS1980 O Z o Z NAD83 MONTANA WEST IDAHOHPGN 6132 JGRSI980 0 NAD83 NEBRASKA HPGN 6132 GRSI980 O oZ o Z NAD83 NEVADA HPGN 652 GRS198
135. OINTS export point features to the Shapefile e GEN PRJ FILE specifies that a projection PRJ file should be generated in addition to the output file Set this to YES to cause the projection file to be generated Leaving out this parameter or setting it to anything but YES will cause no PRJ file to be generated e GRID TYPE CELL SIZE specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with each tile having the given size in the export projection The value should be specified as cell width cell height For example if you are exporting in a metric projection and want to tile the export into cells that are 10 000 meters wide by 5 000 meters tall you would use GRID TYPE CELL SIZE 10000 0 5000 0 GRID TYPE ROWS COLS specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with a given number of rows and columns of tiles The value should be specified as number of rows number of columns For example if you want to tile the export into a grid of 8 rows each 4 tiles across you would use GRID TYPE ROWS COLS z 8 4 GRID OVERLAP specifies how much to overlap tiles when gridding an export into multiple tiles This is a percentage value from 0 to 100 and only applies when on of the GRID TYPE parameters is used For example to make your grid tiles overlap by 5 of the grid tile size use GRID_OVERLAP 5 0 The default value is 0 0 meaning that the tiles do not overlap GRID NAMING specifies how to name tiles when gridding an ex
136. ONE no contrast adjustment applied this is the default PERCENTAGE apply a percentage contrast adjustment The CONTRAST STRETCH SIZE parameter can be used to override the number of standard deviations from the mean to stretch to MIN MAX apply a min max contrast stretch stretching the available range of values in each color band to the full range of 0 255 For imagery which contains both black and white this will have no affect e CONTRAST SHARED raster only specified whether or not the contrast adjustment for this layer will share the adjustment with other contrast adjusted layers in order to ensure a consistent modification across layers Use CONTRAST SHAREDZYES to enable contrast sharing CONTRAST STRETCH SIZE raster only specifies the number of standard deviations from the mean to use in a PERCENTAGE contrast adjustment The default is 2 0 AUTO CONTRAST raster only DEPRECATED use CONTRAST MODE instead specifies whether to automatically calculate and apply a 2 standard deviation contrast adjustment to the image Use AUTO CONTRASTZYES to turn on Anything else turns it off COLOR INTENSITY elevation and raster only specifies the color intensity to use when adjusting the brightness of pixels in the overlay Valid values range from 0 to 20 with O being completely black 10 being no alteration and 20 being completely white For example to make an image slightly darker you could use COLOR_INTENSITY 7 NO
137. Otherwise the value in the new layer is marked as invalid void This is useful for applying a mask to a terrain layer Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to combine terrain layers Table of Contents 64 Global Mapper User s Manual Generate Contours Command The Generate Contours command allows the user to generate equally spaced contour lines from any loaded elevation grid data When selected the command displays the Contour Generation Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the contour generation process Contour Generation Options Contour Options Simplification Gridding Contour Bounds Description GENERATED CONTOURS Contour Interval 5 METERS Only Generate Contour Lines at Specified Height Resolution The resolution affects fidelity with which contours are generated Larger numbers result in less detailed contour lines that take up less space Typically you ll just want to accept the defaults X axis 30 EMEN Y axis 30 meters I you wish to change the ground units that the resolution is specified in you need ta change the curent projection by going to Config Projection Generate Area Features Colored Based on the Curent Elevation Shader in Addition to Contours Generate Spot Elevations at Min Max Elevation Iw Interpolate to Fill Small Gaps in Data Iv Append Unit Labels m or ft to Elevation Labels Iw Smooth Contour Lines Areas to Imp
138. PNG Good for Scanned Maps and Vector Data n Default Background Map Layer Google Maps Street Maps E Google Maps Controls to Add Map Type Selector Overview Map v Scale Bar Transparency How See Through is the Map Transparent Opaque M Make Image Tiles Transparent PNG Format Only Save Vector Data if Displayed Skip Existing Tiles Use to Resume Cancelled Export Note Users without a permanent registration key that export Google Maps tiles will get a large diagonal Table of Contents 30 Global Mapper User s Manual DEMO symbol across the image Registered users will not see that symbol on their output Export Gravsoft Grid Command The Export Gravsoft Grid command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Gravsoft Grid format file When selected the command displays the Gravsoft Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export HF2 HFZ Command The Export HF2 HFZ command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to an HF2 HFZ format file When selected the command displays the HF2 HFZ Export Op
139. Ramp Ramp Ramp Residential Road Residential Road Residential Road Residential Road DTi id L Ilri Edit Selected Delete Selected Select All The Search Vector Data dialog displays a list of all of the vector features areas lines and or points which match the specified Search Criteria The Search Criteria can be applied to any attribute value of the loaded features the display label field or the description type field Comparisons to the Compare Value can be done either textually or numerically For text equal and not equal searches the Compare Value field can contain the and wildcard characters In addition one can control which vector object types area line and or point to include in the search Once you have your Search Criteria set how you want for the search press the New Search button to actually perform the search and display the matching results in the results list The results will be sorted in ascending order by the names of the features You can also press the Search in Existing Results button to apply the new search criteria to the existing results Using this you can create complicated searches based on multiple criteria Double clicking on an item in the list will recenter the view on that object The Edit Selected button displays a dialog allowing the user to modify the name feature type and drawing style of any features selected The Delete Selected button will mark all selected features as de
140. SIZE parameter is used to specify how many pixels to blend on each blended edge FEATHER BLEND SIZE raster only specifies the size in pixels to use for a blend boundary FEATHER BLEND POLY FILE raster only specifies that the polygon boundary to feather blend this layer against should come from the specified file BAND SETUP raster only specifies what bands of data from the raster file being loaded should be used to populate the red green and blue color channels when displaying the image This is useful for multi spectral imagery which may have more than 3 color bands The default band setup will be to use the first three bands as follows BAND SETUP 0 1 2 Note that not all raster formats support specifying a non default band setup LABEL FIELD specifies the name of the attribute field to use as the label attribute for the features in the file AREA TYPE specifies the name of the Global Mapper type to use for area features imported from the file LINE TYPE specifies the name of the Global Mapper type to use for line features imported from the file POINT TYPE specifies the name of the Global Mapper type to use for point features imported from the file LAYER DESC specifies a description to use for the layer when displaying it in the Overlay Control Center This overrides the default description based on the filename or other information within the file GCP specifies a single ground control point for use in rectifying a file
141. Specify Latitude Longitude Bounds of Area HU TE Longitude values in the Al Morth 11 2b Western Hemisphere and est OIL E ast or dab Draw Box latitude values in the Southern South D hemisphere must be negative Entire Data Source Bounds IMPORTANT NOTE These data sources are on external servers that Global Mapper has na control aver The data may drawizexport very slowly or become Unavailable at any time Wwe have na control ower this Table of Contents 12 Global Mapper User s Manual Once the data to download is defined Global Mapper will automatically download the most appropriate layer for display as you zoom in and out This way you can see an overview of the data when zoomed out with more detail becoming available when you zoom in You can also export this data in full resolution to any of the supported raster export formats such as GeoTIFF JPG or ECW The most appropriate detail level for the export sample spacing will be used to obtain the source data for the export Each data source load will appear as a separate layer in the Overlay Control Center Each entry can have it s display options modified just like any other raster layer to drape it over elevation data blend it with other layers etc You can use the Add WMS Data Source button to display the Select WMS Data Source to Load dialog pictured below This dialog allows you to specify the URL of a WMS data source and select what lay
142. TE This parameter has been deprecated in favor of the COLOR INTENSITY FULL parameter COLOR INTENSITY FULL elevation and raster only specifies the color intensity to use when adjusting the brightness of pixels in the overlay Valid values range from 0 to 512 with O being completely white 256 being no alteration and 512 being completely black For example to make an image slightly darker you could use COLOR_INTENSITY 300 NOTE This parameter replaces the COLOR INTENSITY parameter TEXTURE MAP specifies that this image should be draped over any elevation data loaded before it Use TEXTURE MAPzZYPDS to turn on Anything else turns it off TRANSPARENT COLOR specifies the color to make transparent when rendering this overlay The color should be specified as RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt For example to make white the transparent color use TRANSPARENT COLOR ZRGB 255 255 255 If you do not wish any color to be transparent do not use this parameter TRANSLUCENCY specifies the level of translucency 1 e how see through the layer is Value values range from 0 to 512 with 0 meaning the layer is completely transparent 1 e invisible and 512 meaning the layer is completely opaque this is the default e BLEND MODE specifies the blend mode to use for combining this overlay and any previously loaded overlays NO BLEND no blending is done this is the default MULTIPLE SCREEN OVERLAY HARD L
143. TION command saves the current global projection to a PRJ file The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to PRJ file to save the projection to SET BG COLOR The SET BG COLOR command sets the color to use for any background pixels when rendering layers The following parameters are supported by the command Table of Contents 194 Global Mapper User s Manual e COLOR specifies the background color to use The color should be specified as RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt For example to make white the background color use COLOR RGB 255 255 255 SET_LOG_FILE The SET_LOG_FILE command sets the name of the file to log status warning and error messages to If the log file specified already exists the messages will be appended to the end of it The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to log file to write messages to SET VERT DISP OPTS The SET VERT DISP OPTS command allows you to modify the options used when rendering elevation layers such as the shader to use if any as well as the lighting and water setup The following parameters are supported by this command e ENABLE HILL SHADING this setting controls whether or not hill shading i e lighting shadowing will be done Use YES to enable hill shading and NO to disable hill shading e SHADER NAME this sets the name of the shader to use when rendering elevation data This must be one of
144. The Distance Measure Units selection below it then controls the units that are displayed on the scale bar The Elevation Legend Display Units options allow for the control of whether or not an elevation legend is displayed on the main map when elevation grid data is loaded and what units the elevation legend will be in if it is displayed The No Legend option causes no elevation legend to be displayed The Metric meters option causes an elevation legend to be displayed with various elevation values labeled in meters The Statute feet option causes an elevation legend to be displayed with various elevation values labeled in feet If the elevation legend is displayed in the main map view you can right click on it to control various options and also save it to a BMP file The Position Display Format setting controls the format of the cursor latitude longitude position display in the status bar The Area Measure Units setting controls what units that area measurements will be displayed in the Measure Tool and when creating new features with the Digitizer Tool The Distance Measure Units setting controls what units that distance measurements will be displayed in the Measure Tool and when creating new features with the Digitizer Tool as well on on the Distance Scale bar The Miscellaneous Advanced Options section contains options for advanced users The following options are available e Prefer World File TFW Coordinate for GeoTIFF Files if che
145. When working with island and parent areas there are also some options available under the Advanced Selection Options submenu that make it easy to select all of the island areas associated with selected parent areas and to also deselect the parent area for a selected island area Selecting Vertices If the Show Area and Line Vertices option is enabled Shift V is a keyboard shortcut to toggle this setting you can also select individual vertices on area and line features You must select vertices before options allowing you to work with individual vertices in area and line features appear in the right click options menu Selected vertices will be shown on the display with a circle around them To select vertices simple left click near a vertex to select the closest one if any are nearby or drag a box to select all vertices within the box The same behavior modifications occur as described above if the CTRL and or SHIFT keys are pressed when selecting Pictured below is a screen capture showing a line feature and several of its vertices selected with a right click popup menu opened to show the available options Table of Contents 147 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper REGISTERED E e File View Tools Search Help Edit Line Feature Move Line Feature Delete Line Feature Move Selected Verkices Join Selected vertices Delete Selected vertices Set Position of Selected vertices Insert Vertex into Selected Line Hide Ar
146. Window During Conversion this option causes the main map window to immediately be minimized when the batch conversion operation begins and stay that way until the operation completes e Never Anti Alias Pixels Interpolate this option disables anti aliasing interpolation even for those layers to which it would normally be applied by default like gridded elevation layers or imagery being reprojected or resampled e Never Automatically Adjust Contrast this option disables automatic contrast adjustment even for those layers to which it would normally be applied by default like 16 bit per color channel images e Only Generate Metadata Files causes only metadata files like world files PRJ files and TAB files to be generated This is a very handy way to create metadata files for a large collection of files like GeoTIFF files in order to use the data in software that doesn t recognize embedded positioning Table of Contents 62 Global Mapper User s Manual information e Remove Collar From Image causes the collar of DRG style images to be automatically removed from each image that is converted if collar bounds can be automatically determined Note that some collar may remain in order to make the end result rectangular if the destination projection in not geographic lat lon If you check this option and the file being converted is also loaded in the main map view and has some custom collar cropping applied those collar cropping options w
147. You will be unable to load workspaces e You will be unable to do line of sight calculations using loaded elevation data e You will be unable to perform view shed analysis using loaded elevation data e You will be unable to perform cut and fill volume calculations using loaded elevation data e You will be unable to work with map catalogs e You will be unable to download data from WMS map servers Table of Contents 4 Global Mapper User s Manual e You will be unable to save rectified imagery to fully rectified files e You will not be able to print to a specific scale i e 1 1000 e You will have to endure a nagging registration dialog everytime that you run the program e You will not be eligible for free email support CLICK HERE TO REGISTER your copy of Global Mapper and obtain access to all of its powerful features Table of Contents Global Mapper User s Manual 2 MENUBAR AND TOOLBAR This section briefly reviews the menus and commands in order to understand the basic purpose of each Figure 1 shows the program Toolbar as it appears at startup Toolbar Configuration Grab and Drag Tool Digitizer Edit Too Qpen Data File Zoom In Out X Control Center A NI ini Info ToN 3D icd PISPISIN aale Ae fan T E meses za fe HW od Download Data oom Tool View Shed Tool Zoom to Full View Measure ool Hill Shading cave Workspace Fath Frafile Line of sight Tool Figure 1 Menu Bar and Toolbar The toolbar is dis
148. a TEMPLATE FILENAME value is provided this controls whether or not the FILES section s from the template file will be copied to the new file e MP COPY ENTIRE TEMPLATE POLISH MP only specifies that the entire contents of a specified template file should be copied to the new file rather than just the header portion of the template file e MP IMAGE ID POLISH MP only specifies the image ID value that should be stored in the resultant mp file If you don t specify this value or you specify a value of 0 a new value that has not been used before will automatically be generated e DGN UNIT RESOLUTION DGN only specifies the unit resolution to use in an exported DGN file The default 1s 10000 0 e DGN GLOBAL ORIGIN LL DGN only specifies whether the global origin of the exported DGN file should be set to the lower left of the design plane rather than at the center of the design plane Use DGN GLOBAL ORIGIN LLzYES to move the global origin to the lower left e DGN REPLACE DARK COLORS DGN only specifies whether the color of dark lines should automatically be replaced with white on export to make them more visible on a dark background Use DGN REPLACE DARK COLORSZzYES to enable this option e OVERWRITE EXISTING specifies that existing files should be overwritten The default is OVERWRITE EXISTINGZYES so use OVERWRITE_EXISTING NO to skip exporting files that already exist e SPLIT BY LAYER SHAPEFILE only specifies that the export
149. a shows up in Google Earth Display When File is 64 Pixels in Size Super Overlay Setup __ Automatically Grid Export of Lange Data Sets so Iv that Google Earth Can Handle Them Better This is also known as Super Overlays Grid Cell Size Pixels 1024x1024 e TUE Compressed KMZ File Save Scale Elevation Legend Grid if Displayed Save Vector Data if Displayed Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Leveller Heightfield Command The Export Leveller Heightfield command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Leveller Heightfield file for use with the Daylon Leveller application When selected the command displays the Leveller Heightfield Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Lidar LAS Command Table of Contents 33 Global Mapper User s Manual The Export Lidar LAS command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to Lidar LAS format files When selected the command displays the Lidar LAS Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dial
150. age File Format f JPG Good for Imagery t PNG Good for Scanned Maps and Vector Data I Make Image Tiles Transparent Save Vector Data if Displayed Create Filenames for Word Wind Java Edition Cancel amp ppli Help Note Users without a permanent registration key that export World Wind tiles will get a large diagonal DEMO symbol across the image Registered users will not see that symbol on their output Export XYZ Grid Command The Export X YZ Grid command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a comma delimited ASCH XYZ file Each grid point will be represented as follows actual coordinate delimiter is configurable x coordinate y coordinate z coordinate When selected the command displays the XYZ Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Zmap Plus Grid File Command The Export Zmap Plus Grid File command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Table of Contents 39 Global Mapper User s Manual Zmap Plus Grid format file When selected the command displays the Zmap Plus Grid Export Options dialog which allo
151. al Idx 1 RGB 255 255 255 MM Fal id 3 RGB 203 0 23 EH Pal Idx 4 RGB 131 66 37 Pal Idx 5 RGB 201 234 157 ERE Pal Idx 6 RGB 137 51 128 7 Pal Idx 7 RGB 255 234 0 7 Pal Idx 8 RGB 167 226 226 ny Pal Idx 8 RGB 255 184 184 7 Pal Idx 10 RGB 218 179 214 Pal Idx 11 RGB 209 209 209 Pal Idx 12 RGB 207 164 142 Edit Selected Color Edit Selected Label Load Palette File Save Palette File Restore Original Palette Feathering Tab The Feathering tab pictured below allows you specify that you would like to feather blend the selected overlay s with the underlying overlay s on the specified edges This can be extremely powerful tool for blending imagery maps from different sources and or at different resolution to make the edge between the map sets invisible You can choose to either feather blend around the edges of selected files or along the boundary of one or more selected polygons Feather blending can be used on both raster imagery layers as well as gridded elevation layers In the case of elevation layers the feather blending works by calculating modified elevation values based on elevation value in the blended layer and the topmost elevation layer underneath the blended layer in the draw order Table of Contents 118 Global Mapper User s Manual Raster Options Display Color Contrast Adjustment Cropping Palette Feathering Color Grade Proj
152. ally be draped on top of the elevation data in the 3D View window The image below depicts a sample of the 3D View window displayed using 250K USGS DEM data for Salt Lake City UT overlaid with DOQ satellite imagery from the TerraServer import command under the File menu d iD f 1e ve m Teln Al al eiie ale PI E F The 3D View window contains a toolbar with command buttons allowing you to modify the default view You can use the mouse to rotate the view around as well as zoom in The arrow keys on the toolbar allow you to pan the data visible in the 3D view in any direction The zoom in and out buttons allow you to zoom in or out on the center of the 3D view Additional buttons are also available for modifying the vertical exaggeration displaying water and saving the 3D view contents to a Windows BMP TIFF PNG or JPG file Table of Contents 124 Global Mapper User s Manual The contents of the 3D View window will always reflect what is visible in the main Global Mapper view This means that as you pan and zoom around the main Global Mapper view the contents of the 3D View window will pan and zoom around as well The reverse is also true in that the pan and zoom buttons on the 3D View window will cause the main Global Mapper view to pan and zoom as well Another example of the 3D view is displayed below This time it is several 24K USGS DLGs for Blue Springs MO overlaid on several 24K US
153. alog pictured below to allow specifying the bounds to crop to Customize Collar Bounds M Crop Northern Boundary at 33 125 Degrees JAR i iw Crop Southern Boundary at 33 Degrees Cancel Iv Crop Western Boundary at 34 375 Degrees i Crop Eastern Boundary at 94 25 Degrees Initialize Bounds with Bounds of Selected Area Feature Enter the boundaries of the data nat including the callar in the overlay in the spaces above The coordinates need to be in decimal degrees with the datum being the same as the datum that the overlay is in Mo data outside these bounds will be shown Table of Contents 116 Global Mapper User s Manual The Crop to Manually Specified Boundary in Native Layer Projection Units option allows you to specify a crop boundary in the native units of the selected overlay When selected this option will display the Customize Collar Bounds dialog pictured above to allow specifying the bounds to crop to The Crop a Specified Number of Pixels Around the Edges of the Layer option allows you to specify a number of pixels to crop of each edge of the selected overlay s The Crop to Previously Selected Polygon s option specifies that you want to crop to the crop polygon s area previously applied to the selected layer s using the Crop to Currently Selected Polygon option The Crop to Currently Selected Polygon s option specifies that you want to crop the selected layer s to any area feature s currently selecte
154. alog consists of a GeoTIFF Options panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Table of Contents 26 Global Mapper User s Manual Geo TIFF Export Options 24 bit AGE Full Color Large Storage Required JPEG in TIFF Full Color Highly Compressed Lossy Black and white 1 bit per pisel Elevation 15 bit integer samples Elevation 32 bit floating point samples Palette Image ptimized Palette Vertical Units Sample Spacing aS 30 meters aes 30 meters iY Always Generate Square Pixels IF you wish to change the ground units that the spacing is specified in you need to change the current projection by going to Config Projection Click Here to Calculate Spacing in Other Units DPI Value To Save in Image 0 fer None Save Scale Elevation Legend Grid if Displayed Save Vector Data if Displayed Generate TPM File nterpolate to Fill Small Gaps in Data Use L Aw Compression Generate PAJ File Cancel j Help The File Type section allows you to choose what type of GeoTIFF file to generate The various file types are described below e 5 bit Palette Image This option generates a 256 color raster GeoTIFF file with 8 bits per pixel The Palette options described below will apply in this case This option will generate a relatively small output file at the expense of some color fide
155. an output projection and they select a zoned projection like UTM or Gauss Krueger they will have the option on the projection selection dialog to have the best zone for the center of the output map automatically used if they select the Automatically Select Best Zone option in the Zone box on the projection selection dialog The Setup Gridding i e Tiling button displays a dialog allowing the user to specify if and how to break up each file being converted into multiple new files This option is only available when converting to a raster or gridded elevation format The Setup Sample Spacing button displays a dialog allowing the user to choose to either keep the sample spacing of source raster and elevation files when converting the selected or to specify a new sample spacing to resample all of the selected input files at when performing the conversion This option is only available when converting to a raster or gridded elevation format The Horz Datum selection allows the user to choose the horizontal datum that each newly created output file should use By default each output file will use the same horizontal datum as the source file that it was created off of Alternately the user can specify to have all output files created in NAD27 NAD83 WGS72 or WGSS84 with the appropriate offset being applied automatically The Vertical Units selection is present only for some conversions and controls the output elevation units The Palette selection is
156. and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Lowrance USR Command The Export Lowrance USR command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a Lowrance USR format file for use in Lowrance brand GPS devices When selected the command displays the Lowrance USR Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export MapGen Command The Export MapGen command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a MapGen format file When selected the command displays the MapGen Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export MapInfo MIF MID Command Table of Contents 49 Global Mapper User s Manual The Export MapInfo MIF MID command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a MapInfo MIF MID format file When selected the command displays the MapInfo Expo
157. associated with exported features will be saved as tags in the resulting file Note that this can significantly slow down your export in some cases If the Set Global Origin to the Lower Left of Design Plane Rather than the Center of the Design Plane option is set the global origin is set to the minimum valid negative values rather than at 0 0 as is standard If the Replace Dark Line Colors with White option is set any lines that are near black in color will be replaced with a white line automatically This is useful for getting dark colored lines to show up when the exported DGN file is viewed in an application that uses a black background Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DLG O Command The Export DLG O command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a native format USGS DLG O Digital Line Graph Optional format file Table of Contents 43 Global Mapper User s Manual When selected the command displays the DLG O Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a DLG O Options panel which allows the user to set up the banner name DCU digital cartographic unit or quad name and category name a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export If possible the fields on the DLG O Options panel are automatically filled in with the
158. ault is OVERWRITE EXISTINGZYES so use OVERWRITE_EXISTING NO to skip exporting files that already exist e ADD OVERVIEW LAYERS ERDAS only specifies that overview pyramid layers should be generated for the export Use ADD OVERVIEW LAYERSzYES to enable e BLOCK SIZE ERDAS only specifies the block size to use for the export The default is BLOCK SIZE 64 e COMPRESS OUTPUT ERDAS only specifies whether or not the exported file should be compress The default is COMPRESS OUTPUTZYES EXPORT METADATA The EXPORT METADATA command exports the metadata for a specified load layer The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path of file must already be loaded that you want to save the metadata for e METADATA FILENAME full path of new text file to create on disk containing the metadata for the specified layer EXPORT RASTER The EXPORT RASTER command exports all currently loaded raster vector and elevation data to a file The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to file to save the data to e TYPE type of raster file we re exporting to BIL export to a band interleave BIL format file BIP export to a band interleaved pixel BIP format file BSQ export to a band sequential BSQ format file ECW export to an ECW format file ERDAS export to an Erdas Imagine IMG format file GEOTIFF export to a GeoTIFF format file IDRISI RASTER export
159. awing style of the tracklog can be configured on the Line Styles tab of the Configuration dialog Save Tracklog The Save Tracklog command will save the currently record tracklog to a permanent line feature When selected this command will display a dialog allowing you to specify any additional desired attributes and or drawing styles that you would like to associate with the tracklog In addition any extraneous points that do not contribute to the shape of the tracklog will be automatically removed to save space Table of Contents 161 Global Mapper User s Manual Any saved tracklog features will be added to the user features layer which appears in the Overlay Control Center The saved tracklog features can be exported to any of the supported vector export formats Table of Contents 162 Global Mapper User s Manual Scripting Language Reference Contents e General Overview e Batch Mode Operation e Comments e Commands ADD MEASURE ATTRS Adds Updates Measure Attributes to Features in a Layer ASSIGN TYPE Assigns Feature Types Based on Attribute Values COMBINE TERRAIN Combines Two Loaded Terrain Layers to Generate a New Terrain Layer DEFINE PROJ Define a Projection for Later Use DEFINE SHAPE Define a Shape i e Polygon for Later Use DIR LOOP END Ends a Loop of Commands Over Files in a Directory DIR LOOP START Start a Loop of Commands Over Files in a Directory EMBED SCRIPT Runs Another Script File With
160. bal Mapper User s Manual coordinate lines in the file Coordinates can either be x followed by y i e longitude then latitude or the reverse Elevation values if any are always assumed to come after the x and y values The Columns to Skip at Start of Line setting controls what column the coordinates start in For example if the x and y coordinates are in the 3rd and 4th columns set this value to 2 so that the coordinates will be grabbed from the appropriate place The Coordinate Delimeter section allows the user to specify what character the coordinates are separated by on coordinate lines If the Auto Detect option is selected Global Mapper will attempt to automatically determine the coordinate delimeter This option will usually work and should probably be used unless you have trouble The Coordinate Line Prefix section allows the user to specify whether coordinates start at the beginning of the line or if coordinate lines start with some other sequence of characters For example some formats may start coordinate lines with the sequence XY The Feature Classification section allows the user to specify what feature type to assign to area line and point features imported from the file If the nclude attributes from lines with coordinate data option is selected any text found AFTER the coordinate data on a line from the file will be including as attribute for the feature that coordinate is in If not selected only lines from the fil
161. ble to see much of the DOQ underneath Pressing the Set Transparent Color button allows the user to select the color or multiple colors for palette based files to treat as transparent in the selected overlay s as well as save the palette for palette based files to a color palette pal file If you also check the Make Very Similar Colors Transparent as Well option any colors that are a very similar color to the selected transparent color will also be displayed transparently This is useful for getting rid of colors in lossy formats like JPG and ECW where the colors are not exact The Anti Alias Pixels Interpolate option removes jagged edges by making a subtle transition between pixels Turning off this option helps maintain the hard edges of the pixels as they are rasterized The Texture Map option allows a 2D raster overlay to be draped over loaded 3D elevation overlays Selecting the check box causes the overlay to use any available data from underlying elevation layers to determine how to color the DRG or DOQ The result is a shaded relief map Color Contrast Adjustment Tab The Color Contrast Adjustment tab pictured below allows you to control the color balance and contrast of the selected overlay s Table of Contents 114 Global Mapper User s Manual Raster Options Cropping Feathering Projection Display Color Contrast Adjustment Color Balance z Red 11 3 Green Ux Blue 0 i Contrast Adjustment
162. c and nothing prepended only specify a period and then the extension when selecting the base output filename like jpg for JPG output If the user chooses to breakup the data into a grid then the options in the Grid Naming section will apply and allow the user to control how the individual grid tile files are named The following naming options are available e Sequential Numbering Row Major Order With this option a number starting at 1 for the top left tile will be appended to the selected export filename The number will increase across each row e Separate Row Column Letters or Numbers With this option separate indicators will be appended to the selected export filename for the row and column If letters are selected the letters A Z will be used If more than 27 letters are needed multiple letters will be used e g AA AB etc If numbers are used the number values will be pre pended with zeroes in order to make the numeric values have the same number of characters for every output tile If the Reverse checkbox is marked the order or the numbers or letters used will be reversed e g if there are 4 rows and numeric naming is selected the rows will be named 4 3 2 1 instead of 1 2 3 4 The user also has the option of specifying the letter number to start naming at as well as the option to specify a prefix for each column and row number for each tile and the option to specify by what value numeric names should change by step
163. ces on existing features to be snapped to Holding down the P key causes only nearby point features to be snapped to Snapping Vertically Horizontally When Drawing When drawing new area or line features or moving existing features you can use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to cause the next vertex to be snapped vertically or horizontally relative to the last vertex or moved vertically or horiztonally compared to the features current location Hold down the CTRL key to snap vertically the SHIFT key to snap horizontally or both the CTRL and SHIFT keys to snap diagonally Un doing Digitization Operations During some operations like drawing new features you can undo your last placed point by pressing Ctrl Z Displaying Additional Feature Information Depending on what types of feature are selected and what data is available additional options may appear on the option menu that appears when right clicking These additional options are described below Adding Elevation Values from Terrain to Point Features If gridded elevation data i e DEMs is loaded and one or more point features is selected the Apply Elevations from Terrain Layers to Selected Point Features option will appear on the right click option menu Selecting this option will add an ELEVATION attribute to each selected point feature containing the elevation value at each point location from the top most terrain layer at that location Generating a 3D Path Profile from a Line Feature If g
164. cifies the numeric character set of the font to use when displaying the display label if any for this feature These correspond to the Windows character set enumeration Table of Contents 11 Global Mapper User s Manual Click here for more instructions on creating generic ASCII data files with features of various types and click here for more documentation on the supported fields Download Online Imagery Topo Terrain Maps The Download Online Imagery Topo Terrain Maps command allows the user to download mapping data from numerous built in and user supplied sources This includes premium access to high resolution color imagery for the entire world from Digital Globe GlobeXplorer and AirPhotoUSA as well as seamless USGS topographic maps and satellite imagery for the entire United States as well as high resolution color aerial imagery for select metropolitan areas from TerraServer USA In addition access is provided to several built in WMS OpenGC Web Map Server databases to provide easy access to digitial terrain data and color satellite imagery for the entire world You can also add your own WMS data sources for access to any data published on a WMS server This is an extremely powerful feature as it puts many terabytes of usually very expensive data right at your fingertips in Global Mapper for no additional cost with the exception of access to the un watermarked Digital Globe imagery which is not free Note that this feature require
165. cked this option specifies that for GeoTIFF files that also have accompanying TFW files the coordinates from the TFW file will be used rather than the coordinates embedded in the GeoTIFF file e Maintain Export Bounds Instead of Sample Spacing if checked this option specifies that when exporting a raster elevation format and the bounding box for the export is not an exact multiple of the Table of Contents 90 Global Mapper User s Manual specified sample spacing for the export the sample spacing will be adjusted to be slightly smaller rather than the default of adjusting the export bounds up to the next sample spacing boundary Export Old Format PRJ Files if checked this option specifies that the old mostly unsupported ESRI PRJ format be used when PRJ files are saved rather than the default new WKT projection format that is used by default BIL Format Ask if 16 bit Files are Imagery if checked this option will cause the user to be prompted to choose whether 16 bit BIL files that are encountered are elevation or imagery files If not checked any 16 bit BIL files will be assumed to be elevation files DGN Import Cells as Point Features if checked this option causes cell features in DGN v8 and later files that have an associated point location to just be loaded as a single point feature rather than the collection of features specified by the cell DGN Add DGN Color Number to Feature Description if checked this option causes the
166. cognizes five field attributes as containing information for the display appearence of an Area Type They are GM TYPE BORDER COLOR BORDER WIDTH BORDER STYLE FILL COLOR FILL STYLE The FILL_ALPHA field attribute is recognized by Global Mapper to set an Area Type s transparency Values for FILL_ALPHA range from 0 Transparent to 255 Opaque To determine the transparency value setting simply multiply the percentage by 255 and round off to the nearest integer e g 75 transparency 0 75 x 255 191 25 use 191 As an example the default field attributes for the Anchorage Area Type are GM_TYPE Anchorage Area BORDER_COLOR RGB 255 0 255 BORDER_WIDTH 1 BORDER_STYLE Comb Right Only PILE COLOR RGB 255 0 255 FILL STYLE No Fill To change the type s transparency to 35 the FILL_ALPHA field attribute value should be set equal to 89 0 35 x 255 89 25 GM_TYPE Anchorage Area BORDER_COLOR RGB 255 0 255 BORDER_WIDTH 1 BORDER_STYLE Comb Right Only FILL COLOR RGB 255 0 255 FILL STYLE No Fill FILL ALPHA 8 9 Area Types Table of Contents 198 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper s View gt Background Color color designation influences which areas can be seen Any area whose color is the same as the Global Mapper Backgrond Color will not be seen Example for a white Background Color RGB 255 255 255 the Snow or Glacier Area will not be visible Global Mapper Built In Area Types Border
167. commands described later the Capture Screen Contents to Image command also saves any vector overlays drawn to the screen Selecting the Capture Screen Contents to Image command from the menu displays the Screen Capture Options dialog shown here screen Capture Options Screen Capture mage Format C Windows Bitmap BMP Image Size Width Pixels 265 Height Pixels 1611 Restore Default Size Iw Generate World File Iv Generate Projection PR File Generate Text Metadata File The mage Format section allows the user to select the format of the image to generate Different formats have their own unique strenghts and weaknesses which make choosing the best format vary depending on the desired end results The supported formats are e JPEG JPEG is a lossy format that achieves excellent compression on images with a lot of color variation such as pictures of real world objects and shaded elevation data e PNG Portable Network Graphic PNG is a lossless format that achieves excellent compression on images without a lot of color variation such as line vector drawings and paper map scans such as DRGs The generated PNG file will be of the 24 bit variety e Geo TIFF TIFF is a lossless format that is supported by many GIS packages Saving the screen to a TIFF with this command generated a 24 bit uncompressed TIFF In addition all georeferencing data is stored in a GeoTIFF header attached to the TIFF making the imag
168. ctory that match a specified filename mask You can do this using the Open All Files in a Directory Tree File menu command Projections and Datums The Global Mapper display space adopts the coordinate system of the first data set opened Subsequent data sets will be transformed to the coordinate system of the first data set loaded or the display projection subsequently selected from the configuration dialog This is a very powerful feature it makes differences in projections and datums transparent to the user This also means that the order in which data sets are loaded can have a significant impact on the appearance of the display This is the most obvious when working with data sets of widely varying scales Table of Contents 88 Global Mapper User s Manual 5 CHANGE DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS Selecting the Tools Configuration menu item or toolbar button displays the Configuration dialog This dialog provides for general setup of Global Mapper display options The Configuration dialog provides the following panels allowing the modification of display options e General Scale Units and Position Display Setup e Vector Display Vector Display Setup e Area Styles Area Type Color Fill Border Settings e Line Styles Line Type Color Width Style Settings e Point Styles Point Type Symbol Settings Custom Symbols e Vertical Elevation Display Setup e Shader Shader Specific Setup e Projection Select Display Projection Dat
169. custom shader The Delete button removes the currently selected custom shader Table of Contents 103 Global Mapper User s Manual Custom Shader Mame Boundary Shader OK Elevation Colors Cancel EM 8000 000000 meters E 5000 000000 meters 0 000000 meters E o annt meters 7 500 000000 meters 1000 000000 meters m 2500 000000 meters Change Color Change Elevation Delete Elevation Even Space Elevations Starting at Arbitrary Base Elevation New Elevation Meters Height 0 3 Feet Add j Initialize From Palette File Initialize From Surfer CLA File Save to Surfer CLA File iv Blend Colors Between Elevation Values Scale Shader to Loaded Elevation Values The Custom Shader dialog allows the user to specify how they want elevation data to be rendered The Name field provides a place to enter the name to associate with the shader to allow the user to select it The Elevation Colors section display the elevations and their color values associated with the custom shader Pressing the Change Color and Change Elevation buttons allow the user to change the values associated with the current elevation selected in the Elevation Colors list The Delete Elevation button allows the user to delete the currently selected elevation New elevations can be added by entering the elevation in the currently selected units and pressing the Add button The Evenly Space Elevations Starting a
170. d attributes and name of the feature in the attribute list e COORD OFFSET SIMPLE ASCII only specifies the offset to apply to any coordinates written to the file This offset will be added to each coordinate written to the file The offset should be specified as a comma delimited list of the X Y and Z offsets such as COORD_OFFSET 100000 0 200000 0 0 0 e COORD_SCALE SIMPLE ASCII only specifies the scale factors to apply to any coordinates written to the file Each coordinate will be multiplied by these scale factor before being written to the file The scale factors should be specified as a comma delimited list of the X Y and Z scale factors such as COORD SCALE O0 1 0 1 1 0 e CDF MAJOR CODE CDF only specifies the default major attribute code to use for features when exporting to a CDF format file default is 32 e CDF MINOR CODE CDF only specifies the default minor attribute code to use for features when exporting to a CDF format file default is 45 eCDF USE DEFAULT CODE CDF only specifies that the default attribute code pair should be used for all features written to the CDF file and not just those for which no attribute code pair could be automatically determined based on the feature classification e NC LAYER ATTR SHAPEFILE or KML only specifies whether or not the layer description of a feature should be added as an attribute to the DBF files exported with the Shapefile or for KML files whether or not displays
171. d for each leg of the feature Table of Contents 129 Global Mapper User s Manual A Feature Vertex List Vertes List Double Click to Center View on Vertex z Time 104 3 1313 104 9031 104 90320 104 3 13571 104 3 1388 104 30391 104 90385 104 90387 104 90380 1593 mcr 39 619260 39 619520 39 619950 39 620270 39 620350 39 619740 39 619230 39 619120 39 618700 TOW rn 07nnm Red 748 529 133 Ao os Fed 444 529 743 531 578 531 578 831 578 h32 187 Caan Ant 02701708 02701708 19 04 16 02701708 13 04 17 02701708 13 04 18 02701708 13 04 13 02701708 13 04 13 02 01 408 19 04 20 02 0108 19 04 20 02 01 08 19 04 20 EIE MES nA dnd dune d 0 34 7 GE Delete Selected vertices Edit Position Edit Elevation cancel o The PathProfile LOS command selects the 3D path profile LOS line of sight tool as the current tool This tool allows you to get a vertical profile along a user specified path using loaded elevation datasets In addition registered users can perform line of sight calculations along the defined path Path Profile LOS Tool To define the path along which to generate the 3D path profile first select the path profile tool as your current tool Press and release the left mouse button at the position where you wish to start the path Move the mouse to the next position that you
172. d vector line data to a Garmin TRK PCX5 format file This file can be imported by a wide variety of GPS software such as Garmin s MapSource amp reg to facilitate transferring track logs to a GPS unit When selected the command displays the Garmin TRK Format Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Garmin WPT PCX5 File Command The Export Garmin WPT PCX5 File command allows the user to export any loaded named point data to a Garmin WPT PCX5 format file This file can be imported by a wide variety of GPS software such as Garmin s MapSource amp reg to facilitate transferring waypoints to a GPS unit When selected the command displays the Garmin WPT Format Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export GOG Generalized Overlay Graphics Command The Export GOG Generalized Overlay Graphics command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a GOG format file When selected the command displays the GOG Export Options dialog which allo
173. d with either the Feature Info or Digitizer Tools Band Setup Tab The Band Setup tab pictured below is available for some types of imagery with 3 or more bands of data This tab allows you to control which bands of data are used for the red green and blue color bands This is a very useful tool when trying to extract different types of information out of multi spectral imagery Raster Options Display ColorContrast Adjustment Cropping Band Setup Feathering Select which band of data fram the image to use For each color channel red green and blue This allows you to analyze multi spectral imagery in many different ways To view just a single band of data set each color channel to came fram the same band Hed Color Channel Band 3 Green Color Channel Band 2 Blue Color Channel Band 1 i Cancel Apply Help Palette Tab The Palette tab pictured below is available for raster image files that use a fixed color palette for display This tab allows you to see what colors are in the palette as well as edit the color and or description of each color in the palette This allows you to easily replace one color with another You can also save the palette to a new file or load an entirely new palette to use for the layer from an existing PAL or CLR file Table of Contents 117 Global Mapper User s Manual Raster Options Color Contrast Adjustment Feathering Projection EN Pal idx 0 AGB 0 0 0 __ P
174. data c Options 9 Shapefile Data Options 9 Vector Data Options 9 Raster Data Options 9 Elevation Data Options d Show Hide Overlay s e Close Overlay s 5 LOADING FILES a Loading Multiple Files b Projections and Datums 6 CHANGE DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS a General Options b Vector Display Options c Area Styles d Line Styles e Point Styles f Vertical Options g Shader Options h Projection Options Table of Contents Global Mapper User s Manual ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual is for Global Mapper v10 02 Earlier versions of the software may not contain all the features documented here Later versions may contain additional features or behave differently To see the version of your software select Help About Global Mapper from the Menu Bar The demo version contains some but not all of the features available through a registered version of Global Mapper The Global Mapper Web Site found at http www globalmapper com maintains a list of changes and supported formats features links to sample data as well as current information about the Global Mapper software Please refer to this site to obtain the latest copy of the software Earlier versions of the software should be uninstalled Start Settings Control Panel Add Remove Programs before installing later versions System Requirements Global Mapper software is compatible with Windows 98 Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows ME Windows XP 32 and 64 bit versions and Wi
175. ddition to the image file Use GEN WORLD FILEZYES to turn on e GEN TAB FILE GEOTIFF and PNGonly specifies that a MapInfo TAB file should be generated in addition to the image file Use GEN TAB FILEZYES to turn on e GEN PRJ FILE specifies that a projection PRJ file should be generated in addition to the data file Use GEN PRJ FILEZYES to turn on e PALETTE specifies the palette to use If not specified a 24 bit RGB image will be generated OPTIMIZED ERDAS GEOTIFF and PNG only The palette generated will be an optimal mix of up to 256 colors that will closely represent the full blend of colors in the source images This option will generate the best results but can more than double the export time required if any high color images are present in the export set HALFTONE ERDAS GEOTIFF and PNG only use a 256 color halftone palette spread over the color spectrum DOQ DRG ERDAS GEOTIFF and PNG only use a 256 color palette optimized for combined grayscale DOQs and USGS DRGs DRG ERDAS GEOTIFF and PNG only use a 256 color palette optimized for the colors found in USGS DRGs Table of Contents 173 Global Mapper User s Manual GRAYSCALE use a 256 color grayscale palette BW GEOTIFF only creates a black and white 1 bit per pixel image BLACKISMIN GEOTIFF only creates an 8 bit per pixel grayscale image with no color map stored in the image Black will be stored as zero with varying shades of
176. der e QUAD NAME USGS DEM only specifies the quad name to place in the header of the USGS DEM file e FILL GAPS specifies that small gaps in between and within the data sets being exported will be filled in by interpolating the surrounding data to come up with an elevation for the point in question This option is on by default specify FILL_GAPS NO to turn off e VERT EXAG VRML only specifies the vertical exaggeration to use when creating the VRML file Larger values result in a rougher terrain being generated while smaller values result in a smoother terrain A value of 1 0 results in no vertical exaggeration at all 1 e a nearly true to life representation If you don t specify a value the currently selected vertical exaggeration value on the Vertical Options tab of the Configuation dialog will be used e COORD DELIM XYZ GRID only specifies the delimeter between coordinates COMMA coordinates are separated by commas FIXED WIDTH coordinates are stored in fixed width columns SEMICOLON coordinates are separated by semicolons SPACE coordinates are separated by space characters TAB coordinates are separated by tab characters e BYTES PER SAMPLE BIL ERDAS and GEOTIFF only specifies how many bytes to use per elevation sample in the BIL IMG or vertical GeoTIFF file Valid values are 2 bytes 16 bits and 4 bytes 32 bits If this value isn t specified 2 bytes are used e USE BIG ENDIAN BIL only specifie
177. e Sp T I BE pi es 0 0 mi 0 5 mi 1 0 mi 1 5 mi 2 0 mi 35 mi EI NO LASEL gt Local neighborhood and rural road city street unceparabed UTM HAD27 384762 17 4321503 74 39 02 12 74 H 94 19 53 Start Tracking GPS The Start Tracking GPS option causes Global Mapper to look for a GPS device attached on the configured serial port see the Setup command and to start displaying the location of the GPS device if found in the Global Mapper display window If a GPS device is found which has a valid GPS fix you will see a triangular vessel appear in the Global Mapper view at the location reported by the GPS device The vessel will point in the current direction of travel as reported by the GPS device Stop Tracking GPS The Stop Tracking GPS command tells Global Mapper to stop tracking any connected GPS devices Keep the Vessel On Screen If the Keep the Vessel On Screen option is checked the main view will automatically pan when the GPS vessel approaches the edge of the view to keep the vessel in the view Mark Waypoint Table of Contents 157 Global Mapper User s Manual Use the Mark Waypoint command to save a point feature at the current GPS location When selected this command will display a dialog allowing you to specify any additional desired attributes and or drawing styles that you would like to associate with the waypoint Any created waypoint features will be added to the user features layer wh
178. e northing or latitude come first followed by x coordinates i e easting or longitude e COORD PREFIX if present this line is used to specify what special character sequence coordinate lines start with For example if the coordinate lines in the file started with the character sequence XY you should use COORD_PREF XY By default no coordinate prefix is Table of Contents 190 Global Mapper User s Manual assumed e INC_COORD_LINE_ATTRS set the value of this parameter to YES if you wish to use any leftover text at the end of coordinate lines as attributes for the feature the coordinates are in This could be useful if elevation data is present at the end of the lines By default the value of this attribute is NO INC_ELEV_COORDS this parameter controls whether or not the value right after the 2nd coordinate column if there is one will be treated as an elevation value Use INC_ELEV_COORDS YES or INC ELEV COORDSzNO to enable the default or disable this behavior COL HEADERS controls whether or not the first line of the file should be used as column headers for coordinate line attributes later in the file Setting this to yes is useful for things like CSV files with column headers in the first row otherwise set it to NO the default PROJ NAME specifies the name of the projection to use for this file this will override any projection information stored in the file This name must have been defined with a prior DEFINE PROJ
179. e LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER_BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER BOUNDS EXPAND z 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom e QUAD NAME DLGO only specifies the quadrangle name to store in the header of the DLG O file If not quadrangle name is specified Global Mapper will attempt to automatically determine one based on the loaded data e EXPORT DXF LABELS DXF only specifies that object labels will be exported as attributes in the DXF file Typically you want to set this to YES unless you are working with a software package that cannot handle DXF files with attributes Leaving out this parameter or setting it to anything but YES will cause feature labels to be discarded on export e SHAPE TYPE SHAPEFILE only specifies the vector object type area line or point to export to the shapefile The following values are valid AREAS export area features to the Shapefile Table of Contents 177 Global Mapper User s Manual LINES export line features to the Shapefile P
180. e Slope Value il Calor Caloring Between Min and Max Slope Values Smooth Gradient Custom Color T Slope REUS CIRCE North Color West Color South Color East Color HSV Shader Low Color Start Q9 Value X Saturation Range m r Custom Shaders Custom Shader 1 l el Edit Delete z Reverse Colors of Selected Shader Daylight Shader e Surface Color Sets the calculated surface intensity color Gradient Shader e Low Color Sets the lowest elevation value color e High Color Sets lowest elevation range color Slope Shader e Minimum Slope gt Slope Value Allows the user to set the slope at or below which the Minimum Slope Color is used e Minimum Slope gt Color Specifies the color which all parts of the terrain with a slope at or below the Minimum Slope Value will be colored with e Maximum Slope gt Slope Value Allows the user to set the slope at or above which the Maximum Slope Color is used e Maximum Slope gt Color Specifies the color which all parts of the terrain with a slope at or above the Maximum Slope Value will be colored with Table of Contents 102 Global Mapper User s Manual e Smooth Gradient Specifies that all portions of the terrain with a slope between the Minimum Slope Value and the Maximum Slope Value will be colored with a smooth gradient of colors that vary w
181. e completely self describing e Windows Bitmap BMP BMP is a widely support format on Windows platforms Saving the screen to a BMP results in a 24 bit uncompressed image The width and height of the generated image in pixels are specified in the mage Size panel By default the size of the Global Mapper view pane are used Using these values will generate an image that exactly matches Table of Contents 19 Global Mapper User s Manual what you see You can change these values to generate a more or less resolute image with the obvious tradeoff of size vs quality Checking the Generate World File option results in a world file being generated in addition to the image The world file will be generated in the same directory as the image and will have the same primary name as the image The filename extension will depend on the selected image type JPEG jpgw PNG pnew TIFF tfw BMP bmpw Checking the Generate Projection PRJ File option results in a projection file being generated describing the ground reference system of the created image The projection file will be generated in the same directory as the image and will have the same primary name as the image with an extension of prj Checking the Generate Text Metadata File option results in a text file being generated listing the metadata for the captured image Pressing the OK button prompts the user to select the name and location of the image to generate and then proceeds to g
182. e ignored for line features You can also specify custom dot and square symbol colors and sizes without having to add your own custom bitmaps for those symbols Use names of the form DOT CUSTOM SIZE RED GREEN BLUE and SQUARE CUSTOM SIZE RED GREEN BLUE where the SIZE value is the radius in pixels of the dot or square and the RED GREEN and BLUE values represent the color to use For example to specify a dot symbol of radius 10 pixels with a color or green you would use a symbol name of DOT CUSTOM 10 0 255 O0 e COLOR the COLOR attribute should be formatted as RGB red green blue In the absence of a specific fill or line color it will be used e LINE COLOR LINE COLOR BORDER COLOR BORDER COLOR PEN COLOR or PEN COLOR the values associated with an attribute of any of these names will be used as the color for the pen used to draw line features The values must be formatted according to the guidelines layed out for the COLOR attribute in order to be recognized e LINE WIDTH LINE WIDTH BORDER WIDTH BORDER WIDTH PEN WIDTH or PEN WIDTH the values associated with an attribute of any of these names will be used as the width for the pen used to draw line features e LINE STYLE LINE STYLE BORDER STYLE BORDER STYLE PEN STYLE or PEN STYLE the values associated with an attribute of any of these names will be used as the style for the pen used to draw line features Valid values are Solid Dash Dot Dash Dot Da
183. e layer This is enabled by default and provides consistent results when adjusting the contrast for multiple mosaiced images Cropping Tab The Cropping tab pictured below allows you to crop the selected overlay s to a particular boundary including support for automatically removing the collars from USGS DRG topographic maps Table of Contents 115 Global Mapper User s Manual Raster Options Display Color Contrast Adjustment Cropping Palette Feathering Prajection Collar Cropping Clipping C No Cropping Clipping t Crop to Manually Specified Lat Lon Boundary Crop to Manually Specified Boundary in Native Layer Frojection Units Crop a Specified Number of Pixels Around the Edges of the Layer Left m ir p Right jo Bottom nh Crop to Curenth Selected Polygon aa j w The Automatically Crop Collar DRG BSB etc option is used to automatically remove the collar from loaded raster data if the collar is in a recognized format Most frequently it is used to removes the white border around a DRG the small black collar around a 3 75 minute DOQQ or the map collar around a BSB marine chart This allows you to seamlessly view a collection of adjacent BSB DRG or DOQQ files The Crop to Manually Specified Lat Lon Boundary option allows you to specify a lat lon boundary in the native datum of the selected overlay to crop the overlay to When selected this option will display the Customize Collar Bounds di
184. e like a Windows BMP file then print that using some other software like Microsoft Paint that works with your printer The Header field allows the user to specify text to be displayed above the printed map image This text will be printed centered above the map image on the printout The Footer field allows the user to specify text to be displayed below the printed map image This text will be printed centered below the map image on the printout The footer text will default to the text displayed on the status bar for the active tool such as the measurement information for the current measurement in the Measure Tool Selecting the Print in Black and White option causes the printout to be generated in black and white rather than full color even when printing to a color printer The generated image will be a 256 level grayscale image Selecting the Use White Background Color option causes any background areas being printed to be filled with white so as not to use any printer ink Uncheck this option is you want the currently configured background color to be maintained on the printout The Extra Margin Around Printout setting allows you to specify an extra margin to draw around the output This is useful when printing to things like a PDF file that do not have any natural margins like a printer does The Print To Scale option allows you to specify that you want the printed result to match a certain scale like 1 1000 This means that one i
185. e of each column in the file as the first row in the file There is also an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded point data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Delft3D LDB Command The Export Delft3D LDB command allows the user to export any loaded vector line data sets to a Delft3D LDB format file When selected the command displays the Delft3D Export Options dialog which consists of an Export Bounds Table of Contents 41 Global Mapper User s Manual panel that allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DeLorme Text File Command The Export DeLorme Text File command allows the user to export any loaded vector features to one of 3 text formats that can be loaded into select DeLorme mapping products When selected the command displays the DeLorme Text Polygon Export Options dialog which consists of an Export Bounds panel that allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DGN Command The Export DGN command allows the user to export any loaded vector data to a MicroStation DGN v8 format file When selected the command displays the DGN Export Options dialog
186. e or more areas or lines then right clicking and selecting the appropriate option under the Advanced Feature Creation Options menu Creating New Range Ring Features After selecting the Create Range Ring s popup menu option you can proceed to place the center location of your range rings by left clicking at the desired location If you had point features selected when you selected this option you can also choose to create the rings centered on the selected point feature s rather than manually specifying a center location You can cancel creation of the range ring s at any time by pressing the Escape key or right clicking Table of Contents 144 Global Mapper User s Manual After selecting the center of your range ring s the Select Range Ring Parameters dialog pictured below appears and allows you to setup how many range rings you would like to create and how far apart you would like to create them You can also choose to create a multi ring Checking this box will delay the actual range ring creation until you have added additional range rings and unchecked the box Then all rings in the multi ring will be combined if possible to build nice looking combined range rings Once you have completed have completed creating the range ring s the Digitizer Tool will remain in the range ring creation mode so you can simply left click to create additional range rings centered on another location or right click to choose a different mode S
187. e that are not determined to contain coordinate data will be used as attributes If you are doing a Point Only import and the Column Headers in First Row of File option is checked values in the first line from the file will be used at the names of attributes for attributes found in coordinate data lines This is useful for things like CSV files If the Treat 3rd coordinate value as elevation option is selected and a numeric value is found immediately following the x and y or lat and lon coordinate values that value will be treated as an elevation Otherwise the value will be included as an attribute if the nclude attributes from lines with coordinate data option is selected Typically you want to leave this option checked unless you are importing point data in which the 3rd column is an attribute that occasionally contains all numeric values such as well names If you have line and or area data that do not have non coordinate lines separating them but rather are delimited by a change in a particular field column of data you can use the Break Line Area Features on Change in Field option to specify which field use a 1 based index to check for breaking the data into separate line area features Pressing the Select Coordinate Offset Scale button displays a dialog that allows the user to select an offset and scale factor to apply to each coordinate The offset entered will first be added to each coordinate and then each coordinate will be multipli
188. ea B Isobath Area Iso height Area Iso height Area Lake 0 5 sq mi Lake 500 sq mi Table of Contents Intermittent Water 132 130 255 Pattern Intermittent Water 132 130 255 Pattern Intermittent Water 132 130 255 Pattern Solid Fill 192 240 188 Solid Fill 132 130 255 Solid Fill 0 0 211 Solid Fill 0 0 211 Solid Fill 0 0 211 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 128 64 0 0 0 0 240 Global Mapper User s Manual Lake 1 5 sq mi Solid Fill 0 0 211 Null 0 0 0 Lake 10 30 Solid Fill sq mi 0 0 211 Null 0 0 0 Lake 100 250 sq mi Solid Fill 0 0 211 Null 0 0 0 Lake 250 500 Solid Fill sq mi 0 0 211 Null 0 0 0 Lake 30 100 Solid Fill sq mi 0 0 211 Null 0 0 0 Lake 5 10 sq mi Solid Fill 0 0 211 Null 0 0 0 Lake Unknown Area male ene Large Metro Area Solid Fill Area Table of Contents 241 Solid Fill 0 0 211 Null 0 0 0 mm Solid Fill 220 212 148 Null 0 0 0 Null 0 0 0 255 247 181 Null 0 0 0 Global Mapper User s Manual hm T o LEE A Marne Into Area No Fill Area of NE NE NE Major National Park 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 Major State Park Map Catalog Layer Bounds Solid 0 0 0 255 255 0 Backwards A rit YY Ys ath YW Uf Ui Diagonal 255 0 255 Gy i Cross Hatch Horizontal Misc Manmade Solid Fill 255 64 64 Null Structure Table
189. ea and Line vertices Clear Current Selection Create Mew Area Feature Create Mew Line Feature Create Mew Point Feature Create New Point Feature Ot Specified Position Right Click to Display Option Menu UTM NAD27 384926 6 4321736 9 39 038995 M 84 329590 Editing Feature Attributes and Drawing Styles When a single area line or point feature is selected there is an option on the right click popup menu allowing you to edit that feature 1 e Edit Area Feature Edit Line Feature or Edit Point Feature Selecting that option displays the Modify Feature Info dialog which allows you to modify the Name Feature Type Drawing Style and Attributes for the selected feature You can also access this dialog by double clicking on a feature A sample of this dialog for an area feature is below Table of Contents 148 Global Mapper User s Manual Modify Feature Info Mame Sherwood Forest Feature Type wooded Area Create Mew Type Feature Layer User Created and Modified Features Y Feature Style f Use Default Style for Selected Feature Type Specify Style to Use When Rendering Feature Feature Attributes Attribute Name Attribute Value Add Attribute Edit Attribute Delete Attribute Add File Linkta T The Name field allows you to modify the display name of the feature If you are editing or creating a road feature you can set the name to a commonly supported ico
190. eas or no result at all so be careful to select vertices for which the connected segment does not cross outside of the area or intersect any island areas Table of Contents 151 Global Mapper User s Manual Copying Features Cut Copy Paste Occasionally you may wish to make copies of existing features or perhaps move features from one instance of Global Mapper to another You can easily do this by first selecting the features then either making a copy of those features use Edit gt Copy Selected Features to Clipboard menu command or Ctrl C shortcut or cutting those features to the clipboard use Edit gt Cut Selected Features to Clipboard menu command or Ctrl X shortcut Then simply paste those features into any running instance of Global Mapper using either the Edit gt Paste Features from Clipboard Ctrl V shortcut or Edit gt Paste Features from Clipboard Keep Copy Ctrl Shift V shortcut the latter of which keeps the features on the clipboard for additional pasting rather than wiping the clipboard clearn Snapping to Existing Features When Drawing During some operations i e drawing new area or line features or graphically placing a new point feature the cursor can automatically snap to existing features when you move it near them to facilitate lining up features This happens by default unless the ALT or V keys are depressed Pressing the ALT key causes no automatic snapping to occur while pressing the V key causes only verti
191. eature Desc amp gt for your attribute name e CASE SENSITIVE specifies whether or not text comparisons are case sensitive or not Use CASE SENSITIVEZYES to enable by default comparisons are not case sensitive For an example of how to use the ASSIGN TYPE command see the sample at the bottom of this document COMBINE TERRAIN The COMBINE TERRAIN command generates a new terrain gridded elevation layer by combining two loaded terrain layers through some operation like addition subtraction difference average min max etc The new terrain layer can then be operated on just like any other terrain layer The following parameters are used by the COMBINE TERRAIN command e LAYERI FILENAME full path and filename of the first loaded terrain layer to use You can also pass in the full description of the loaded layer to use in case you want to use a layer not loaded from a file e LAYER2 FILENAME full path and filename of the second loaded terrain layer to use You can also pass in the full description of the loaded layer to use in case you want to use a layer not loaded from a file e COMBINE OP defines the operation to perform when combining the layers The following operations are supported ADD adds the values from the first layer to the second SUBTRACT SIGNED subtracts the values of the second layer from the first and saves the signed result Table of Contents 165 Global Mapper User s Manual SUBTRACT_UNSIGNED
192. ecify elevation units to use for this file if it contains gridded elevation data FEET export in US feet DECIFEET export in 10ths of US feet METERS export in meters DECIMETERS export in 10ths of meters CENTIMETERS export in centimeters e ELEV OFFSET elevation only specifies the offset in meters to apply to each elevation value in the layer This allows you to vertically shift a layer to match other layers eELEV SCALE elevation only specifies the scale value to apply to each elevation value in the layer This allows you to vertically scale a layer to match other layers Default to 1 0 no scaling e MIN ELEV elevation only specifies the minimum elevation meters to treat as valid when rendering this layer Any elevations below this value will be treated as invalid and not be drawn or exported e MAX ELBEV elevation only specifies the maximum elevation meters to treat as valid when rendering this layer Any elevations above this value will be treated as invalid and not be drawn or exported e CLAMP ELEVS elevation only if a MIN ELEV and or MAX ELEV value is specified setting this to YES will make any valid elevation values outside of the specified range be clamped to the new range value rather than treated as invalid e VOID ELEV elevation only specifies the elevation meters to replace any void areas in the layer with If not specified the void areas will be transparent e SHADER NAME elevati
193. ection C Dont Feather this Layer Iw Top Edge v Left Edge iv Bottom Edge iv Right Edge rer px E memi J Li l amp ml rit ita i TORI C Feather Within Curently Selected Polygon s m Size of Feather Blended Area Specify how many pixels from the selected edges or polygon to feather blend the layer The layer will be opaque at the specified number of pixels from the edge and become more and more transparent as you approach the edge Border Size in Pixels 100 Crop to Selected Boundary Rather than Feathering Feather Outside Polygon Rather than Inside The screenshot below displays the results of feather blending a very high resolution data set 0 15 meters per pixel with a lower resolution 3 5 meters per pixel dataset to remove the edge Note that the higher resolution image has been purposely tinted violet to make the effect more obvious Table of Contents 119 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper UNREGISTERED fle View Took Search GPS Help 4 14 c ete IL TI Mia es 1 EAS iste Jo Ln ol t Aii a Iw uw LE P AIT Ser REM ix E ts a DM A Lan URBE NEST dges eathere dik om i b mum JE mm t RGB 66 177 134 VEGAS TESTLTIF UTM MADE 564615 755 3999831 325 35 129225 A 115 17 Color Grade Tab The Color Grade tab pictured below allows you to apply complex color correction to a loaded raster file
194. ection in which the terrain faces rather Table of Contents 100 Global Mapper User s Manual than the absolute elevation This shader allows you to easily identify things like the portions of the terrain that face south or any other direction The colors to use for each direction are user configurable on the Shader Options panel e If any custom shaders have been created they will be available as well Use the Enable Hill Shading option to view elevation data as shaded relief With this option off the map appears flat with elevations distinguished by color only With it on shadows are generated using the loaded elevation data along with the remaining settings on this panel The Elevation Display Units option allows you to modify the units that elevations will be displayed in on the status bar as you move the cursor over loaded elevation data The Lighting Direction options set the position of the light source the sun for performing hill shading Note that cartographic azimuth and altitude are used This means that 0 azimuth means the sun is to the north 90 azimuth means the sun is to the east and so on An altitude of 90 means that the sun is directly overhead while an altitude of 0 means the sun is on the horizon Use the Ambient Lighting to brighten up dark looking data sets or dim bright looking data sets The Vertical Exaggeration setting is used to control the exaggeration of relief features The Hill Shading Shadow Dark
195. ed by the scale factor When generic ASCII text files are imported Global Mapper will scan the attributes associated with each feature and look for any attribute names that are known to it The following is an abbreviated list of attribute names that are currently recognized by Global Mapper when generic ASCII text files are read see the links below the list for more complete lists e NAME or LABEL the value associated with an attribute of either of these names will be used as the feature name e DESC DESCRIPTION LAYER or TYPE the value associated with an attribute of any of these names will be used as the feature description Table of Contents 10 Global Mapper User s Manual e GM TYPE the value associated with an attribute with this name or any of the description names listed above will be used to attempt to assign a classification other than the default for each feature The value must match one of the classification names in Global Mapper to work It will also work for user created custom types e ELEVATION HEIGHT or DEPTH the value associated with an attribute of any of these names will be used as the feature s elevation e SYMBOL POINT SYMBOL or POINT SYMBOL the values associated with an attribute of any of these names will be compared against the names of the symbols available in Global Mapper including any custom symbols If a match is found that symbol will be used for the point feature These attribute names ar
196. ee much of the DOQ underneath Pressing the Set Transparent Color button allows the user to select the color to treat as transparent in the selected overlay The Anti Alias Pixels Interpolate option removes jagged edges by making a subtle transition between pixels Turning off this option helps maintain the hard edges of the pixels as they are rasterized Table of Contents 122 Global Mapper User s Manual The Shader option allows you to choose which elevation shader is to be used for coloring the cell values within this layer By default all gridded layers will share the elevation shader selected on the toolbar but there may be certain situations where you want to color one layer differently than the others and exclude it from the loaded elevation range One common example is a gridded layer that actually has non elevation data The Alter Elevation Values tab pictured below allows you to modify how elevation values from the selected layer s are interpreted providing you a means to offset all of the elevations in the layer s by a given value and to restrict the range of elevation values that are treated as valid Elevation Options Display Alter Elevation Values Elevation Offset and Scale Factor Scale Factor 1 Offset 0 Meters Elevation values will be altered first by multiplying by the scale factor then by adding the offset value For example if you specity a scale of 1 0 and an offset of 10 meters an elevat
197. elect Range Ring Parameters Enter the number of range ring areas to create as well as how far apart each range ring should be fou can also modify the range ring center ES coordinate if you d like i Create Point at Center of Range Rings Number of Range Rings Range Ring Radius 1 Kilometers Modify Range Center Point Coordinates Combining Multiple Rings Advanced LU sers Combine Ring with Additional Rings to Follow Use this Feature to specify multiple range rings that you want combined inta a single ring feature around the combined ranges Uncheck this box when specifying the ring parameters For the last ring in the multi ring to complete the process The range ring feature has numerous applications including search and rescue and aviation Creating New Shape e g Circle Rectangle etc Features Under the Create Area Shapes and Create Line Shapes right click popup menus you will find options to create Arc Circular Elliptical Rectangular and Square area and line features For all of these shape types except the rectangular square option where you manually enter the coordinates you click and hold the left mouse button at the center of the feature then drag it until it is of the desired shape For Circular Elliptical features and Arcs the default shape follows a circle and holding down the SHIFT key will dragging will result in an ellipse For Rectangular Square features the default shape is a recta
198. elevation grid data sets to a 3D DXF Point file The DXF file will consist of a 3D DXF point for each point in the elevation grid defined by the Table of Contents 24 Global Mapper User s Manual spacing and extents that the user specifies This option may be useful when used with other software packages that do not specify the DXF mesh format When selected the command displays the 3D DXF Point Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export ECW Command The Export ECW command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to an ECW file ECW files are highly compressed and great for storing things like satellite imagery There is no size restriction on exported ECW files so you can store many terabytes worth of imagery within a single highly compressed ECW file When selected the command displays the ECW Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing and target compression ration a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user
199. els off on a type by type basis The Display Roads As Fat Lines When Zoomed In option allows users to turn on off the fattening of road lines when zoom in tight on them Global Mapper s Line Types are listed in the Global Mapper Line Types table Drawing Styles are listed in the Global Mapper Drawing Styles table Global Mapper recognizes four field attributes as containing information for the display appearence of a Line Type They are GM TYPE Airport Runway LINE WIDTH 1 LINE_COLOR RGB 0 0 0 LINES PY LE So Lid The LINE_STYLE field attribute can be set to any one of the 60 Drawing Styles shown in the Global Mapper Drawing Styles table Line Types Upper line shows line types normal appearance Lower line shows how line type appears when Display Roads As Fat Lines When Zoomed In option is checked and display is zoomed in Global Mapper s View gt Background Color color designation influences which lines can be seen Any line whose color is the same as the Global Mapper Backgrond Color will not be seen Example for a white Background Color RGB 255 255 255 the Processing Closure Line will not be visible Global Mapper Built In Line Types Drawing Line DOR Style Width ne Color Alley or Driveway 128 128 128 Table of Contents 254 Global Mapper User s Manual Bathymetric Contour Solid Intermediate Bathymetric Contour Major Solid Bathymetric Contour Minor Solid Bathymetric Co
200. en Geology Foliation Open Small Red Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Aqua Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Black Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Green Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Red Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Aqua Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Black EPBPPRPEEELIC BODO ERG Table of Contents 273 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Green we Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Red a Geology Joint Closed Medium Aqua Geology Joint Closed Medium Black Geology Joint Closed Medium Green Geology Joint Closed Medium Red Geology Joint Closed Small Aqua Geology Joint Closed Small Black Geology Joint Closed Small Green Geology Joint Closed Small Red Geology Joint Open Medium Aqua Table of Contents 2 4 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Joint Open Medium Black Geology Joint Open Medium Green Geology Joint Open Medium Red Geology Joint Open Small Aqua Geology Joint Open Small Black Geology Joint Open Small Green Geology Joint Open Small Red Geology Vertical Bedding Medium Aqua Geology Vertical Bedding Medium Black Geology Vertical Bedding Medium Green Geology Vertical Bedding Medium Red HpPPBPELEELPPIM sieppbppiiHr Table of Contents 275 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology
201. enerate the image Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able capture the screen to an image file Export Global Mapper Package File Command The Export Global Mapper Package File command allows the user to export any or all of the loaded data to a Global Mapper package file These files are similar to workspace files except that the actual data 1s stored in the files Package files provide an easy way to pass around lots of data between Global Mapper users on different computers with a single self contained file When selected the command displays the Global Mapper Package Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the package export The dialog consists of a Package Options panel a Simplification panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel Table of Contents 20 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper Package Export Options fx Package Options Simplification Gridding Export Bounds Projection Use the options below to control what projection the data exported to the package file will be in You can choose to export the data in the current view projection save everything with lat lon values or keep the original projection of each layer C Use Currently Selected View Projection UTM Keep Original Native Projection for Each Layer Tense eA Expat Options Use the options below to control which layer of any loaded TemaServer L SA data will be used when exporting The auta opt
202. ent global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y eL AT LON BOUNDS specifies the combine bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude e AYER BOUNDS specifies that the operation should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to export to the bounds of the file c test tif you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded e LAYER BOUNDS EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER BOUNDS EXPAND z 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom e FILL GAPS specifies that small gaps in between and within the data sets being combined will be filled in by interpolating the surrounding
203. eoreferencing The Image Rectification feature in Global Mapper allows you to load and work with any JPG PNG or TIFF imagery regardless of whether or not spatial positioning information is provided with it For example you could scan in an image of a map to a JPG file use the File gt Rectify Imagery menu command to enter the coordinates of several points on that image and then load it into Global Mapper properly overlaid with any other loaded data Click Here for a Video Tutorial provided by www globalmapperforum com Once you have rectified an image in Global Mapper you can then export it to any of the supported export formats to obtain a fully rectified image that can then be immediately loaded into numerous other imaging and GIS packages If you find that after rectifying a file that you want to modify the rectification you can simply select the layer in the Overlay Control Center then right click and select the Modify Layer Position Projection option to bring up the rectification dialog for that layer As Needed Rectification There are two ways to rectify imagery in Global Mapper The first is to simply load the imagery file needing to be rectified just like any other file Global Mapper will automatically prompt you to rectify an image if it cannot automatically determine where on the earth the image should be placed If you indicate that you would like to rectify an image when prompted the Image Rectifier dialog will appear al
204. er on Location Allows user to recenter the view on a location e Properties Displays Dialog with Properties of Current Map View e Full View Zooms such that all loaded data is visible e Zoom In Zooms in on loaded data by a factor of 2 e Zoom In Micro Zooms in on loaded data by a small amount e Zoom Out Zooms out on loaded data by a factor of 2 e Zoom Out Micro Zooms out on loaded data by a small amount e Zoom To Scale Zooms the current view to a given scale e oom To Spacing Pixel Size Zooms the current view to a given pixel size e Save Current View Saves the current view for later restoration e Restore Last Saved View Restores the last saved view e Restore Last Drawn View Restores the last drawn view e Name and Save Current View Names and saves the current view e Restore Named View Restores a previously saved named view Toolbars Use this command to display and hide the Toolbars which includes buttons for some of the most common commands in Global Mapper A check mark appears next to the menu item when the Toolbar is displayed Table of Contents 68 Global Mapper User s Manual Tools Search Help Toolbars d File Toolbar Ov Status Bar v View Toolbar v Tools Toolbar Hedge LEE di Full View F Showe toabas E a Hide All Toolbars NE z Status Bar Height 305 0 meters BLUE SPRINGS 4 QUADS DEM BLUE SPRINGS MO 1 271400 UTM NAD27 382769 777 4307807 107 38 54 4
205. er s to add as an available data source on the Select Online Data Source to Download dialog The URL that you should specify is the GetCapabilities URL such as http wms jpl nasa gov wms cgi for the JPL WMS data server a great source of data like Blue Marble imagery Once you ve entered the URL press the Get List of Available Data Layers button to query the server and populate the data control with the available data layers on that server Then simply select the data layer and style that you want and press OK to have it added to the available data source list Once a source is added you can use the Remove Source button to remove it from the list of available data sources at a later time If you need to specify additional options for the WMS server such as forcing a particular image format to be used add those parameters after the Service Name parameter For example to force the use of the JPG format you might specify a Service Name parameter of WMS amp format image jpeg Select WMS Data Source to Load Server UAL Get Capabilities Address http wms ipLnasa gov wms cal Service Name Mast use MS WMS Get List of Available Data Layers i OnE ath Web Map Server WMS Global Mosaic pan sharpened WMS Global Mosaic not pan sharpened CONUS mosaic of 1990 MALE dataset STYLE Pseudo color image Uses IA and Visual bands 542 mapping lt STYLE Reabcolor image Uses the visual bands 327 mapping STYLE Visual
206. er than all shape points The Render Deleted Features option specifies whether or not features that have been deleted by the user should be displayed The Draw Feature Labels option specifies turns labeling of features on or off globally For more fine grained control over which types are labeled check the Area Styles Line Styles or Point Styles tab The A ways Display All Labels option specifies whether or not feature labels should be allowed to overlap when drawing them on the screen When this option is not checked this is the default labels that collide with other labels on the screen will be discarded until you zoom far enough in on the feature so that they can be displayed without overlapping any other labels The Render Line Direction Arrow option specifies whether or not a small arrow should be drawn on each line feature indicating in which direction the line vertices go The arrow will point along the line towards the last vertex in the line The Hide Extra Label Text Displayed Under Road Icons option allows you to control whether or not any extra text displayed below road icons like alternate names for the road are displayed The Only Highlight Border of Selected Area Features option allows you to change the rendering style for area features selected with the Feature Info or Digitizer Tools so that only the border of the area 1s highlighted and the center is left unfilled The Mark Sides of Road with Addressing Information opti
207. ers are supported by the command e FILENAME filename of the layer to assign types to If an empty value is passed in all layers that were created by the script such as those from a GENERATE CONTOURS command will be updated You can also pass in the value USER CREATED FEATURES when running a script in the context of the main map view or loading a workspace to have the User Created Features layer updated e AREA TYPE specifies the name of the Global Mapper area type to assign to matching area features e LINE TYPE specifies the name of the Global Mapper line type to assign to matching line features e POINT TYPE specifies the name of the Global Mapper point type to assign to matching point features e COMPARE STR specifies a comparison operation to perform to see if a feature is one that needs to be reclassified The format is attr name attr value For example if you have an attribute named CFCC and you want to match when the value of that attribute starts with an A you can use COMPARE_STR CFCC A as your parameter You can add multiple COMPARE STR parameters to a single command to combine multiple criteria for your search If you would like to compare against a feature label rather than an attribute use amp ltFeature Name amp gt for your attribute name To compare against a feature type name rather than an attribute use amp ltFeature Type amp gt for your attribute name To compare against the feature description use amp ltF
208. ery Civr Mobil Al 36619 251 661 0909 7 McPeak Dwight 5548 Heath Row Dr Birmingham AL 35242 205 991 8862 8 McPeak Faye 146 Larkin St New Market AL 35761 256 379 5416 9 McPeak Faye 395 Dupree Dr Huntsville AL 35806 256 837 2657 When batch geo coding you can choose to either geocode US addresses against an online database or to geocode to loaded road data instead If you choose to geocode against loaded road data you must already have road data loaded with a known address format like Tiger Line data in the US or data with supported attribute names for addressing information like R FROM ADR L TO ADR R FROM CITY L TO CITY etc so that the data can be geocoded Once you complete a batch geocode operation the results are displayed in a list in a dialog see sample below The Batch Geocode Results dialog contains buttons allowing you to create new point features from the matched address results or to export the results to a new file Batch Geocode Results Sequence Mame Address City State ZIF Phone Latitude Longil McPeak Betty Noth Pole AR 99705 907 488 4679 BF 4b 31 44 N14 F221 McPeak P Anchorage AK 99501 907 770 2957 61 12 56 32 N 143523 McPeak Hager Noth Pole AK 99705 907 4658 0823 BF 4E 31 44 N 147 22 1 McPeak Allan 1011 Mclay Ave Mobile AL 36609 251 633 0931 30 40 U0812 M S8 1T T McPeak Bill 395 Dupree Dr Huntsville AL 35606 256 637 2697 34 47 45 15 N SB 43 A McPeak Carol 5923 Lumsden Battery Cir Mobile
209. export to an ESRI Shapefile format file SIMPLE ASCII export to a simple ASCII text file SURFER BLN export to a Surfer BLN format file SVG export to a Scalable Vector Graphic SVG format file TSUNAMI OVR export to a Tsunami OVR format file WASP MAP export to a WAsP map format file line features only ZMAP XYSEGID export to a ZMap XYSegId format file area and line features only e GLOBAL BOUNDS specifies the export bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum y e GLOBAL BOUNDS SIZE specifies the export bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y eL AT LON BOUNDS specifies the export bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude e AYER BOUNDS specifies that the export should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to export to the bounds of the file c test tif you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded
210. fel BIN EIN EIN EIN nn Little Blue X Lodging Marina Mine seme Ee E NB omm Do meme Lese s memes Do pone e pom el o am al e E Dome ETTENEN E totes gt Table of Contents 228 Global Mapper User s Manual No Symbol Park Picnic Area Post Office Resturant Restroom Rock Scenic View School Shopping Skiing Spot Elevation Stadium Stream Origin Summit Swimming Area eaea opmaat Tower Waterfall Weigh Station m EIL Table of Contents 229 Global Mapper User s Manual v IIS gooopoggg Symbols Geology Global Mapper Built In Symbols Symbol 2X Sym Details Geology Arrow Medium Aqua Geology Arrow Medium Black Geology Arrow Medium Green Geology Arrow Medium Red Table of Contents 230 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Arrow Small Aqua Geology Arrow Small Black HELEEBELELEEL qe ptltititi i Geology Arrow Small Green Geology Arrow Small Red Geology Cleavage Medium Aqua Geology Cleavage Medium Black Geology Cleavage Medium Green Geology Cleavage Medium Red Geology Cleavage Small Aqua Geology Cleavage Small Black Geology Cleavage Small Green Table of Contents 231 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Cleavage Small Red Geology Dip Bedding Medium Aqua Geology Dip Bedding
211. fied in you need to change the curent projection by going ta Config Projection Click Here to Calculate Spacing in Other Units The Combine Terrain Layers Options panel displayed above allows the user to select the name to assign to the newly generated layer select the layers to combine to make the new layer select the operation to perform when combining the new layer and select the vertical units and sample spacing of the new layer The available operations are described below e Addition values from each layer are added to each other e Subtraction Difference Signed value in new layer is assigned to the difference between the value in the first layer and the value in the second layer e Subtraction Difference Unsigned value in new layer is assigned to the magnitude absolute value of the difference between the value in the first layer and the value in the second layer e Average Elevation value in new layer is assigned to the average of the value in the first layer and the value in the second layer e Minimum Elevation value in new layer is assigned to the smaller of the value in the first layer and the value in the second layer e Maximum Elevation value in new layer is assigned to the larger of the value in the first layer and the value in the second layer e Filter Keep First Value if Second Valid value in the new layer is assigned to the value in the first layer only if the value in the second layer is vaild
212. field s 1f any to display as the name of features loaded from the vector file You can also select which attribute field if any to use for the elevation value for the layer By default several attribute field names like ELEVATION ELEV ALTITUDE Z etc are checked when an elevation value for the feature is needed This option allows you to override this behavior and manually select the attribute to use Finally there are also options available to select the classification to apply to unclassified area line and or point features in the layer Table of Contents 112 Global Mapper User s Manual The Projection tab is used to reinterpret the raw vector data to a new projection This is useful if the wrong projection was selected for the dataset when it was loaded or if the data set itself indicated some incorrect data This option is rarely used You can however also use the Elevation Units control to specify what elevation units that values in the vector data that do not explicitly specify their units should use This is useful to indicate if the values associated with 3D vector features or with the ELEVATION attribute for features are in feet or meters For many vector formats you will also see a Feature Types tab pictured below which will allow you to select what Global Mapper classification to assign to the unclassified area line and point features in the layer Raster Data Options Selecting the Options button while
213. fies the export bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude e AYER BOUNDS specifies that the export should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to export to the bounds of the file c test tif you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded e AYER BOUNDS EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER BOUNDS EXPAND z 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom FORMAT SURFERGRID only determines if Surfer Grid export format is ASCII BINARY V6 or BINARY V7 The default is ASCII if no format is specified GEN WORLD FILE GEOTIFF only specifies that a TIFF world file TFW should be generated in addition to the TIFF file Use GEN WORLD FILEZYES to turn on GEN TAB FILE GEOTIFF only specifies
214. file XYZ_GRID export to a XYZ Grid file e ELEV UNITS specify elevation units to use in export FEET export in US feet DECIFEET export in 10ths of US feet METERS export in meters DECIMETERS export in 10ths of meters CENTIMETERS export in centimeters e SPATIAL RES specifies spatial resolution Defaults to the minimum spatial resolution of all loaded data if not specified Should be formatted as x resolution y resolution The units are the units of the current global projection For example if UTM was the current global projection and you wanted to export at 30 meter spacing the parameter value pair would look like SPATIAL RES 30 0 30 0 e FORCE SQUARE PIXELS if this value is set to YES the spatial resolution of the resultant elevation file will be set so that the x and y pixel size are the same with the minimum default size being used for both Table of Contents 169 Global Mapper User s Manual e GLOBAL BOUNDS specifies the export bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum y e GLOBAL BOUNDS SIZE specifies the export bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y eL AT LON BOUNDS speci
215. g consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Surfer Grid Binary v6 Format Command The Export Surfer Grid Binary v6 Format command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a binary format Surfer Grid file compatible with Surfer v6 and above Binary format Surfer Grids will be smaller than their ASCII format cousins so if you can use the binary format I would suggest it When selected the command displays the Surfer Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Surfer Grid Binary v7 Format Command The Export Surfer Grid Binary v7 Format command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a binary format Surfer Grid file compatible with Surfer v7 and above Binary format Surfer Grids will Table of Contents 36 Global Mapper User s Manual be smaller than their AS
216. g currently loaded data you can right click on the View Shed layer in the Overlay Control Center and select the option to modify the view shed xc igi Pro Global Mannen REGISTERED wie NR t E sie E Gh dian CE i team E RAD Em A h E CNN Feature Information M arme View Shed Analys E Description VIEW SHED TRANSMITTER LOCATION Attribute Ie Malue RADIUS 3 0 mi TRANSMITTER HEIGHT 100 0 m above ground HELEIVER HEIGHT 5 l m above ground PERCENT VISIBLE pi Height 257 613 meters RGBCZO6 120 000 view Shed Analysis 13 UTM MAD27 381862 3 4321407 5 38 035618 N 94 364930 Table of Contents 138 Global Mapper User s Manual Coordinate Convertor Command Selecting the Coordinate Convertor menu item displays the Coordinate Convertor dialog picture below This dialog allows you to easily convert a coordinate in one projection datum unit system to another When a conversion is made the results are automatically copied to the clipboard for easy pasting in another location using Ctrl V There are also buttons to allow you to easily recenter the map on the coordinates or to create a new point feature at the coordinates Coordinate Convertor Input Coordinate m Output Coordinate wE asting Longitude 400000 XE asting Longitude E 9 18 7466 Ww Northing Latitude 432000
217. gray up to white with a value of 255 WHITEISMIN GEOTIFF only creates an 8 bit per pixel grayscale image with no color map stored in the image White will be stored as zero with varying shades of gray up to black with a value of 255 JPG GEOTIFF only creates a 24 bit RGB JPG in TIFF image Note that while this creates a highly compressed GeoTIFF file many software packages do not recognize JPG in TIFF format files Custom palette filename you can also pass in the full path to a pal file containing a custom palette to use for the export e GRID TYPE CELL SIZE specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with each tile having the given size in the export projection The value should be specified as cell width cell height For example if you are exporting in a metric projection and want to tile the export into cells that are 10 000 meters wide by 5 000 meters tall you would use GRID TYPE CELL SIZE 10000 0 5000 0 GRID TYPE PIXEL SIZE specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with each tile having the given size in pixels samples The value should be specified as cell pixel width cell pixel height For example if you want to tile the export into cells that are 800 pixels wide by 600 meters tall you would use GRID TYPE PIXEL SIZE 800 600 GRID TYPE ROWS COLS specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with a given number of rows and columns of tiles The value should
218. gs for which types of vector features areas lines or points are to be displayed when loaded You can use these settings to turn off an entire class of features all at once For a finer degree of control see the Filter section described below The Select From section contains the settings which determine which vector object types 1 e areas lines points the Pick Tool will consider when selecting objects The Filter section allows you to select which specific area line and point feature types you wish to display By default all feature types are displayed The Vector Map Detail setting controls how much decluttering of displayed vector data is done This is useful when you have a large of amount of vector data loaded For example if you had all of the roads for an entire state loaded at once you could slide the detail slider to the left to make minor roads been hidden until you zoomed in sufficiently far on the data The rightmost default setting causes all vector data to be displayed Table of Contents 92 Global Mapper User s Manual regardless of zoom scale This setting does not affect the display of raster or elevation data sets The Vector Layer Ordering During Draw settings control the order in which data from vector layers is displayed The default setting order by type before layer order is that all vector data is drawn after any other loaded raster or elevation data regardless of how the vector layers are ordered in t
219. h and or height values the grid cells will be snapped to the right and or bottom edge s of the export bounds rather than the top left e Specify Individual Grid Cell Pixel Size Allows the user to specify the desired width and height in pixels that they wish each grid cell tile to be Every tile will have that width and height in pixels which means that the right most column and bottom most row of tiles could go beyond the specified export bounds This option is not available for vector based exports since it does not make sense for Table of Contents 78 Global Mapper User s Manual those export types e Use Selected Area Feature s for Grid Cells This option will export a file for each area feature selected with the Feature Info or Digitizer Tools When you select this feature you will be prompted to select how to name the files based on each area You can choose from using the display label of the area the filename of the file that the area was loaded from an attribute value of the area or just a simple sequential numbering scheme You will also be prompted to choose whether each export should actually be cropped to the polygonal boundary of the area or should just use the rectangular bounds of the area s boundary Note that when you select a filename to save to after this the filename portion of the selected name will be pre pended to whatever is used as the grid cell name So if you want just your selected item i e attribute name et
220. he GPS device If the Create Transparent Map option is selected the map will be marked as transparent and any data under the map will show through When Global Mapper exports loaded vector data to a MP file it will automatically attempt to determine the best type to save in the MP file based on the classification of the feature in Global Mapper If no type mapping is known the name of the assigned Global Mapper classification will be used for the Type value in the MP file If you updated your RgnTypes txt file in your cGPSMapper folder with the type names and the appropriate type number you can make this work as well You can also manually specify the type number to use for a feature by adding an attribute named MP TYPE with the type value to use as the attribute value If the value that you provide is for a marine type you should also provide an attribute with a name of MARINE and a value of Y You can also override the default type mapping for built in types by adding a default attribute list for the type on the Styles tab of the Configuration dialog Just add a MP TYPE attribute to the default attribute list for a type to manually specify what type to use in exported MP files for a given Global Mapper type Global Mapper will automatically convert exported data to the appropriate projection and datum for export so that the Polish MP file will be correctly positioned By default this will be lat lon degrees with the WGS84 datum although if you use
221. he Overlay Control Center All area features from all layers will be drawn first followed by all line features from all layers and finally all point features from all layers Within each grouping e g areas lines or points the drawing order will be determined first by type and then by layer ordering The second draw order option order first by layer then by type within a layer specifies that the order of the vector layers in the Overlay Control Center should take precedence over all else when drawing This means that if a vector layer is before a raster layer in the Overlay Control Center s draw order that vector layer will draw underneath that raster layer if they overlap The Render Area and Line Vertices option specifies whether each vertex along area and line features should be displayed with a large dot The Always Render Vertices for Selected Features option specifies whether each vertex along area and line features selected with the Digitizer Edit Tool should be displayed with a large dot Use this option rather than the Render Area and Line Vertices option above to only display vertices for features that you are actively editing in order to prevent excessive clutter on the map The Render Dots at Line Endpoints option specifies whether or not the start and end vertices of line features will be displayed with a large dot You can use this instead of the Render Area and Line Vertices option if you just want to see line endpoints rath
222. hed The sample spacing controls the interval at which elevation samples are examined to determine visibility Smaller values result in more accurate but more slowly generated view sheds The Fresnel Zone Specification section allows you to have the view shed analysis also check that a certain portion the Percent Clear value of the first Fresnel zone for a transmission of a particular frequency is clear The typical standard is that good visibility requires that at least 6096 the default of the first Fresnel zone for the specified frequency be clear of obstructions The Obstructions from Vector Data section allows the user to specify whether or not loaded vector data with elevation values should be considered when performing the view shed analysis This allows the user to use things like buildings fence lines towers etc to block portions of the view creating a more realistic view shed If the user elects to use vector data they can also specify whether the elevation values stored with vector features are relative to the ground or relative to mean sea level Typically heights for vector features are specified relative to the ground If any area features are included and their heights are relative to the ground the obstruction heights within those areas will be increased by the specified amount but any receiver heights will still be based on the terrain This makes things like wooded areas very easy to model If checked the Generate Area Featu
223. hed red line in the path profile window Path Profile _ine of Sight File Right click below to change vertical display units or manually specify start end positions From Pos 376077 8 4322 14 4 To Pos 382594 3 4318723 Minimum Clearance 59 6 ft at 376402 7 4322515 4 05m Om tom 2 0m 2 65mi 3 0m 3 5m 4 0m 4 7 mi Help LE Pressing the Cut and Fill Volumes button brings up the Setup Volume Calculation Parameters dialog allowing the user to perform a cut and fill volume analysis along the path using loaded terrain data See the Measure Tool for more information on cut and fill volume setup Once you have performed a cut and fill analsyis the cut line will be displayed on the path profile allowing easy visualization of the cut and fill areas along the path as evidenced by the picture below Table of Contents 134 View Shed Tool Global Mapper User s Manual Volumetric Calculations Cut Volume 974 73702 cubic yards Fill volume 86 505643 cubic yards The measurements have also been copied to the clipboard For your convenience 250 ft 375 ft 500 ft 625 ft The View Shed command selects the view shed analysis tool as the current tool This tool allows registered users to perform a view shed analysis using loaded elevation grid data with a user specified transmitter location height and radius All areas within the selected radius that have a clear line of sight to the transmitter are colored with a user
224. hift Selected Layer s a Fixed Distance This option provides a quick way to shift any layer some fixed distance in any direction When selected a dialog is presented allowing you to specify the distance to shift the selected layers in the X and Y direction or some distance along a particular bearing e Create Workspace File from Selected Layer s This option allows you to generate a workspace just containing the selected layer s and their display options This workspace can later be loaded with the File gt Load Workspace menu command e Zoom to Selected Layer s This causes the view to be zoomed such that the full extents of the selected overlays are visible e Zoom to Full Detail For Layer This causes the view to be zoomed such that a single sample pixel in the selected overlay will take up approximately one pixel on the screen e Create Area Features From Selected Layer Bounds This causes new rectangular area features with the name of the overlay as the display label to be created for each selected layer in the User Created Features Layer This is useful for creating an image index as the filename of the layer will also be saved as an attribute of the area feature created from it Table of Contents 108 Global Mapper User s Manual e Allow Feature Selection from Selected Layer s This option controls whether or not vector features from this layer can be selected using either the Feature Info or Digitizer Tools e Close All Hidden
225. his section of the dialog contains a list of all of the entered GCPs including their name pixel coordinates ground coordinates and the estimated error in pixels at each GCP based on the current rectification method Double clicking an item in this list will cause the Zoomed View to recenter on the GCP and will fill in the Ground Control Point Entry section with the pixel and ground coordinates of the selected GCP allowing for easy updating of GCP locations You can move the selection in the GCP list up and down using the Alt Q and Alt Z hot keys These can help facilitate quickly entering lots of GCPs without having to use the mouse If you simply want to shift an image all that you need to do is press the Shift All button and specify the adjustment to apply to each entered GCP Table of Contents 86 Global Mapper User s Manual Completing the Rectification Process Once you have entered all of your ground control points GCPs press the OK button to complete the image rectification Depending on how you entered the dialog the rectified image will now be in the view will be saved to a new rectified file or you will start the rectification of the next selected image If you are repositioning a loaded file you can press the Apply button to re rectify the file with the updated GCPs and see the results of your modifications Table of Contents 87 Global Mapper User s Manual 4 LOADING FILES Choose Open as New icon from the
226. ich appears in the Overlay Control Center The waypoint features can be exported to any of the supported vector export formats Vessel Color The Vessel Color command allows you to control what color the GPS vessel is displayed in Vessel Size The Vessel Size submenu options allow you to control how large you would like the GPS vessel to be on screen Vessel Shape The Vessel Shape submenu options allow you to control the shape of the GPS vessel on screen Setup The Setup command displays the GPS Setup dialog pictured below The GPS Setup dialog allows you to tell Global Mapper what port your GPS device is connected to your computer on and what format the GPS device is communicating in Make sure that you have your GPS device set to NMEA 0183 v2 x or Garmin mode There is also an Auto Detect option which will cause Global Mapper to try and automatically determine your GPS device s settings when you start tracking the device You can also specify that you would like to read GPS information from a text file containing NMEA 0183 sentences GPS Setup Format Connection f Serial Port Connection Port COMI Baud Rate 4500 Garmin USB Device t Read From File NMEA Format Only Elevation Offset 0 meters Enter the value to add to all elevation values before reporting them This is useful to adjust for vertical datum shifts Information Table of Contents 158 Global Mapper User s Manual
227. id tile size use GRID_OVERLAP 5 0 The default value is 0 0 meaning that the tiles do not overlap GRID KEEP CELL SIZE specifies that the size of the grid cells should be maintained over sample spacing This means that if you specify a grid of 4 rows and 5 columns each grid cell will be exactly 25 of the total export height and 20 of the total export width The sample spacing may be slightly smaller than what is specified in order to achieve this By default the sample spacing is exactly maintained and each grid cell may be slightly larger than specified to maintain an integer number of exported cells Use GRID KEEP CELL SIZEZYES to enable GRID NAMING specifies how to name tiles when gridding an export into multiple tiles The value should be SEQUENTIAL for sequential numeric naming starting at 1 SEPARATE for separate prefix appending by row and column or SEPARATE COLS FIRST for separate prefix appending by Table of Contents 170 Global Mapper User s Manual columns and rows For the SEPARATE options use the GRID NAMING COLS and GRID NAMING ROWS parameters to specify the details of how to name the rows and columns If no GRID NAMING parameter is supplied the last selected grid naming options selected in the user interface will be used e GRID NAMING COLS specifies how to name the column portion of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE or GRID NAMINGZSEPARATE COLS FIRST parameter The value of this field i
228. idth Airport Runway pst oan Alley or Driveway PM Arterial Road PM Bathymetric Contour PM Intermediate Bathymetric Contour Major X55 130 oS l 1 2 2 Bathymetric Contour Minor 1 1 Bathymetric Contour Solid 132 130 255 Supplementary Table of Contents 215 Global Mapper User s Manual City Boundary Solid 0 0 0 Collector Road Solid 255 128 0 Solid 128 64 0 Contour Line Intermediate Contour Line Major Solid 128 64 0 Contour Line Minor Solid 128 64 0 Contour Line Supplementary BOO 128 64 0 County Route Solid 255 0 255 Deleted Line Dash Striped 192 192 192 Digitizer Tool Line 255 255 0 Dry Stream or River Dot 0 0 211 Ferry Route Solid Table of Contents 255 128 0 128 128 128 16 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid Grid Line Major 128 128 128 Grid Line Minor Solid 128 128 128 Intermittent Stream or River Dash 0 0 211 International Political Boundary nee Interstate Solid 132 130 255 Invisible Boundary Dot 192 192 192 Major Political Boundary State Solid 128 128 128 Major US Highway Solid 255 64 64 Marine Route Solid Measurement Striped 255 255 0 Minor Political Boundary Solid County Park Boundary Solid 0 255 0 Table of Contents 17 Global Mapper User s Manual Dash 128 128 128 Processing Closure Line Dash Dot 128 128 128 Solid 255 255 255 Railroad 0 0 0 Railroad Class 1A Rai
229. ight Click on Overlay Names for Mare Options lt 0 3909443 bluespringsMO TIF gt USGS Geol lFF DAG 1 24000 Quad blue springs 4 quads denm gt BLUE SPRINGS MO zblue springs opt BLUE SPRINGS MO MULTIPLE CATEGORIES User Created Features s p Metadata Options Hide Overlay Close Overlay Currently Opened Overlays This is a list of the all currently opened overlays You can select an overlay by clicking on its name Multiple overlays can be selected using the shift and control keys while clicking on overlays in the list If the overlay is currently hidden it is indicated to the left of the overlay description Double clicking on a layer automatically brings up its Options dialog If you hold down the M key while double clicking the Metadata dialog for the layer will be displayed instead You can right click on the list of currently opened overlays to display a list of options available to perform on the selected overlays Examples of available options include the following e Create Elevation Grid from 3D Vector Data This allows you to create an elevation grid from part or all of any vector features in the selected overlays that contain elevation data e Modify Image Position This allows you to reposition imagery and vector data that was not correctly positioned when loaded including imagery that was manually rectified See the option below if you just want to shift an entire layer by some distance e S
230. ile window The start and end coordinates of the path are displayed at the top of the profile window If more than two points are in the path the intermediate points will be marked in the profile window with a yellow dot These intermediate points can be toggled on and off using an option available by right clicking on the path profile window Also note that this dialog is resizable Right clicking on the profile window brings up an options menu allowing the user to change the start and end positions select the units meters or feet to display the elevations in configure display of the path profile and display a dialog containing details about the path These options are also available under the Options menu on the dialog The File menu contains options allowing you to save the path profile line of sight data to a file The individual options are described below The Save To Bitmap option allows registered users to save the contents of the path profile window to a Windows bitmap BMP file for use in other applications Table of Contents 131 Global Mapper User s Manual The Save to BMP and Display on Main Map View option allows registered users to save the contents of the path profile window to a Window bitmap BMP file and then display that BMP at a fixed location on the main map view This is the equivalent of using the Save to Bitmap menu command then closing the dialog and using the File gt Open Data File at Fixed Screen Location
231. ill be used rather than the automatic DRG style collar setting e Skip Existing Output Files this option causes any conversion operations for which the default output filename already exists to be skipped This is useful when resuming batch conversion operations that failed or were cancelled e Use Big Endian For Elevations causes stored elevations to use the big endian Motorola byte order rather than the default little endian Intel byte order e Use Lossless Compression this option causes the lossless compression method to be used when generating Global Mapper Grid files If it is not checked some minor loss of data in areas of high terrain relief will be allowed in order to achieve a higher compression ratio e Use Other Source Files As Filler causes all selected source files to be loaded and made available during export to fill holes in the main file being converted This is useful when you have a collection of files that are being reprojected and you do not want to have a sliver around the edge of each new file filled with the background color when the source data does not make a perfect rectangle You can even mark some files to only be used as filler by right clicking on them in the Files list and selecting the appropriate option in the popup menu You can also right click on the list of files to convert and choose to save that list of files to a text file This can be a convenient way to start a Global Mapper script to do other proce
232. in This Script EXPORT ELEVATION Export Elevation Data to a File EXPORT METADATA Export Metadata for a Layer to a File EXPORT RASTER Export Raster and Elevation Data to a File EXPORT VECTOR Export Vector Data to a File GENERATE CONTOURS Generate Contours from Elevation Data GENERATE ELEV GRID Generates an Elevation Grid from Loaded 3D Vector Data GENERATE PATH PROFILE Generate a 3D Path Profile and Save it to a XYZ File GLOBAL MAPPER SCRIPT Script Header Line IMPORT Import Data From a File IMPORT ARCHIVE Import Data From an Archive File zip tar gz etc IMPORT ASCII Import Generic ASCII Data from a File IMPORT DIR TREE Import All Data Files in a Directory Tree IMPORT TERRASERVER Import TerraServer Imagery or Topo Maps LOAD PROJECTION Loads a New Global Projection From a PRJ File RESTORE LAST SAVED VIEW Restores Last Saved View SAVE CURRENT VIEW Saves Current View SAVE PROJECTION Saves the Current Global Projection to a PRJ File SEI BG COLOR Sets the Background Color SET LOG FILE Sets the Name of the Log File SET VERT DISP OPTS Sets the Vertical Display Options SHOW 3D VIEW Displays the 3D View Window UNLOAD ALL Unloads All Currently Loaded Data UNLOAD LAYER Unloads a Single Layer e Samples Crop Merge and Reproject 4 USGS DRGs into new GeoTIFF and JPEG files Generate Contours from all USGS DEMs in a Folder and Export them to DXF and Shape files
233. ing controls whether or not you will be prompted to enter a name for each ground control point GCP entered Disabling this allows you to specify a name for each GCP but can interrupt workflow Unless you have a specific need to name your GCPs we would recommend turning this option on e Display GCP Labels this setting controls whether or not the names of each ground control point GCP will be displayed in the Zoomed and Reference Image views e Remember Last Projection this setting controls whether or not to initialize the projection to the last used rectification projection when rectifying new data If this is not enabled the projection will always default to Geographic Arc Degrees WGS84 e Add Control Points at Corner Points this option allows you to easily create a control point at each corner of the layer being rectified If enough other control points have already been entered to do a rectification the new corner control points will automatically be initialized with the best guess at the ground projected location otherwise they will be initialized with dummy values e Display Transformation Equations this option displays the actual transformation equations used for transforming this image based on the selected rectification method and the entered control points Table of Contents 84 Global Mapper User s Manual Note that this is only available if enough control points have been entered for a transformation to be calculated and
234. ing shades of gray up to white with a value of 255 Grayscale Min is White Palette This palette creates an 8 bit per pixel grayscale image with no color map stored in the image White will be stored as zero with varying shades of gray up to black with a value of 255 The Vertical Units field allows the user to select the vertical units to use when exporting elevation data i e meters or feet Any input data not in the selected vertical units will be automatically converted on export The Resolution section allows the user to selected the grid spacing to use when generating the GeoTIFF The default value is the average of the grid spacings of all the currently loaded raster and elevation overlays If the Always Generate Square Pixels option is checked the smaller of the specified x and y resolutions will be used Table of Contents 28 Global Mapper User s Manual for both the x and y resolution Forcing square pixels ensures that the resultant GeoTIFF file will look good even in software that is not able to deal with pixels that aren t square If you d like to specify the spacing in units other than those of the currently selected view export projection press the Click Here to Calculate Spacing in Other Units button The DPI Value to Save in Image option allows you to specify a DPI dots per inch value to save in the TIFF header Some software in particular graphics editing software makes use of this value when sizing TIFF files for p
235. ion sample of 150 meters from the file would become 160 meters Valid Elevation Range Minimum Walid Elevation 2 4 Meters Maximum Valid Elevation 330 Meters Replace Invalid With ete r Clamp Out of Bound Values to Valid Range Elevation Units Interpretation METERS This option allows you to reinterpret the raw elevation values stored in the overlay data This option should only be used when the vertical units selected when the overlay was loaded or indicated by the overlay data file were incorrect Use the Elevation Display Units selection on the Vertical Options panel of the Configuration dialog if you just want to change the units that elevation values are displayed in Cancel Help Show Hide Overlay s Toggles whether the currently selected overlays are visible You can also use the checkboxes next to each layer to control the visible state of the overlays Close Overlay s Closes all the currently selected overlays Table of Contents 123 Global Mapper User s Manual 3D View Menu Command The 3D View command in Global Mapper allows registered users to view gridded elevation data and any overlying raster or vector data in a true perspective 3D manner When selected the 3D View command displays a window containing a 3D view of the data in the current Global Mapper view Any imagery or vector data being drawn on top of the elevation grid s in the main Global Mapper view will automatic
236. ion for the area The perimeter and enclosed area of the area feature will be added as default attributes The units for these measurements can be modified on the General tab of the Configuration dialog See Editing Feature Attributes and Drawing Styles for more details Once you have completed have completed creating the area the Digitizer Tool will remain in the area creation mode so you can simply start left clicking to draw another area or right click to choose a different mode You can also create new area features from selected line features by selecting a collection of lines then right clicking and selecting the Advanced Feature Creation Options Create New Area Feature s from Selected Line Feature s menu command This will attempt to connect the selected line features to build area features All line features will be connected as far as possible then closed to create a new area feature Creating New Line Features Table of Contents 141 Global Mapper User s Manual After selecting the Create New Line Feature popup menu option you can proceed to draw a new line feature with the mouse To draw the feature simple left click at each place that you d like to drop a vertex To finish the line feature right click at the desired location of the last vertex You can cancel creation of the new line at any time by pressing the Escape key Note that while drawing the line you can use the Snapping feature to help align the line with exis
237. ion will always pick a detail layer as qood or better than what is displayed on screen without creating toa large of an export file f Automatically Choose a Good Zoom Level C Use Best Available Zoom Level Creates Larger Files C Use the Zoom Level Displayed on the Screen Use double precision coordinates for vector data This may make packages much larger and is usually only need when surveydevel accuracy is required Discard feature attribute values to save space and speed up package load times Always Maintain Feature Styles Even if Using Defaults The Package Options panel consists of options allowing the user to select the projection to save the data in how to handle dynamically streamed TerraServer data and other options These include the Always Maintain Feature Styles option which specifies that any vector features stored in the package file should explicitly save the styling of that feature even if they are using the default style for the feature classification This can make it easier to maintain exact styling when transferring packages between Global Mapper installations In the Projection section of the panel the user can choose to save all loaded data in the currently selected view projection this is the projection selected on the Projection tab of the Configuration dialog in latitude longitude coordinates the Geographic projection with the WGS84 datum or to keep each layer in its original native projectio
238. is true north most projected systems like UTM are not unless you are right at the projection center a line of bearing 0 won t be straight up but will be slightly skewed so that it points at the North Pole A line of bearing 0 will be straight up in projections like Geographic or Mercator where true north is always straight up Table of Contents 143 Global Mapper User s Manual If you check the DMS degree minute second Values Specified in Decimal Degrees option you can enter your DM degree minute or DMS degree minute second values as decimal degrees For example with this option checked a value of 40 3020 1s interpreted as 40 degrees 30 minutes and 20 seconds The basic format of degree fields when this option is checked is DD MMSS Example COGO Input N 25sl4rfl2 W340 o Xrlbors6 Rh 23 0 The first character of a COGO input string must be either the character N or S to indicate whether the bearing is relative to the north or south directions After another space the angle begins The angle can be in any angle specification that Global Mapper supports including degrees degrees minutes or degrees minutes seconds A space follows the angle and is then followed by either the E or W characters A space separates the bearing from the distance which should be in appropriate linear units For those unfamiliar with the notation for bearings Picture yourself in the center of a circle The first hemispere notation tells you
239. ish MP format is the input format used by the cGPSMapper application which creates custom maps for Garmin GPS units When selected the command displays the Polish MP Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a Map Options panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Table of Contents 51 Global Mapper User s Manual Polish MP Export Options Map Options Gridding Export Bounds Map Name Blue Springs Copyright No Copyright Map Detail Less n More Generating a map with more detail results in a larger map that can represent smaller variations in the data Less detailed maps will have less resolution but will be smaller and show up earlier when zooming in Use the rightmost setting for routable maps E Template File Use Template MP File for Map Settings rn test PADRAQANGRALOCK MP elect File This option allows you to use an existing MP file to specify the map creation options to use This allows full control over all available MP map options Create as Marine Map i Make All Point Features Searchable Create Transparent Map The Map Name and Copyright fields allow to specify the name to use for the final map when created as well as the copyright text to associate with the map The Map Detail section allows you to control at what zoom levels
240. ith the slope from the Minimum Slope Color to the Maximum Slope Color e Custom Color Specifies that all portions of the terrain with a slope between the Minimum Slope Value and the Maximum Slope Value will be colored with a single color that can be modified with the Select button Slope Direction Shader e East Color Allows the user to set the color to use for slopes facing directly East e North Color Allows the user to set the color to use for slopes facing directly North e South Color Allows the user to set the color to use for slopes facing directly South e West Color Allows the user to set the color to use for slopes facing directly West HSV Shader e Low Color Start Advanced Sets where in the HSV color range the lowest elevation will be e Value Advanced Modifies the HSV value parameter e Saturation Advanced Modifies the HSV saturation parameter e Range Modifies how much of the full HSV range is to be used Increasing this value leads to color wraparound Custom Shaders The Custom Shaders section allows the user to manage any custom shaders that they may have Custom shaders allow the user to control exactly how elevation data is rendered so that the desired result can be obtained Pressing the New button displays the Custom Shader dialog pictured below which allows the user to create a new custom shader Pressing the Edit button display the same dialog allowing the user to edit the currently selected
241. ith the matching location information as well as button to allow creating a new point feature at the address location re centering the map view on the address and copying the address information to the Windows clipboard for easy pasting into another application Address Search Result for 1600 Pennsylvania Ave Washington DC Ed ADDRESS 1600 PEHNSTLVAMNIA AVE Nw WASHING TOM 20502 0001 US PRECISION address POS 38 B3 Bb 32 N 77 02 14 00 f Create Point From Address Center Map on Address Copy Address Data to Clipboard The dialog also includes a Geocode Addresses from File button that allows you to geocode a bunch of addresses at once The text file that you select to convert can either contain a list of files with addresses in the single line form accepted when searching on a single address or it can be a comma or tab delimited file with named columns like Address City State and Zip see the example file contents below Note that you are limited to about 5 000 address searches within a single 24 hour period Sequence Name Address City State ZIP Phone 1 McPeak Betty North Pole AK 99705 907 488 4879 2 McPeak P Anchorage AK 99501 907 770 2957 3 McPeak Roger North Pole AK 99705 907 488 8823 4 McPeak Allan 1011 McCay Ave Mobile AL 36609 251 633 0931 Table of Contents 73 Global Mapper User s Manual b McPeak Bill 395 Dupree Dr H ntsvrllle ADL 35906 250 9327 20657 6 McPeak Carol 5923 Lumsden Batt
242. jection All Loaded Data All currently loaded data that is compatible with the current export type will be exported This is the default selection All Data Visible On Screen All data that is currently visible in the Global Mapper view window will be exported Lat Lon Degrees Allows the user to specify the subset to export as a bounding box in latitude longitude coordinates The default values automatically filled in are the lat lon bounds of all currently loaded compatible data Global Projection Allows the user to specify the subset to export as a bounding box using coordinates in the currently selected global projection system The default values automatically filled in are the bounds of all loaded compatible Table of Contents 76 Global Mapper User s Manual data Corner w Size Global Projection Allows the user to specify the subset to export by entering the northwest corner of the bounding box to export followed by the width and height of the desired area to export The coordinates entered must be in the currently selected global projection system The default values automatically filled in result in a bounding box containing all loaded compatible data MGRS Military Grid Reference System Bounds Allows the user to specify the subset to export by entering the northwest and southeast corners of the bounding box to export in MGRS coordinates The default values automatically filled in result in a bounding box containing a
243. ke transparent when rendering this overlay The color should be specified as RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt For example to make white the transparent color use TRANSPARENT COLOR RGB 255 255 255 If you do not wish any color to be transparent do not use this parameter Optionally if the image that you are making transparent uses a palette for the colors you can specify a palette index in the following format INDEX lt 0O based palette index For example to make the second color in the palette transparent use TRANSPARENT _COLOR INDEX 1 PROJ NAME specifies the name of the projection to use for this file this will override any projection information stored in the file This name must have been defined with a prior DEFINE PROJ command PROJ FILENAME specifies the name of the projection prj file to use for this file this will override any projection information stored in the file PROJ EPSG CODE specifies the numeric EPSG projection code that defines the projection for this file this will override any projection information stored in the file For example use PROJ_EPSG_CODE 26715 to define a UTM zone 15 projection with NAD27 as the datum and meters as the units Table of Contents 187 Global Mapper User s Manual e PROMPT IF PROJ UNKNOWN set to NO if you don t want the user to be prompted to select a projection if the projection of the file cannot be automatically determined e ELEV UNITS elevation only sp
244. labels should be exported for line and area features Use INC LAYER ATTRZzYES to enable or INC LAYER ATTR FALSE to disable This is enabled by default for Shapefile and disabled by KML Table of Contents 179 Global Mapper User s Manual e POLYGON_CROP_FILE specifies the full path and filename of a vector file containing a polygon feature to which the export should be cropped If multiple polygons are found in the specified file the polygon which has the largest intersection with the data to be exported will be used as the crop polygon Note that line and area features will only be cropped to the bounds of the specified polygon Point features from some formats will actually be cropped to the specified polygon boundary e POLYGON_CROP_NAME specifies the name of a polygon shape previously defined using the DEFINE SHAPE command to which the export should be cropped The coordinates in the shape need to have been provided in whatever projection the export is being done in e POLYGON CROP USE ALL specifies that if a POLYGON CROP FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the export will be cropped to all polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon e MAP NAME POLISH MP only specifies the map name for the MP file e TEMPLATE FILENAME POLISH MP only specifies the full path and filename for another MP file to use for the settings for the new MP file being exported e MP EXPORT TEMPLATE FILES POLISH MP only if
245. lay allowing you to enter distance bearing information for additional points either as separate distance bearing values as a COGO Coordinate Geometry coordinates see below for explanation or as a quadrant bearing distance value Once you have entered all of your points press Done to complete the process and create the new line feature You can also check the option to Close Path Using Compass Rule when Completing Feature If this option is checked all of the points will be adjusted using the compass rule to ensure that the shape is closed The compass rule evenly distributes the shift required to close the shape to all vertices and is commonly used by surveyors Table of Contents 142 Global Mapper User s Manual Distance Bearing COGO Input Distance Bearing Input Add Paint Specify Separate Distance and Bearing Values Done Distance 500 meters Cancel Bearing 180 U is north SL is east etc t Specify Using COGO Coordinate Geometry cogo N45wson meters xl Specify your COGO information by starting with a M ar 5 then pour angle then a or E then your distance For example M 231412 w 340 t Specify Using uadrant Bearing Distance One Handed Entry Quadrant Bearing Distance te Enter quadrant press Enter then Bearing Enter and Distance Enter OMS degree minute second Values Specified in Decimal Degrees Close Path using Compass Rule when Completing Feature List of Entered
246. leted If you right click on the results list additonal options will appear such as the option to select all of the results in the list If multiple line features are selected in the results list when you right click there will be an option to combine those line features into new line features if the selected lines connect at their endpoints Options for copying the selected features to the clipboard and selecting the selected search results with the Digitizer Tool for further editing will also appear if any results are selected Table of Contents 72 Global Mapper User s Manual ADVANCED USERS You can change the default search string from to whatever you want by creating a new registry string value with the desired default search string at HKEY CURRENT USERNSoftwareWGlobal Mapper DefaultVectorSearchStr Find Address The Find Address command displays the Search for an Address in the US dialog pictured below which allows searching for an address city or zip code in the United States search for an Address in the US Requires Internet Access Enter address to search for 1600 Fennsylvania Ave Washington OC Cancel Enter address in one of the following formats Hel elp street city state zip street city state street zip city state zip city state zip Geocode Addresses from File If an address is found that matches the requested location a results dialog see sample below is displayed w
247. list going west south east north For example CLIP COLLAR BOUNDS 234 25 109 0 34 375 108 875 CLIP COLLAR POLY raster only specifies the name of the previously defined shape with the DEFINE SHAPE command to crop the layer to when the CLIP COLLAR POLY parameter is used The coordinates in the shape must have been defined in the native projection system of the layer being loaded COLOR INTENSITY elevation and raster only specifies the color intensity to use when adjusting the brightness of pixels in the overlay Valid values range from 0 to 20 with 0 being completely black 10 being no alteration and 20 being completely white For example to make an image slightly darker you could use COLOR_INTENSITY 7 NOTE This parameter has been deprecated in favor of the COLOR INTENSITY FULL parameter COLOR INTENSITY FULL elevation and raster only specifies the color intensity to use when adjusting the brightness of pixels in the overlay Valid values range from 0 to 512 with O being completely white 256 being no alteration and 512 being completely black For example to make an image slightly darker you could use COLOR_INTENSITY 300 NOTE This parameter replaces the COLOR INTENSITY parameter TEXTURE MAP raster only specifies that this image should be draped over any elevation data loaded before it Use TEXTURE MAPZzYES to turn on Anything else turns it off TRANSPARENT COLOR elevation and raster only specifies the color to ma
248. lity depending on the palette that you choose The image data will be compressed using the PackBits compression algorithm e 24 bit RGB This option generates a raster GeoTIFF file with 24 bits per pixel GeoTIFF images generated with this option will be at least 3 times the size of those generated with the 8 bit Palette option but the colors in the image will exactly match what you see on the screen e JPEG in TIFF This option generates a raster GeoTIFF file with 24 bits per pixel but with the raster data compressed using the JPG compression algorithm GeoTIFF images generated with this option will maintain good color fidelity and often be highly compressed although they will lose some information as compared to the uncompressed 24 bit RGB option Something else to keep in mind if selecting this option is that many software packages do not yet support GeoTIFF files that use the JPEG in TIFF compression option By default the JPG compression used in the GeoTIFF file uses a Table of Contents 27 Global Mapper User s Manual quality setting of 75 but you can modify this by creating anew DWORD registry key with the desired value at HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Global Mapper VJpegInTiffQuality e Black and White This option generates a two color GeoTIFF file with 1 bit per pixel This will generate by far the smallest image but if you source image had more than two colors the resulting image will be very poor By default white will be a value of
249. ll loaded compatible data Crop to Selected Area Feature If enabled allows the user to crop the export to the currently selected area feature s To use this for supported exports select the area s that you wish to crop the export to using either the Feature Info Tool or the Digitizer Tool Drag a Box to Select Export Bounds Ea nes Pressing the Draw Box button brings up the Drag a Box to Select Export Bounds dialog In this dialog simply hold down the left mouse button and drag a rectangle around the area of the image that you wish to export If you make a mistake just drag another rectangle Draw Box When you press the OK button the bounds of the rectangle that you drew will automatically be inserted into the appropriate controls in the Export Bounds panel Table of Contents 77 Global Mapper User s Manual Gridding Panel GeoTIFF Options Gridding Export Bounds No Grid Just One Export File Per Input File Specify Number of Rows and Columns Rows qa Columns 2 o Crop Right and Bottom Cells to Export Bounds f Specify Individual Grid Cell Width and Height Grid Width meters t Specify Individual Grid Cell Pixel Size Pixel Width 2400 Piel Height 2500 t Use Selected Area Feature s for Grid Cells Grid Naming Sequential Numbering Row Major Order f Separate Row Column Letters or Numbers Rows Numbers Letters Reverse Statat ja Pref With Step fi Columns
250. ll pattern For transparent or translucent patterns use a transparent PNG format image file when creating the custom fill pattern With the Transparency slider users can make solid filled areas partially see through translucent in order to see data underneath the area In addition the Show Labels for Areas of This Type When Present option allows users to turn area labels off on a type by type basis The New Type button allows the user to create a new area feature type and specify how it should be displayed The Edit Type button allows the user to edit area types that were previously created with the New Type button and the Delete Type button allows the user to remove area types that were previously created with the New Table of Contents 94 Global Mapper User s Manual Type button With the Attributes button you can specify a set of default attributes and values to use for new features of this type created using the Digitizer Tool If you right click on the list of types a menu will appear allowing you to save and restore your style settings using a style file This provides an easy way to setup a set of styles to use then restore them at a later date for use with a particular set of data Configuration Point Styles Vertical Options Shader Options Projection General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles Area Type Right Click tor More Options ITIN Face Area Tundra Unclassified Area Feature Unknown Area
251. llows you to select which rectification method hence the name to apply to the entered control points Different methods are available based on how many control points have been entered The various methods are as follows Automatic the Automatic select automatically selects the best rectification method that is available based on the number of control points that have been entered This is the default method and should rarely need to be changed Linear the Linear rectification method is used when only two control points are entered This is the simplest of the rectification methods and is equivalent to supplying a world file for the image This method does not allow for any distortion or rotation in the image but often works well if the correct projection is selected for the image Affine the Affine rectification method requires at least three controls points to be entered This rectification method calculates a best fit to a simple equation of the control points entered This method can account for some degree of rotation and distortion but not with a high degree of accuracy Because a best fit approximation is used some of your ground points may move a little in order to minimize the error among all control points Polynomial the Polynomial rectification method requires at least four control points to be entered This rectification method calculates a best fit to a more complex polynomial equation described the transformation fro
252. lowing you to enter ground control points for the image in order to rectify it This process is described in detail later Batch Rectification By using the Rectify Georeference Imagery command under the File menu you can select multiple images to rectify at a time You will be allowed to rectify all images that you select regardless of whether they already contain valid positioning information In this way you can correct poorly positioned imagery Using the Batch Image Rectification Options dialog pictured below you can setup whether you would like to view the images after rectification export them to one of several formats or both Table of Contents 81 Global Mapper User s Manual Batch Image Rectification Options Specify below what ta do with each image after you have rectified it Exported images will be saved in the save directory as the original with rectified appended to their filenames M Show Rectified Images in Reference View Iw Export Rectified Images to New Files r Export Format t JPEG GeoTlFF 24 bit RGB Image Uncompressed ceca Regardless of which options you select you will then be allowed to rectify each image in turn using the Image Rectifier dialog while is described in detail later As you rectify each image it will get added to the Reference Images view in the Image Rectifier dialog allowing you to select ground coordinates from it for subsequent images This allows you to ensure a go
253. lps maintain the hard edges of the pixels as they are rasterized Use ANTI ALIASZYES to turn on Anything else turns it off e CONTRAST MODE raster only specifies the type of contrast adjustment to apply to the data NONE no contrast adjustment applied this is the default PERCENTAGE apply a percentage contrast adjustment The CONTRAST STRETCH SIZE parameter can be used to override the number of standard deviations from the mean to stretch to MIN MAX apply a min max contrast stretch stretching the available range of values in each color band to the full range of 0 255 For imagery which contains both black and white this will have no affect e CONTRAST SHARED raster only specified whether or not the contrast adjustment for this layer will share the adjustment with other contrast adjusted layers in order to ensure a consistent modification across layers Use CONTRAST SHAREDZYES to enable contrast sharing e CONTRAST STRETCH SIZE raster only specifies the number of standard deviations from the mean to use in a PERCENTAGE contrast adjustment The default is 2 0 e AUTO CONTRAST raster only DEPRECATED use CONTRAST MODE instead specifies whether to automatically calculate and apply a 2 standard deviation contrast adjustment to the image Use AUTO CONTRASTZYES to turn on Anything else turns it off e CLIP COLLAR raster only specifies whether to clip the collar off of the image The following values are supported
254. lroad 0 0 0 Railroad Class 1B Railroad 0 0 0 Ramp Solid 0 255 255 Residential Road Solid 128 128 128 River lt 20 km Solid 0 0 211 River gt 250 km Solid 0 0 211 River 100 250 km Solid 0 0 211 River 20 50 km Solid 0 0 211 Table of Contents 18 Global Mapper User s Manual River 50 100 km Solid 0 0 211 Solid Trail Solid 0 0 211 River Unknown Length 2550 0 0 0 0 0 255 0 255 0 0 211 0 0 0 128 128 128 Solid Unclassified Line Feature 128 128 128 Solid 0 0 0 Unknown Line Type Unpaved Road Solid 128 128 128 Drawing Styles Global Mapper Drawing Styles Drawing Style Table of Contents 219 Global Mapper User s Manual ee a S ENENE ss ss m 0 o st EETTITUUTENER ETIAM Table of Contents 220 H Global Mapper User s Manual a ee e a TrerrererERTT ssi genta E Table of Contents 221 F r C 0 i Global Mapper User s Manual Solid with Empty Circles along Line Solid with Arrow Pointing to Start Table of Contents 222 Global Mapper User s Manual BUILT IN POINT TYPES AND SYMBOLS This section reviews the area line and point styles built into Global Mapper e Point Styles Point Type Features Symbols Basic Symbols Geology Point Styles Using the Point Styles panel users can configure what symbol will be used to display points of a give
255. lso very useful for editing existing vector features This tool provides the ability to move delete and reshape vector features as well as modify the label classification drawing style and attribution of any vector feature loading from any file format supported by Global Mapper Note than any edits made are NOT automatically saved back to the origin file but they will be saved in Global Mapper workspaces and into any exported vector files Selecting Features Table of Contents 146 Global Mapper User s Manual Before you can edit an existing feature or features you first must select them Once a feature is selected you can tell that it is selected because it will be drawn with a different style The different methods for actually selecting features are described below One way to select features 1s by simply by clicking the left mouse button near the feature or in the case of area features within the feature Using this method the closest point or line feature will be selected or if no point or line features are nearby and you clicked within an area feature the area feature will be selected To select multiple features at a time you can drag a selection box by holding down the left mouse button to draw a box Any features entirely within the box drawn or features which are cut by the box will be selected If you hold down the T key while dragging the box only features and vertices that are completely within the box will be selec
256. lt Shared Shader Cancel Help The Color Intensity setting controls whether displayed pixels are lightened or darkened before being displayed It may be useful to lighten or darken raster overlays in order to see overlaying vector data clearly The Translucency setting controls to what degree you can see through the overlay to overlays underneat the overlay The default setting of Opaque means that you cannot see through the overlay at all Settings closer to Transparent make the overlay increasingly more see through allowing you to blend overlapping data The Blend Mode setting controls how an overlay is blended with underlying overlays in addition to the Translucency setting These settings allow Photoshop style filters to be applied to overlays resulting in often stunning results What you get from a particular set of overlays from a particular blend mode setting can often be hard to predict so rather than try to understand what is technically happening for each blend mode it s best to just experiment with different ones until you find one that you like The Hard Light setting seems to work well with satellite imagery overlaid on DEMs but the others can be quite useful as well The Transparent option allows a particular color to be displayed transparently making it possible to see through a layer to the layers underneath For example when viewing a DRG on top of a DOQ making the white in the DRG transparent makes it possible to s
257. lumn row names Use GRID NAMING PREPEND ZEROESzNO to disable the prepending of zeroes e GRID NAMING SEPARATOR specifies the separator string to use between pieces of a grid name The default 1s an underscore e GRID CREATE FOLDERS specifies that a separate folder should be generated for each row or column if GRID NAMING SEPARATE COLS FIRST is specified of the export rather than placing every output file in the same folder e QUALITY JPEG only specifies the quality setting to use when generating the image Valid values range from 1 to 100 with 1 generating the lowest quality image and 100 generating the highest quality image If no QUALITY setting is present a default value of 75 is used which generates a very high quality image that is still highly compressed e TARGET COMPRESSION ECW and JPEG2000 only specifies the target compression ratio to use when creating the ECW image The default value is 10 which strikes a good balance between image quality and compression The higher the value the smaller the resulting image will be at the expense of image quality e INC_VECTOR_DATA specifies whether or not loaded vector data should be rendered and exported to the generated image Use a value of YES to indicate that vector data should be used Any other value will result in vector data NOT being saved to the file e FILL_GAPS specifies that small gaps in between and within the data sets being exported will be filled in by interpolating
258. m pixel space to ground coordinate space Because a best fit approximation is used some of your ground points may move a little in order to minimize the error among all control points Triangulation the Triangulation rectification method requires at least five control points to be entered This rectification method performs a Delaunay triangulation for the control points and will exactly preserve the location of each entered control point Occasionally the Triangulation method generates some odd results around the edges of the rectified image If this happens try to enter more control points around the edge of the image or change your rectification method to Polynomial e Resampling Method the Resampling Method submenu allows you to select how the source image pixels will be resampled to create the rectified imagery These setting simply control whether or not the Anti Alias Pixels setting is turned on or off for rectified images This can be changed later in the Overlay Control Center Nearest Neighbor simply pick the closest pixel from the source image for each pixel in the rectified image This can result in some blockiness This is equivalent to having the Anti Alias Pixels setting OFF Bilinear Interpolation performs a weighted average of the four closest pixels in the source image to determine the color for a pixel in the rectified image This is equivalent to having the Anti Alias Pixels setting ON e Auto Name GCPs this sett
259. maller files than the default compression but there may be some software packages that do not yet support LZW encoded GeoTIFF files Specify USE_LZW YES to enable LZW compression e SAVE SCALE AND LEGEND specifies that the distance scale and elevation legend if applicable and enabled for display on the Configuration dialog should be exported to the generated raster file Table of Contents 175 Global Mapper User s Manual Specify SAVE_SCALE_AND_LEGEND YES to enable this option e BG TRANSPARENT RGB GEOTIFF and PNG only specifies that any areas of no data background should be marked as transparent e OVERWRITE EXISTING specifies that existing files should be overwritten The default is OVERWRITE EXISTINGZYES so use OVERWRITE_EXISTING NO to skip exporting files that already exist e DPI GEOTIFF and JPG only specifies the DPI dots per inch value to save in the generated file s For example use DPI 300 to specify that the DPI for this file is 300 By default no DPI value will be written out e KML MIN LOD PIXELS KML only specifies how large layer has to be in pixels before it will show up in Google Earth e KML_RASTER_FORMAT KML only specified which raster image format to use when creating tiles for KML KMZ files The valid options are JPG PNG and TIFF For example add KML_RASTER FORMAT JPG to use JPG format files e KML_SUPER_OVERLAY KML only specifies that the data should be automatically gridded into super
260. menu command in the main map view The Save CSV File with XYZ and Distance Values option allows registered users to save all of the coordinates and distances to that location along the path profile to a CSV text file Each line in the text file will be formatted as follow x coordinate y coordinate elevation distance from start The Save Distance Elevation option allows registered users to save all of the distances and elevations along the path profile to a text file Each line in the text file will be formatted as follow distance from start elevation The Save To XYZ option allows registered users to save all of the positions and elevations along the path profile to a text file Each line in the text file will be formatted as follow x coordinate y coordinate elevation The Save LOS to KML option allows registered users to save a 3D line of sight and if selected the Fresnel zone boundary lines to a KML file for display in Google Earth Pressing the Line of Sight button brings up the Setup Line of Sight Earth Curvature dialog pictured below which allows the user to configure a line of sight calculation along the selected path You can only perform a line of sight analysis if exactly two points are in the path profile e g line of sight analysis cannot be performed on multi segment paths Table of Contents 132 Global Mapper User s Manual Setup Line of Sight Earth Curvature From Sight Elevation l na
261. n In the TerraServer Export Options section of the panel the user can select how displayed layers from the Download TerraServer menu option are exported The Automatic selection for imagery themes 1 e DOQs Urban Area imagery will save data slightly more detailed than what is displayed on the screen For the DRG topographic map theme the most detailed zoom range for the current scale of DRG map being displayed i e 24K 100K 250K will be determined and data from that scale will be saved The other alternatives either save the most detailed scale available creating potentially very large files or the scale the most closely Table of Contents 21 Global Mapper User s Manual matches the current display scale on the screen The Simplification panel allows the user to set up the threshold at which points that don t contribute much to the shape of the vector line and area features being exported are removed in order to generate features with less vertices By default all vertices will be kept but the user can move the slider to the right to get rid of relatively insignificant vertices and realize significant space spacings at the cost of some fidelity The Gridding panel allows the user to split up the data into regularly spaced tiles on export if desired rather than just exporting a single file The Export Bounds panel allows the user to select what portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global
262. n Create New Map Catalog Command The Create New Map Catalog command allows you to create a map catalog A map catalog is a collection of map files which are grouped together to allow for easy loading viewing and export Layers in a map catalog will be loaded and unloaded as needed for display and export potentially greatly reducing the load tme and memory requirements for working with very large collections of data Upon selecting this command and selecting the file to save the map catalog to the Modify Map Catalog dialog shown below will be displayed allowing you to add files to the catalog and control at what zoom level data layers are loaded for display Table of Contents 16 Global Mapper User s Manual Modify Map Catalog Catalog Description ned continental us When to Display Maps DE Map List Right Click Far Map Metadata Display Map Box is X of Display Size Description Filename i 0 zz of Display NEWT OB NA SOWT Oe gig CD ara MED SMevember2 04 yy estern S SN 2891 Lt ASOW TOS NSM 10e gig CD ara MEDSMevember2 04 yy esteml SA SOW Uf H30w114 NeW 106 gig C DataSNEDSNovembez004yesteml SA SOW 1 i meters per pixel AAW TO NSO gig C SD ara MED SMevember2 04 vw estem IS SN SA Dt Naw Tig ASA TO gig CAD atas MED SMHoevemberz d sw estermLl S Wzw1 1 t Below a Given Map Scale H32w 120 M34114 gmg C SD ara ED SMevember2 04 yy estemL SN 321 I M33w123 H3 5 120 gmg SD atas ED SM evemberzd sw estern S SW 2 1 to
263. n be very useful for doing things such as rectifying a satellite photo by clicking on the Zoomed View at a road intersection to select the pixel coordinates then clicking on the intersection of those roads on a vector file loaded into the main view By default when you click near a vector feature in the Zoomed View the location will snap to that vector feature You can disable this behavior by holding down the ALT key when clicking If you hold down the SHIFT key when clicking the clicked coordinates will be rounded to the nearest 30 seconds for arc degree units and the nearest 1000 ground units for other coordinate units Holding down the CTRL key when clicking the left mouse button will cause the Zoomed Image view Table of Contents 85 Global Mapper User s Manual will be recentered on the associated point if there have been enough control points entered to convert the coordinates You can also zoom and pan the Reference Images view in a manner identical to the Zoomed Images view Ground Control Point GCP Entry This portion of the dialog is where you actually enter the ground control points GCPs that define where the image is on the earth Typically you will click a position in the zoomed view to fill in the pixel coordinates then manually enter the ground coordinates into the X Easting Lon and Y Northing Lat data fields or else select a point from the Reference Image view for the ground coordinates IMPORTANT If you manually enter the
264. n causes all files loaded into the main Global Mapper view that are currently at least partially onscreen and that match the batch convert input type to be added to the list of files to be converted The Directory section allows the user to choose where they would like the newly created output files to be created The Use same directory as file being converted option causes the output file created off of each source file to be created in the same directory as the source file The Specify output directory option allows the user to choose a specific directory to output all of the newly created output files to The File Names section allows the user to choose whether the newly created output files should have the same file name as the source file they were created from Use Source File Name option or whether the more readable quadrangle name if available should be used as the file name for the newly created output file Use Quad Name option If the Use Source File Name option is selected you can also specify an additional text string to append to each new filename to identify it The Projection section allows the user to choose whether or not each newly created output file should either use the same projection as the file that it was created from Use Source File Projection option or if each file Table of Contents 60 Global Mapper User s Manual should use a projection specified by pressing the Projection button If the user selects to specify
265. n line labels off on a type by type basis The Display Roads As Fat Lines When Zoomed In option allows users to turn on off the fattening of road lines when zoom in tight on them The New Type button allows the user to create a new line feature type and specify how it should be displayed The Edit Type button allows the user to edit line types that were previously created with the New Type button and the Delete Type button allows the user to remove line types that were previously created with the New Type button With the Attributes button you can specify a set of default attributes and values to use for new features of this type created using the Digitizer Tool If you right click on the list of types a menu will appear allowing you to save and restore your style settings using a style file This provides an easy way to setup a set of styles to use then restore them at a later date for use with a particular set of data Configuration Point Styles Vertical Options Shader Options Projection General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles r Line Types Right Click for More Options ICallector Road Contour Line Intermediate Femy Route Mew Type Edit Type Delete Type Attributes a Drawing Style Solid Line Width 1 pixel Line Color Label Display Iw Show Labels for Lines of This Type Select Font Center Labels for Lines of as e Sa Restore Defaut Style Restore Default Style
266. n type In addition the Show Labels for Points of This Type option allows a user to turn point labels off on a type by type basis The Custom Symbols section allows users to create new symbols from their own bitmap and icon files which they can then use as the symbol to display for a given type Global Mapper s Point Type Features are listed in the Global Mapper Point Type Features table Symbols are listed in the Global Mapper Symbols table Global Mapper recognizes two field attributes as containing information for the display appearence of a Point Type They are GM TYPE Address Label POINT SYMBOL Dot Red Point Type Features Global Mapper Built In Point Type Features Point Type Symbol i B Bottom Conditions Table of Contents 223 Global Mapper User s Manual Table of Contents 224 E Global Mapper User s Manual Table of Contents 225 Global Mapper User s Manual Table of Contents 226 Symbols Table of Contents Global Mapper User s Manual 2x Sym Details me 3 DM A o B m ALBI C 9 BH oe De e MD ete ee mie o 9 M ILIA JENE a D M Ce Global Mapper Built In Symbols 22 Global Mapper User s Manual Deer Diag Crosshair Red BE Diag Crosshair Yellow box Dot Dot Blue Dot Green Dot Red Dot White Dot Yellow Elevation Shaded Fish Fuel Geyser Golf Hospital Library Lighthouse x
267. nce and elevation values rather than XYZ coordinate values Use SAVE DIST Z FILEZYES to enable this option GLOBAL MAPPER SCRIPT The GLOBAL MAPPER SCRIPT must be the first command in the file The only parameter supported is the VERSION parameter Typically the entire command line will look like GLOBAL MAPPER SCRIPT VERSION 1 00 You can use the following parameters with this command e VERSION specifies the version of the scripting language used This parameter is required You should always use VERSION 1 00 e ENABLE PROGRESS specifies whether or not any progress dialogs should be displayed while this script is processing This is enabled by default Use ENABLE PROGRESSZzNO to disable the display of any progress dialogs during the processing of this script e REQUIRE WORKSPACE name of workspace file that is required to be loaded for this script to run If a name is provided for this parameter and that workspace is not currently loaded into Global Mapper the script will immediately abort This can be used if you have different scripts that you only want to use if other workspaces are active and want to prevent accidentally selecting the wrong script IMPORT The IMPORT command imports a data file for later use The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to file to load the data from This can also be the URL for a file on a web site that you want Global Mapper to download and load e TYPE type
268. nch on the printed paper will correspond to 1000 inches in the real world If you choose to print to a certain scale the printout will be centered on the center of your current screen view but Table of Contents 67 Global Mapper User s Manual the appropriate amount of information will be rendered to achieve the requested scale The Print To File section allows you to specify that the printout be directed to an image file rather than to the printer This can be handy if you either want to save the results of the printout to email to someone or post on a web site or you are having trouble printing and would like to print out the data generated by Global Mapper using another application The Print Bounds panel allows the user to select exactly what area to print the default is the current screen contents This panel behaves just like the Export Bounds panel found on most export dialogs Print Preview Command The Print Preview command allows the user to preview what a printout of the contents of the current view window would look like Print Setup Command The Print Setup command allows the user to setup their printer for printing the current view window Exit Command The Exit command closes the Global Mapper application View Menu The View menu offers the following commands e Toolbars Shows or hides the toolbar s e Status Bar Shows or hides the status bar e Background Allows user to change the background color e Cent
269. nding Box Instead of Just Inside Convex Hull If you check this option the generated elevation grid will contain valid values filling the entire bounding box specified for the gridding operation Otherwise the valid values will only fill out to the convex hull polygon of the data being gridded e Export Grids Directly to Global Mapper Grid Files If checked this option will cause the generated elevation grid file s to be directly exported to Global Mapper Grid GMG files This is useful when you are triangulating and gridding a very large collection of data and also using the Gridding tab to split the operation into smaller pieces By directly exporting the results to GMG files you can create elevation grids that normally would not all fit into memory Metadata Pressing the Metadata button displays metadata for the selected overlay The actual metadata dialog displayed depends on the type of the selected overlay The metadata dialog for a SDTS DLG is shown below lt TROICATD DDF gt lt 01 gt CRUZ BAY VI ROADS AND TR Ea Standard ID SPATIAL DATA TRANSFER STANDARD Standard Version 1994 JUNE 10 Standard Doc Ref FIPS PUB 173 1 Profle ID SOTS TOPOLOGICAL VECTOR PROFILE Profile version Profile Dac Ret FIPS 173 1 PART 4 Title CRUZ BAY VI TRANSPORTATION Data ID Data Structure OLG 4 Map Date 1982 Creation Date 19370113 Scale 24000 Composites y Vector Geometry Vector Topolog
270. ndows Vista 32 and 64 bit versions You may also be able to run Global Mapper on a Macintosh computer using an emulator like VirtualPC Parallels or Boot Camp or on a Linux OS under WINE The minimum system requirements are 64 MB of RAM and 40 MB of hard drive space for the installation Space requirements for the data are typically higher depending upon the size of the dataset Download Step 1 Download the Global Mapper software latest version from the Global Mapper website http www globalmapper com by following the Download link on the left side of the main page Step 2 Go to the directory in which you saved the viewer in Step and select the global_mapper8_setup exe icon Step 3 Double click the icon Select YES to install the program Allow the installation to progress normally and select any defaults it asked for Registration You can freely download the latest version of Global Mapper by following the instructions above However without a valid username and registration key several significant functions will be unavailable In particular if you do not obtain a valid registration key for your copy of Global Mapper you will be subject to the following limitations e You will be unable to export data to any format e You will be limited to loading a maximum of 4 data files at a time With the full version you can load any number of data files simultaneously e You will be unable to view loaded elevation data in 3D e
271. ndpoint Once you think you have fixed the connectivity issues at a location simply re run the command to find the non connected line endpoints to update the display of the blue circles they are not automatically updated as you join line endpoints Finding Nearby Points If two of more point features are selected the Find Selected Points Within Meters of Other Selected Points option will appear when right clicking Selecting this will display a dialog allowing you to specify a search distance Any selected point features that are within the specified search distance of another selected point feature will be displayed with a blue circle over that point If you delete or move some points to remove duplicates the primary use of this tool simply re run the command to find the to update the display of the blue circles they are not automatically updated as you edit the data Flattening Terrain Using Area Features If one or more area features are selected the Advanced Feature Creation Options Create Flatten Terrain from Selected Area Feature s option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will allow you to create a new elevation grid covering the selected area features that has all points within the selected area feature s set to the elevation of those area features Any portions of the new elevation grid outside of the area features will be set to invalid allowing any underlying terrain to show through If you also select
272. nerate the contours will be filled in by interpolating the surrounding data to come up with an elevation for the point in question This option is on by default specify FILL_GAPS NO to turn off e LAYER DESC specifies the name to assign to this layer If no layer description is provided the default name of GENERATED CONTOURS will be used e NC UNIT SUFFIX specifies whether or not a unit suffix either m or ft should be appended to the numeric label of generated features By default this is enabled so specify INC UNIT SUFFIXZNO to turn unit suffixes off This is useful if the data the contours are being generated over doesn t actually represent elevation e SMOOTH CONTOURS specifies whether or not generated contour line and area features should have smoothing applied to improve appearance This option is enabled by dfault Use SMOOTH CONTOURSzNO to disable smoothing GENERATE ELEV GRID The GENERATE ELEV GRID command allows for the generation of a gridded elevation layer using loaded 3D vector data The following parameters are supported by the command e ELEV UNITS specify elevation units to use for new grid FEET US feet DECIFEET 10ths of US feet METERS meters DECIMETERS 10ths of meters CENTIMETERS centimeters e SPATIAL RES specifies spacing of grid points to use in generated grid A smaller grid spacing results in higher fidelity but larger elevation grids Should be formatted as x resolution y re
273. ness setting is used to control how dark that hill shading is allowed to make shaded areas By default the value of 0 allows shaded areas to go all the way to black By moving this slider to the right you can cause shadowing to be capped in high relief areas thus allowing the use of other controls to better bring out detail in low relief areas To enable the display of water on elevation data sets check the Show Water On Elevation Data option The Water Transparency controls the clarity of displayed water if configured to display water Clearer water shows more underlying relief to show through while opaque water allows none The Water Level setting controls the level at which water is displayed The default is set at an elevation of 0 meters above sea level Use this to simulate different flood and sea level change scenarios The Water Color options allows you to set the color of the water The default 1s blue Shader Options The Shader Options panel pictured below controls options for the display of elevation data using the daylight gradient slope and HSV shaders described above Table of Contents 101 Global Mapper User s Manual Configuration General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles Point Styles Vertical Options Shader Options Projection Daylight Shader 4 r Gradient Shader Surface Color ll Low Color High Color Slope Shader Minimum Slope Slope Value Color Maximum Slop
274. ng even latitude and longitude lines The Global Projection Grid option causes a grid to be displayed in the currently selected global i e display projection which can be modified on the Projection tab The Grid Spacing section allows you to specify whether to allow Global Mapper to automatically determine a good grid spacing to use or to specify a custom grid spacing If the Show All Grid Lines Regardless of Zoom Scale option is checked all grid lines will always be shown rather than the default behavior of only major grid lines being displayed when zoomed way out and the more minor grid lines only showing up as you zoom in If the Extend Grid Lines Beyond Loaded Data Bounds option is checked the generated grid lines will extend a little bit beyond the bounds of the loaded data Otherwise the grid lines will stop at the edge of the smallest bounding box encompassing all loaded data files If grid lines are being displayed the grid lines can also be exported to any of the supported vector export formats The color and style of the grid lines can be modified on the Line Styles tab by modifying the styles for the Grid Line Grid Line Minor and Grid Line Major line types You can also selectively turn off the display of any or all of the grid line types using the Filter options described above The Distance Scale Display options allow for the control of whether or not a distance scale is displayed on the main map when data is loaded
275. ngle and holding down the SHIFT key will force the dragged shape to be square If you hold down the T key when left clicking to start the shape the start point will be treated as the top left corner of the feature rather than the center of the shape feature Once the shape is to your liking release the left mouse button and the Modify Feature Info dialog will appear allowing you to setup the label classification drawing style and attribution for the new feature See Editing Feature Attributes and Drawing Styles for more details Once you have completed have completed creating the shape the Digitizer Tool will remain in the selected shape creation mode so you can simply start drawing a new shape or right click to choose a different mode Table of Contents 145 Global Mapper User s Manual Create Strike and Dip Geology Related Features After selecting the Create Strike and Dip Point popup menu option you can proceed to select the location of your new point by left clicking at the desired location You can cancel creation of the point s at any time by pressing the Escape key or right clicking After selecting the locationof your strike and dip point the Enter Strike and Dip Parameters dialog pictured below appears and allows you to setup your point This includes selected the azimuth angle for your strike either relative to True North the default or to the top of the map screen the dip value for your point which will be
276. nized road name like I 35 or US40 and when you press OK you will be prompted whether or not to display an icon for the road name This allows you to generate a nice iconized display for most highway types If you would like to split point and area labels up onto multiple display lines you can add the newline escape sequence An to your display label You will then be prompted to split your label onto multiple lines when you save the changes The Feature Type selection allows you to choose which Global Mapper classification to assign to the feature You can also choose to create a new Global Mapper type with the Create New Type button The Feature Layer selection allows you to choose which layer that the feature should be assigned to You can choose an existing layer the User Created and Modified Features layer or you can create an entirely new layer to add the feature to A layer corresponds to a single entry in the Control Center The Feature Style section allows you to modify the drawing style of the selected feature Selecting the Use Default Style for Selected Feature Type option will cause the currently configured style for the Feature Type from the Area Line or Point Styles tab of the Configuration dialog to be used when rendering the feature Alternatively you can choose the Specify Style to Use When Rendering Feature option and select how you want this feature drawn independent of the selected Feature Type The Feature Attributes selec
277. nly registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export WAsP MAP File Command The Export WAsP MAP File command allows the user to export loaded line and area features to a WAsP MAP format file for use with the WAsP Wind Analysis and Application Program application http www wasp dk Only those line features with an elevation and or valid roughness attributes will be exported Only those area features with valid roughness attributes will be exported Valid roughness attributes consist of a ROUGH L and a ROUGH R attribute containing numeric values for the left and right roughness for the feature If neither Table of Contents 57 Global Mapper User s Manual of those attributes exist but a RV attribute is available that value will be used for both the left and right roughness for that feature When selected the command displays the WAsP MAP Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export ZMap XYSeglId File Command The Export ZMap XYSeglId File command allows the user to export loaded line and area features to a ZMap text format file for use with applications like Landmark Graphics When selected the command displays the ZMap XYSegld Export Options dialog which allows
278. nse for Global Mapper Check for Updates Command The Check for Updates command checks to see if a newer version of Global Mapper than the current version is being used If so a dialog describing the new version is displayed Automatically Check for Updates at Startup Command The Automatically Check for Updates at Startup command controls whether or not Global Mapper ever automatically checks for a new version automatically when you start it About Global Mapper Command The About Global Mapper command displays the About Global Mapper dialog which contains version and contact information for Global Mapper Table of Contents 75 Global Mapper User s Manual Export Bounds Panel Options Export Bounds hr Draw a Box Lat Lon Degrees North Wiest South E ast t Global Projection Geographic LatitudeLongitude arc Morth W esl South E ast t Comer w Size Global Projection Geographic Latitude Horth W esl Width Height t MGRS Military Grid Reference System Bounds Top Lett Bottom Aight t Crop to Selected Area Feature Fito Last aed ud The Export Bounds panel provides several different method for specifying the subset of the currently loaded data that the user wishes to export Each of these methods is described below Note that regardless of the method used to specify the bounds the exported data will be generated in the currently selection global pro
279. nt file value is C data my_file dem e CCFNAME e filename of current file value is my file dem e YFNAME_WO_EXT filename of current file without extension value is my file For a sample of the DIR LOOP START command in use see the example at the bottom of this reference The following parameters are used by the DIR LOOP START command e DIRECTORY specifies the directory to search for files in If you leave this blank the operation will be based in the current folder e FILENAME MASKS space separated list of filename masks to import If no value is provided then all files will be used e RECURSE DIR specifies whether the loop operation will search subdirectories of the specified directory as well as the current one Use RECURSE_DIR YES to enable The default value is to NOT search subdirectories EMBED SCRIPT The EMBED SCRIPT command allows you to call another script from within a script This can be useful in many situations For example if you have a common set of data files that you want to load for each script operation you could simply create a script that loaded those files then embed that script within your other scripts The following parameters are supported by the command Table of Contents 168 Global Mapper User s Manual e FILENAME full path to script file to run EXPORT_ELEVATION The EXPORT_ELEVATION command exports all currently loaded elevation data to a file The following parameters
280. ntour Solid Supplementary hl Collector Road Solid Contour Line Intermediate Solid Contour Line Major Solid Contour Line Minor Solid Msn Table of Contents 255 Global Mapper User s Manual Deleted Line Dash 192 192 192 255 255 0 Digitizer Tool Line m Dry Stream or River Dot 0 0 211 Ferry Route Solid 255 128 0 Solid 128 128 128 Grid Line Major 128 128 128 Grid Line Minor Solid 128 128 128 Intermittent Stream or River Dash 0 0 211 International Political Boundary pene Interstate Solid 132 130 255 Invisible Boundary Dot 192 192 192 Major Political Boundary State Solid 128 128 128 Table of Contents 56 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid Major US Highway 255 64 64 0 0 0 253 253 0 Minor Political Boundary Solid 0 0 0 County Park Boundary Solid Processing Closure Line 0 255 0 Dash 128 128 128 Dash Dot 128 128 128 Solid 255 255 255 Railroad 0 0 0 Railroad Class 1A Railroad 0 0 0 Railroad Class 1B Railroad 0 0 0 Ramp Solid 0 255 255 m Table of Contents 57 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid m Residential Road 128 128 128 River 20 km Solid 0 0 211 River 250 km Solid 0 0 211 River 100 250 km Solid 0 0 211 River 20 50 km Solid 0 0 211 River 50 100 km Solid 0 0 211 Solid Table of Contents 0 0 211 River Unknown Length 2550 0 0 0 0 0 255
281. nts whose label starts with the search string specified in the Search String field This field can contain the and wildcard characters In addition one can control which vector object types area line and or point to include in the search Double clicking on an item in the list will recenter the view on that object and show a bullseye on it hold down the ALT key when double clicking to not show the bullseye The Edit Selected button displays a dialog allowing the user to modify the name feature type and drawing style of any features selected The Delete Selected button will mark all selected features as deleted This dialog is particulary handy with the GNIS Geographic Names database which is freely available for download Search By Attributes Name and Description The Search By Attributes Name and Description command allows for searching for features in all loaded vector data by attribute value name and description type When selected the Search Vector Data dialog is displayed Table of Contents 71 Global Mapper User s Manual Bl Search Vector Data Types To Search Close I Areas Iv Lines Iv Points Search Critena Wildcards and are Allowed in Compare Value Attribute Item Compare Value Feature Name i as Text Make Text Comparisons Case Sensitive SEARCH IN Els TING RESULTS Double click on item to recenter map view an it right click for mare aptians zFeature Type Ramp
282. o specify a minimum view radius value Use the default of 0 to include everything from the transmitter out ot the selected view radius The View Angle section allows the user to limit the view shed to a particular subsection of the complete radial area The Start Angle specifies the cartographic angle at which the radial subregion begins This angle is a cartographic angle meaning that O degrees is north and angles increase clockwise The Swept Angle specifies the number of degrees clockwise to include in the view shed For example if the transmitter being analyzed sweeps an arc from due south to due west a start angle of 180 with a swept angle of 90 would be used To perform a view shed analysis over the entire area keep the defaults of starting at 0 degrees and sweeping through 360 degrees The Earth Curvature section allows the user to specify whether they want to take the curvature of the earth into account while performing the view shed analysis In addition when earth curvature is being used they can specify an atmospheric correction value to be used The atmospheric correction value is useful when determining the view shed for transmitting waves whose path is affected by the atmosphere For example when modeling microwave transmissions a value of 1 333 is typically used to emulate how microwaves are refracted by the atmosphere The Sample Spacing section allows the user to specify the spacing of elevation samples when calculating the view s
283. o specify control points in a projection other than what you want to define as the native projection for the file Note that you must also explicitly specify the name projection of the file using either the PROJ NAME PROJ EPSG CODE or PROJ FILENAME parameters RECTIFY specifies the rectification method to use for rectifying this file Valid value are LINEAR AFFINE POLYNOMIAL and TRIANGULATION If you do not specify a rectification type but do provide at least two ground control points best rectification method will automatically be chosen Table of Contents 189 Global Mapper User s Manual based on the number of control points specified e ALLOW_SELECTION set to NO to disable selection of features from this layer using either the Feature Info or Digitizer Tools IMPORT ARCHIVE The IMPORT ARCHIVE command imports a data file from a tar gz archive for later use The only time you should ever need to use the IMPORT ARCHIVE command is when you only want to load some of the data inside a tar gz archive For the typical case of just loading everything in an archive use the IMPORT command with AUTO as the value for the TYPE parameter The following parameters are supported by the command e ARCHIVE FILENAME full path to the archive file to load the data from e FILENAME filename to load from the archive e NOTE All other parameters that are supported by the IMPORT command are also supported by this command IMPORT ASCII The
284. od fit between adjacent data files If you selected to save the image s to JPG or GeoTIFF image s the new files will be written after you have rectified ALL of the selected files This is extremely useful as you can setup the rectification parameters for numerous images then let the sometimes lengthy rectification and saving process happen while you do something else All newly rectified files will be created in the same directory as the original images with rectified appended just before the file extension The original imagery will remain intact and unchanged Image Rectifier Dialog Table of Contents 82 Global Mapper User s Manual MS Image Rectifier 039094A3_bluespringsMO TIF File Options Entire Image Reference Images Load inta Main Sew First Ground Control Paint G CF Entry Ground Control Point BCF Projection Pixels 1096 667633196 x Easting Lon E z1 30 930 ww Geographic Latitude Longitude A WI3584 arc 4031 865044276 y Northing Lat 39 02 38 89 N Update Selected GCP Select Projection Ground Control Foints Double click to Center ori a LP Pinel r Paint Mame Pixel Piel Projected Projected Y Longitude Latitude Error Delete L IIBR Paint 1 561 051 344111 S4 36666667 3812500000 94 27 0000 w 39 OF 30 00 N 0 00 3 E Point 2 5000 26 408047 3425000000 3812500000 9415 0000 w 39 wz73000 N 0 00 Shift Al Paint 3 4g 515 6033 06 S43750000
285. of the area features Use GRID FLATTEN AREAS NO to disable this e GRID HEIGHTS RELATIVE specifies that the elevation values for the input vector features should be treated as relative to any loaded terrain data rather than as absolute elevation values This useful for things like trees or buildings where you have a height above the ground rather than an absolute height Use GRID HEIGHTS RELATIVEZYES to enable this e GRID SAVE TIN specifies that the triangulated irregular network TIN for the grid operation should be saved as a new separate vector layer consisting of triangular 3D area features Use GRID SAVE TINZYES to enable this e GRID USE CONSTRAINTS specifies that 3D line and area features should be treated as constraints breaklines during the gridding process Use GRID USE CONSTRAINTS to enable this e GRID IGNORE ZERO specifies that features with an elevation of 0 0 will not be used during the gridding process GENERATE PATH PROFILE The GENERATE PATH PROFILE command allows for the saving of a 3D path profile to an ASCH XYZ file This command uses loaded elevation data to generate a list of the 3D coordinates between two given points in the given elevation units The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to XYZ ASCII file to save the data to e ELEV UNITS specify elevation units to use in export FEET export in US feet METERS export in meters e POINT COUNT specifies the number of
286. of the measurement line To do this simply right click then select the Measure Volume Cut and Fill option that appears Selecting this option will display the Setup Volume Calculation Parameters dialog pictured below which allows you to set up the volume measurement Table of Contents 127 Global Mapper User s Manual Setup Volume Calculation Parameters Volume Calculation Type Base Height far Volume Calculations Calculate Cut and Fill Volumes Along Line Feature Species the base height s for the volume calculations Any areas higher than this height will be used as the cut volume and any areas Corridor Diameter around Line 3 Meters below this height will be used as the BI volume Fuge pU AMD E If vau select the above ground option for volume calculations along a lne feature the base height used will be relative to ground level at each vertex in the line with the elevations in between vertices being sample spacing Interpolated The sample spacing controls the interval at which elevation samples dice Game Bose Heaht Walue focal Wemices are examined to determine the volumes Smaller values result in more d accurate but more slowly calculated volumes Pans 3 AMIS 2 meters f Specify the Base Height to use at Each Vertex T 8mis E meters Vertes Height ft ar m Click Value to Edit IF vau wish ta change the ground units that the spacing is specified in 0 0 m you need to change the cu
287. og consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export NITF Command The Export NITF command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to a NITF National Imagery Transmission Format file When selected the command displays the NITF Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Optimi Terrain File Command The Export Optimi Terrain File command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to an Optimi Terrain format grid file These terrain files can be used with applications from Optimi When selected the command displays the Optimi Terrain Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set
288. ology Dip Bedding Medium Red Geology Dip Bedding Small Aqua PPP PEE Ty tele BORG RE EGE Table of Contents 270 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Dip Bedding Small Black Geology Dip Bedding Small Green Geology Dip Bedding Small Red Geology Dip Overturned Medium Aqua Geology Dip Overturned Medium Black Geology Dip Overturned Medium Green Geology Dip Overturned Medium Red Geology Dip Overturned Small Aqua Geology Dip Overturned Small Black Geology Dip Overturned Small Green Geology Dip Overturned Small Red CEELPRPEPRELL epiespiesiesipie Table of Contents 271 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Foliation Closed Medium Aqua Geology Foliation Closed Medium Black Geology Foliation Closed Medium Green Geology Foliation Closed Medium Red Geology Foliation Closed Small Aqua Geology Foliation Closed Small Black Geology Foliation Closed Small Green Geology Foliation Closed Small Red Geology Foliation Open Medium Aqua Geology Foliation Open Medium Black Geology Foliation Open Medium Green PPP PEED TPT Hebeppb pIHIHr Table of Contents 272 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Foliation Open Medium Red Geology Foliation Open Small Aqua Geology Foliation Open Small Black Geology Foliation Open Small Gre
289. omed view Alternately one can zoom in to a user defined rectangle by left clicking and then draging a box while holding down the left mouse button If your mouse has a middle button you can hold it down and drag the map similar to the behavior of the Pan Grab and Drag tool Pan Grab and Drag Tool Wi The Pan Grab and Drag command selects the Pan tool as the current tool To change the center point of the image without changing the magnification depress the left mouse button drag the view to the desired location then release the left mouse button to redraw the view at the new location If you just want to recenter on a new location without dragging just click the left mouse button at the new desired location and the view will be recentered on that location this provides the functionality of the old Recenter Tool Measure Tool L The Measure command selects the measure tool as the current tool Table of Contents 126 Global Mapper User s Manual To find the distance between along a path on the display or the enclosed area of a set of points choose the Measure Tool icon from the toolbar or select Tools Measure from the menu bar 1 Left click on the point to begin the measurement Move the mouse which will draw a line to the point where the measurement should stop 2 Repeat step 1 until you have defined the entire path or area that you wish to measure 3 Right click the right mouse button and select S
290. on allows you to have the sides of roads with recognized address numbering information to be marked with a series of parallel lines extending from the road on the side s with known address information This provides a visual way to see where addressing Table of Contents 93 Global Mapper User s Manual information is available The Hide Display Labels that are Partially Offscreen option allows you to hide any feature labels that don t entirely fit on the screen This can be useful when exporting vector data to a raster format and also gridding the export into multiple pieces This option should allow a seamless result in that case The Add MODIFIED_DATE to Modified Vector Features option controls whether or not a MODIFIED_DATE attribute is automatically added to vector features when they are changed in some way The conize Road Names on Import Some Formats option controls whether or not the specified name for road line types is checked on import to see if it should result in an iconized road name display such as for interstates and major highways This is only done for formats which do not already have their own built in iconization such as Tiger Line and USGS DLG files For example this will work for formats like Shapefiles and MapInfo MIF MID files among others The Fix Line Label Position on Longest Segment option controls whether or not the label displayed for line features should move around to always be centered on the longest
291. on could be obtained via any of the prior methods e COORD DELIM SIMPLE ASCII only specifies the delimeter between coordinates in coordinate lines COMMA coordinates are separated by commas SEMICOLON coordinates are separated by semicolons SPACE coordinates are separated by space characters TAB coordinates are separated by tab characters e FEATURE SEP SIMPLE ASCII only specifies whether or not to separate vector features with a blank line NONE do not separate vector features BLANK LINE separate vector features with a blank line Any other text Use the escape sequence Mn to specify that you want to insert a line break For example to separate features with a blank line then a line with the text NEW FEATURE then another blank line use FEATURE SEPZ nNEW FEATURE n e EXPORT ELEV SIMPLE ASCII CSV and DXF only specifies whether or not a elevation value should be generated for each vertex A value of EXPORT_ELEV YES will cause elevations to be generated If the option is not specified elevation values will be generated e EXPORT ATTRS DGN and SIMPLE ASCII only specifies whether or not feature attributes should be written to the text file just before the coordinates Use EXPORT_ATTRS YES to enable export of the feature attributes If the option is not specified attributes will be exported If you don t want to export style attribute with the feature use EXPORT ATTRSzZNO STYLE to get just the associate
292. on of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE parameter See the documentation for the GRID NAMING COLS parameter above for details on the format GRID NAMING PREPEND ZEROEBES specifies whether or not to prepend zeroes to the start of grid column row names Use GRID NAMING PREPEND ZEROESzNO to disable the prepending of zeroes GRID NAMING SEPARATOR specifies the separator string to use between pieces of a grid name The default 1s an underscore GRID CREATE FOLDERS specifies that a separate folder should be generated for each row or column if GRID NAMING SEPARATE COLS FIRST is specified of the export rather than placing every output file in the same folder Table of Contents 178 Global Mapper User s Manual e GEN_3D_FEATURES DGN and SHAPEFILE only specifies that 3D line and point objects should be created in the exported file Set this to YES to cause the the 3D features to be generated Leaving out this parameter or setting it to anything but YES results in the normal 2D objects The elevation stored for each vertex point will be the first of the following that is available The elevation associated with the vertex point in question The elevation associated with the entire area line point being exported For example the elevation of a contour line or spot elevation The first elevation obtained by searching the loaded elevation layers at the position of the vertex point A value of 0 0 will be used if no elevati
293. on only this sets the name of the shader to use when rendering the gridded elevation data for this layer Use this to override use of the shared default shader just for this layer This must be one of the names displayed in the shader drop down in Global Mapper such as Atlas Shader or Global Shader or the name of a custom shader e TRANSLUCENCY elevation and raster only specifies the level of translucency i e how see through the layer is Value values range from 0 to 512 with 0 meaning the layer is completely transparent 1 e invisible and 512 meaning the layer is completely opaque this is the default e BLEND MODE elevation and raster only specify blend mode to use for combining this overlay and any previously loaded overlays NO BLEND no blending is done this is the default MULTIPLE SCREEN OVERLAY HARD LIGHT COLOR BURN COLOR DODGE DARKEN LIGHTEN DIFFERENCE EXCLUSION APPLY COLOR APPLY COLOR REVERSE KEEP RED KEEP GREEN KEEP BLUE e FEATHER BLEND EDGES raster only specifies that the layer should be feature blended around one or more ledges This is a numeric bitfield value Add the following values to enable blending on Table of Contents 188 Global Mapper User s Manual that edge blend top edge 2 blend bottom edge 4 blend left edge 8 blend right edge For example to blend all edges use FEATHER BLEND EDGES z15 The FEATHER BLEND
294. or area features imported from the file e LINE TYPE specifies the name of the Global Mapper type to use for line features imported from the file e POINT TYPE specifies the name of the Global Mapper type to use for point features imported from the file e HIDDEN set to YES to cause this overlay to be hidden from view after it is loaded The default is to show the overlay SAMPLE IMPORT ASCII FILENAME C NdataNASCII FilesNusvi landmark asc TYPE POINT AND LINE COORD DELIV IMPORT DIR TREE The IMPORT DIR TREE command imports all of the data files in a given directory tree that match a list of filename masks The following parameters are supported by the command In addition all of the display option parameters for the IMPORT command are also supported for this command e DIRECTORY full path to root of directory tree to import files from e FILENAME MASKS space separated list of filename masks to import If no value is provided then all files which are of recognized types will be imported SAMPLE IMPORT DIR TREE DIRECTORY C TEMP EXPORT TEST FILENAME MASKS OPT GMP IMPORT TERRASERVER The IMPORT TERRASERVER command imports a chunk of TerraServer data such as satellite imagery or topographic maps The following parameters are supported by the command e THEME NAME name of the TerraServer theme to import such as DOQ or DRG eLAT LON BOUNDS specifies the bounds to import in latitude longitude degrees There
295. ot to display the labels at a fixed height in ground units rather than a fixed font size in pixels Table of Contents 98 Global Mapper User s Manual Trajan Pro Trebuchet MS Tunga O Tw Cen MT Tw Cen MT Condense O Tw Cen MT Condense r Bfects 4 r Sample Strikeout Underine AaBbYyZz mi Color BN Beck eet Label Background Fill Mode Automatic C Fill with Background Color Transparent Background Label Pasition Relative to Point Feature Automatic Always Display Label if any Labels are Displayed ates Labels Using this Font at a Fixed Height of meters ai degrees Vertical Options The Vertical Options panel pictured below controls options for the display of elevation data Table of Contents 99 Global Mapper User s Manual Configuration General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles Point Styles Vertical Options Shader Options Projection Atlas Shader v Enable Hill Shading Elevation Display Export Units C Native Overlay Units Metric C Statute fft Light Direction Altitude 45 Azimuth 45 Ambient Lighting 0 00 Dim E Bright Vertical Exagaeration 3 0 Flat n High i Hil Shading Shadow Darkness 0 Dark E Light J Water Display Show Water on Elevation Data Water Level m Water Transparency
296. other value the parity will be automatically determined Only the start and end address number are absolutely required for the side of a road to have addressing in addition to the road having a name Adding Coordinate Attributes to Point Features If one or more point features are selected the Add Coordinate Attributes to Selected Point s option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will cause X and Y attributes to be added or updated if they already exist to the selected points with the value being the coordinates of the points in the current projection system Adding Attributes to Areas from Included Point Features If one or more area features are selected the Add Attributes to Selected Areas from Points option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will cause Global Mapper to search for any point features within each area and if found add the attributes from the included point feature to the area s attribute list If multiple points are found within the area the user is prompted whether or not to use the attribute data Table of Contents 155 Global Mapper User s Manual GPS Menu The GPS Menu offers the following commands e Start Tracking GPS e Stop Tracking GPS e Keep the Vessel On Screen e Mark Waypoint e Vessel Color e Vessel Size e Vessel Shape e Setup e nformation e Manage GPS Vessels e View NMEA Data Log e Clear Tracklog e Record Tracklog e Save Tracklog
297. overlays to allow displaying large quantities of data in Google Earth Use KML SUPER _OVERLAY YES to enable this behavior e KML TILE SIZE KML only if data is being automatically gridded into super overlays this specifies the size of tiles to use for gridding The default tile size is 1024 To change this for example to 512x512 use KML TILE SIZE 512 e KML ZOOM SCALE FACTOR KML only if data is being automatically gridded into super overlays this specifies the multiplier to use when creating zoomed out pyramid layers The default value of 2 makes each successive zoom level 1 2 the resolution of the previous one until everything fits in a single tile To change this to making each layer 1 3rd the resolution of the previous one use KML ZOOM SCALE FACTOR 3 e ADD OVERVIEW LAYERS ERDAS only specifies that overview pyramid layers should be generated for the export Use ADD OVERVIEW LAYERSzYES to enable e BLOCK SIZE ERDAS only specifies the block size to use for the export The default is BLOCK SIZE 64 e COMPRESS OUTPUT ERDAS only specifies whether or not the exported file should be compress The default is COMPRESS OUTPUTZYES EXPORT VECTOR The EXPORT VECTOR command exports all currently loaded vector data to a file The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to file to save the data to e TYPE type of vector file we re exporting to ARC UNGENERATE export line and area features
298. played across the top of the application window below the menu bar The toolbar provides quick mouse access to many tools used in Global Mapper To hide or display the Toolbar choose Toolbar from the View menu Menu Headings e File Menu e Edit Menu e View Menu e Tools Menu e Search Menu e GPS Menu e Help Menu File Menu The File menu offers the following commands e Open Data File s Command e Open Generic ASCII Text File s Command e Open All Files in a Directory Tree Command e Open ECW File from the Web Command e Open Data File at Fixed Screen Location e Unload All Command e Create New Map Catalog Command e Find Data Online Command e Download Online Imagery Topo Terrain Maps e Load Workspace Command e Save Workspace Command Table of Contents 6 Global Mapper User s Manual e Save Workspace As Command e Run Script Command e Capture Screen Contents to Image Command e Export Global Mapper Package File Command e Export Raster and Elevation Data Export Arc ASCII Grid Command Export BIL BIP BSO Command Export BT Binary Terrain Command Export DEM Command Export DTED Command Export DXF 3D Face File Command Export DXF Mesh Command Export DXF Point File Command Export ECW Command Export Erdas Imagine Command Export Float Grid Command Export Geosoft Grid Command Export GeoTIFF Command Export Global Mapper Grid Command Export Gravsoft Grid Command Export HF2 HFZ Command Expor
299. port SVG command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a SVG Scalable Vector Graphic format file suitable for display on the web When selected the command displays the SVG Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Tom Tom OV2 Command The Export Tom Tom OV2 command allows the user to export any loaded point data sets to a Tom Tom OV2 format file for use in creating POI databases for Tom Tom GPS devices When selected the command displays the Tom Tom OV2 Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Tsunami OVR Command The Export Tsunami OVR command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a Tsunami OVR format file for use in the Tsunami software package When selected the command displays the Tsunami OVR Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note O
300. port into multiple tiles The value should be SEQUENTIAL for sequential numeric naming starting at 1 SEPARATE for separate prefix appending by row and column or SEPARATE COLS FIRST for separate prefix appending by columns and rows For the SEPARATE options use the GRID NAMING COLS and GRID NAMING ROWS parameters to specify the details of how to name the rows and columns If no GRID NAMING parameter is supplied the last selected grid naming options selected in the user interface will be used GRID NAMING COLS specifies how to name the column portion of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE or GRID NAMING ZSEPARATE COLS FIRST parameter The value of this field is a comma delimited list with the following field values Naming type Can have the following values 0 NUM name using numbers in ascending order 0 NUM REVERSE name using numbers in descending order 9 ALPHA name using letters in ascending order ALPHA REVERSE name using letters in descending order Starting value for numbering or lettering 1 e 1 or A Prefix string to use before the numeric or alphabetic value Step value for numeric naming default is 1 You can leave values blank if they don t apply or you want to use the default As an example to do numeric naming starting at the number 100 increasing by 10 each time with a prefix of DEM you would use GRID NAMING COLS Z NUM 100 DEM 10 GRID NAMING ROWS specifies how to name the row porti
301. pplicable parameter You can save the currently selected projection to a PRJ file using the Save to File button Previously saved PRJ files can be loaded using the Load from File button By default the PRJ file will be saved in the newer Table of Contents 106 Global Mapper User s Manual WKT well known text format used by most products There is an Advanced Option on the General tab of the Configuration dialog allowing the older ESRI PRJ format to be exported instead if you would like If for some reason a WKT representation of the projection cannot be generated the old ESRI PRJ format will be written out instead The Init From EPSG button allows you to initialize a projection definition based on a numeric EPSG projected coordinate system definition There are numerous built in EPSG code definitions but by no means is there an exhaustive set You can add your own EPSG code definitions or modify built in ones by modifying the epsg_codes txt file installed in your Global Mapper installation folder The format is described in the file header You must re start Global Mapper after changing this file for the changes to have any effect Table of Contents 107 Global Mapper User s Manual OVERLAY CONTROL CENTER This section describes the Overlay Control Center dialog pictured below This dialog serves as the central control center handling all currently loaded data sets overlays lll Overlay Control Center Curent Opened Overlays R
302. r loading with the Load Workspace command The Global Mapper workspace maintains the list of all currently loaded overlays as well as some state information about each of those overlays When the workspace file is loaded all of the overlays that were loaded at the time the workspace file was saved will be loaded into Global Mapper This provides a handy way to easily load a group of overlays which you work with often The Global Mapper workspace will also contain any changes that you have made to loaded vector features as well as any new vector features that you have created The user projection and last view on the data will also be maintained Table of Contents 17 Global Mapper User s Manual Find Data Online Command Selecting the Find Data Online command will open a web browser pointing to places on the internet where data compatible with Global Mapper is available for download Run Script Command The Run Script command allows users to run a Global Mapper script file that they have created This is a powerful option that allows the user to automate a wide variety of tasks Click here for a guide to the scripting language Selecting the Run Script command from the menu displays the Script Processing dialog shown here Script Processing Script File GLOBAL MAPPER SCRIPT VERSION 7 00 UNLOAD ALL DEFINE PROJ PROJ MAMEZ BEU WwOosed Projection GEOGRAPHIC Datum W584 units NO 0 000000 0 000000 Script Results
303. rce Filename for Layer Name Generate Projection PR File Create 3D Features Using Loaded Elevation Data Generate ECEF Coordinates Advanced Users Only Generate Zero Width Lines Some software such as MicroStation does not property deal with DXF line features having a non zero thickness i e they create duplicate lines Enable this option if you encounter this problem The Display Labels section allows you to control if you want feature display labels included in the DXF files and if so whether you want them represented as TEXT entities in their own layer called FEATURE LABEL or as DXF attributes The default is to have them included as attributes associated with each feature As some software packages cannot handle attributes in DXF files you may have to switch to a different option with the associated loss of information to get your exported DXF files to work with some software packages If you would like line features to have rotated labels running along the line associated with them you have to use the option to nclude Display Labels as Separate Text Layer The Layer Names section allows you to control how the layer names used in the exported DXF file are generated You can choose to use the feature description feature display label or feature source filename as the layer name in the exported file If you choose to use the display label as the layer name any features that do not have a display label will use the feat
304. res in Covered Areas option specifies that view shed coverage area polygon featuers should be generated for those areas that are visible These generated area features then behave just like any other vector feature and can be exported to vector formats like Shapefiles for use in other software Table of Contents 137 Global Mapper User s Manual Pressing the Select Transmitter Location button displays a dialog that allows the user to adjust the exact transmitter coordinates from the coordinates where they clicked Pressing the Select Display Color button displays a dialog that allows the user to select the color in which to display the visible areas on the map After setting up the view shed calculation in the dialog and pressing the OK button the view shed analysis will be performed and when complete the results will be displayed on the main map display as a new overlay All visible areas within the specified radius will be displayed using the selected color The overlay will default to being 50 translucent allowing you to see areas underneath the view shed You can modify the translucency of the overlay in the Overlay Control Center In addition a small radio tower point will be created at the selected transmitter location When selected using the pick tool this point displays information about the view shed analysis as shown below If you would like to modify the settings used to calculate the view shed and recalculate it usin
305. rface displayed and Global Mapper will immediately exit when the script file completes processing This allows you to easily run Global Mapper scripts from another application or from a DOS batch file Comments Any lines that being with the forward slash character are considered comments and are ignored by the script processing engine This means that you can use C or C style comments like or at the start of your line ADD_MEASURE_ATTRS The ADD_MEASURE_ATTRS command allows you to add update feature measure attributes to all of the line and area features in a loaded vector layer The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME filename of the layer to update If an empty value is passed in all layers that were created by the script such as those from a GENERATE CONTOURS command will be updated You can also pass in the value USER CREATED FEATURES when running a script in the context of the main map view or loading a workspace to have the User Created Features layer updated ASSIGN TYPE The ASSIGN TYPE command allows you to assign feature types classifications based on one or more attribute or label values You can choose to update area line and or point features with a single operation Table of Contents 164 Global Mapper User s Manual You can also supply multiple COMPARE_STR parameters to apply multiple criteria all of which must be true in order to assign a type The following paramet
306. ridded elevation data i e DEMs is loaded the Generate Path Profile From Line option will appear when a single line feature is selected Selecting this option will display the Path Profile Line of Sight dialog with a 3D path profile of the elevations under the path that the selected line feature follows Calculating Elevation Statistics within Selected Area Features Table of Contents 152 Global Mapper User s Manual If gridded elevation data i e DEMs is loaded and at least one area feature is selected the Calculate Elevation Stats for Selected Area s option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will examine the loaded terrain within the selected area feature s and if terrain is found within a selected area add MIN ELEV MAX ELEV and AVG_ELEV attributes to the area containing the minimum maximum and average elevation encountered within the area feature Calculating Cut and Fill Volumes for Area and Line Features If you have a single area or line feature selected the Measure Volume option will appear when bringing up the right click menu Selecting this option will allow you to calculate cut and fill volumes either within the selected area or along the selected line feature For more information about this operation see the cut and fill section of the Measure Tool help Working with Feature Measurements 1 e Length Enclosed Area If one or more area and or line features are selected the Add Update the
307. rintout Specifying the default value of O will result in the DPI tag not being saved to the TIFF file at all If the Save Scale Elevation Legend Grid if Displayed option is checked the distance scale elevation legend and coordinate grid will be saved to the GeoTIFF file except vertical GeoTIFFs if they are configured to show up in the main display If the Save Vector Data if Displayed option is checked any loaded vector data that is configured to show up in the main display will be saved to the GeoTIFF file except vertical GeoTIFFs If the Generate TFW File option is checked a TIFF world file will be generated with the same name as the GeoTIFF file with a tfw extension The TFW file is used by software that is not capable of reading the placement of the GeoTIFF file directly from the GeoTIFF header If the nterpolate to Fill Small Gaps in Data option is checked any small areas with missing data will be filled in by interpolating the surrounding valid data This is useful for filling small gaps between adjacent tiles or small holes in elevation data If the Use LZW Compression option is checked the image data will be compressed using the LZW compression algorithm This generally results in the best compression for TIFF files but is not yet supported by all software applications If the application s that you are going to be using the TIFF file with supports LZW using this compression method is definitely suggested If the Generate PR
308. rks Grid command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a RockWorks Grid format file When selected the command displays the RockWorks Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export STL Command The Export STL command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a STL format file for use with some CAD systems When selected the command displays the STL Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Surfer Grid ASCI Format Command The Export Surfer Grid ASCII Format command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to an ASCII format Surfer Grid file When selected the command displays the Surfer Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialo
309. rom the web you need to download and install the latest ECW ActiveX plugin from http demo ermapper com ecwplugins DownloadIEPlugin htm Open Data File at Fixed Screen Location The Open Data File at Fixed Screen Location command allows the user to open any supported data file format for display at a fixed location on the screen rather than at a fixed location on the earth This is particularly useful for loading things like bitmaps for legends and logos The loaded data will be used for screen display export and printing operations Selecting the Open Data File at Fixed Screen Location command first prompts you to select a file to load then displays the Fixed Screen Location Setup dialog pictured below This dialog allows the user to specify the size and position of the data relative to the screen export printout Table of Contents 15 Global Mapper User s Manual Fixed Screen Location Setup Setup Fixed View Location Size on Map View Fixed Percentage of View Width 125 Sof view width C Fixed Percentage of View Height x of view height t Original Pixel Size r Harizantal Position fi U percent of view width from Left Edge of View C Right Edge of View C Center of View Vertical Poston i linches from Top Edge of View C Bottom Edge of View C Center of View Iv Always Draw Layer on Top of Other Layers Unload All Command The Unload All command unloads all overlays and clears the scree
310. rove Appearance Export Contours Directly to Package Files Rather Than Displaying in the Main Map View Use with Gridding Option ta Allow Contouring of Very Large Areas The Contour Options panel displayed above allows the user to set the contour interval and units as well as the grid spacing to use when generating the contours In addition options are available to generate isoheight area features in addition to contour lines as well as spot elevations at the highest and lowest points in the area over which the contours are generated The smoothing option controls whether or not extra vertices are added along generated line and area features to improve their appearance If you need to generate a huge amount of contour lines over a large area the option to export the contours directly to a package file can be used in addition to the Gridding tab options to export those contours directly to package files to get around memory limitations The Simplification panel displayed below allows the user to set up the threshold at which points that don t contribute much to the shape of the generated contour are removed in order to generate lines with less Table of Contents 65 Global Mapper User s Manual vertices The Gridding panel allows you to break up your contour generation into smaller pieces which can sometimes help reduce memory requirements when generating a very large amount of contour lines The Export Bounds panel allows the user to set
311. rrent projection by going to 2 0 0 m Config 2 Projection 3 0 0 mi Volume Units cubic yards Base Heights in List are above ground if Create New Line amp rea Feature with Volume Attributes T On the Setup Volume Calculate Parameters you can select whether to measure cut and fill volumes within some specified distance of the selected line or within the specified area If you are measuring along a line you can specify the cut heights to use at each vertex individually or use the same cut base height for each vertex relative either to the ground at each vertex or relative to sea level Whichever option you choose the heights will be interpolated between line vertices to get a smoothly varying cut height Once you have your volume calculation setup and you press ok to calculate it the volume of earth that would be needed to fill any space below the cut surface fill volume is reported along with the volume of earth that is above the cut surface cut volume After viewing the reported volumes you have the option to save a new feature with the measurement values Feature Info Tool e The Feature Info command selects the Feature Information tool as the current tool This tool allows you to select vector features areas lines and points by clicking on or near them Once selected a dialog displaying information about the selected item appears To pick objects select the Feature Info icon from the Toolbar or select Tools
312. rt Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export MapInfo TAB MAP Command The Export MapInfo TAB MAP command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a MapInfo TAB MAP format file When selected the command displays the MapInfo Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export MatLab Command The Export MatLab command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a MatLab format file When selected the command displays the MatLab Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Moss Command The Export Moss command allows the user to export any loaded area and line vector features to a Moss format file When selected the command displays the Moss Export Op
313. rthing latitude coordinates are exported The export of elevation data is controlled with the Export Elevations option The Include Feature Attributes Before Coordinate Data and Include Drawing Style Attributes Before Coordinate Data options respectively control whether or not feature attributes or feature drawing style information is saved to the file on the lines preceding the coordinate data for a feature If elevations are being exported Global Mapper first looks for an elevation associated with the vertex being exported If no elevation is associated with the vertex Global Mapper then checks all loaded elevation grid data in reverse order of display to see if any of them have an elevation at the vertex location If so that elevation is used Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Surfer BLN Command Table of Contents 56 Global Mapper User s Manual The Export Surfer BLN command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a Surfer BLN format file used by Golden Software s Surfer package to specify breaklines When selected the command displays the Surfer BLN Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export SVG Command The Ex
314. rward Diagonal Cross Hatch Horizontal Hatch Vertical Hatch Intermittent_Water_Pattern Table of Contents 246 Global Mapper User s Manual Black Cross Pattern Black Dot Pattern Area Border Styles Global Mapper Border Styles Border Style Dash Dot Dot Table of Contents 247 Global Mapper User s Manual Null Railroad Striped Comb Left Only Comb Right Only Comb Long Teeth Left Only Comb Long_Teeth Right Only Comb Widely Spaced Left Only Comb Widely Spaced Right Only Table of Contents 248 Global Mapper User s Manual Comb Long amp Short Teeth Left Only Cy Comb Long amp Short Teeth Right Only Dp Comb Double Teeth Left Only Uu Comb Double Teeth Right Only D Comb Triplet Left Only UU Comb Triplet Right Only D LL E LL Rake Narrow Spaced Left Only Rake Narrow Spaced Right Only Rake Widely Spaced Left Only Table of Contents 249 Global Mapper User s Manual Rake Widely Spaced Right Only Solid with Minus Signs on Left fo Solid with Minus Signs on Right Solid with Plus Signs on Left Solid with Plus Signs on Right a a odi F F F H BEN Cy E B n Solid with Ts on Right Table of Contents 250 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid with Rectangles on Left Ld Solid with Rectangles on Right Imm Solid with Squares on Left UA Solid with Squares on Right Iw
315. s If you have any area polygon features with elevation in the selected layers that you are gridding they will be treated as flattened areas rather than just additional 3D data points constraints This allows you to create flattened areas like lakes and also nice terrain surfaces from things like building models If only 3D area features are present any grid locations outside of the areas will be marked as invalid otherwise the grid locations within areas will just be flattened to the area heights and the remainder of the grid will be generated as usual e Ignore Zero Elevations If checked this option will cause any features with an elevation value of zero to be ignored This is useful if you have a data set where features with no known elevation are marked with an elevation of zero e Save Triangulated Network TIN as a Vector Layer If checked this option will cause a separate vector layer with area features for each 3D triangle created as part of the triangulation and gridding Table of Contents 110 Global Mapper User s Manual process This is known as the TIN surface e Heights Relative to Ground If you check this option all elevation values from the selected vector layers will be treated as relative to the height of any loaded underlying terrain surface like a DEM This is very handy for doing things like creating building models where you just know the building height above ground and not above sea level e Fill Entire Bou
316. s Internet access to work When you select the menu command the Select Online Data Source to Download dialog pictured below is displayed This dialog allows you to select the type or theme of data to download as well as the extents of the data to download You can either select to download the current screen bounds an area to download around an address specify a lat lon bounds explicitly or select to download the entire data source Select Online Data Source to Download Select Data Source eee Worldwide High Hes Imagery from Digital Globe Globesplorer 4rPhotolS4 PREMIUM CONTENT DOG USGS Digital Ortho Quadrangle Grayscale aerial imagery TERRASERVER USA CUM z Cancel DAG USGS Digital Raster Graphics Topographic Maps TERRASERVER USA CUM Urban4rea High resolution Color Imagery for Select Urban Areas in the US TERRASERVER US4 COM Landsat Global Imagery Mosaic Color Pan Sharpened United States Elevation Data NED 30m Resolution SAT M Worldwide Elevation Data 3 arc second Resolution NEXARAD Radar Base Composite US Blue Marble Hest Generation Global MODIS denved image Bathymetry of Offshore Canada derived from ETOPO and Canada 3D Data Te i 2b ie ede J r F T axFw in f I a ae Add WMS Data Source Remove Source m Select Area to Download f Curent Screen Bounds CC Within of address US Only Within of latitude nue longitude pari Ade 3e C
317. s a comma delimited list with the following field values Naming type Can have the following values 0 NUM name using numbers in ascending order 0 NUM REVERSE name using numbers in descending order 9 ALPHA name using letters in ascending order 9 ALPHA REVERSE name using letters in descending order Starting value for numbering or lettering 1 e 1 or A Prefix string to use before the numeric or alphabetic value Step value for numeric naming default is 1 You can leave values blank if they don t apply or you want to use the default As an example to do numeric naming starting at the number 100 increasing by 10 each time with a prefix of DEM you would use GRID NAMING COLS Z NUM 100 DEM 10 e GRID NAMING ROWS specifies how to name the row portion of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE parameter See the documentation for the GRID NAMING COLS parameter above for details on the format e GRID NAMING PREPEND ZEROES specifies whether or not to prepend zeroes to the start of grid column row names Use GRID NAMING PREPEND ZEROESzNO to disable the prepending of zeroes e GRID NAMING SEPARATOR specifies the separator string to use between pieces of a grid name The default is an underscore e GRID CREATE FOLDERS specifies that a separate folder should be generated for each row or column if GRID NAMING ZSEPARATE COLS FIRST is specified of the export rather than placing every output file in the same fol
318. s for Points of This Type option allows a user to turn point labels off on a type by type basis The Custom Symbols section allows users to create new symbols from their own bitmap and icon files which they can then use as the symbol to display for a given type Global Mapper s Point Type Features are listed in the Global Mapper Point Type Features table Symbols are listed in the Global Mapper Symbols table Global Mapper recognizes two field attributes as containing information for the display appearence of a Point Type They are GM TYPE Address Label POINT SYMBOL Dot Red Point Type Features Table of Contents 261 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper Built In Point Type Features Point Type Symbol Address Label Dot Red Amusement Center Amusement Center Anchorage Marina Boat Ramp Boat Ramp Bottom Conditions Do O t Building School Campground Campground Cemetery Cemetery Church Church Table of Contents 262 t t t D D D D O ot ot ot ot Global Mapper User s Manual Table of Contents 263 Global Mapper User s Manual Table of Contents 264 Global Mapper User s Manual Symbols Global Mapper Built In Symbols ymbol 2x Sym Details Ho Amusement Center A A ET un Xx Table of Contents 265 Global Mapper User s Manual Big Yellow X Boat Ramp Bridge Bullseye Campground Cemetry Church Cliff S Danger Area Deer w Ei Ei a Diag Cros
319. s that elevation values written to BIL files should use big endian Motorola byte order rather than the default little endian Intel byte order Table of Contents 171 Global Mapper User s Manual e POLYGON CROP FILE specifies the full path and filename of a vector file containing a polygon feature to which the export should be cropped If multiple polygons are found in the specified file the polygon which has the largest intersection with the data to be exported will be used as the crop polygon see POLYGON CROP USE ALL for exception e POLYGON CROP NAME specifies the name of a polygon shape previously defined using the DEFINE SHAPE command to which the export should be cropped The coordinates in the shape need to have been provided in whatever projection the export is being done in e POLYGON CROP USE ALL specifies that if a POLYGON CROP FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the export will be cropped to all polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon e ALLOW LOSSY GLOBAL MAPPER GRID only specifies whether or not a slight loss in precision is allowable in order to achieve better compression ratios The default is YES so turn only use lossless compression you need to specify a value of ALLOW_LOSSY NO e EXPORT COLORS XYZ GRID only specifies that RGB color values should be exported for each coordinate that is saved e OVERWRITE EXISTING specifies that existing files should be overwritten The def
320. se of you with wheel mice rolling the wheel forward zooms in and rolling it back zooms out Moving the mouse near the edge of the Zoomed View displays a pan arrow Clicking when this is visible will cause the view to pan in the direction of the arrow hold down CTRL to increase the size of the pan Pressing down the Shift button while moving the mouse will disable this functionality and allow you to click all the way to the edge of the Zoomed View To select a location for control point entry position the crosshair over the pixel of interest then press and release the left mouse button This will cause the pixel coordinates of the point to be entered in the Ground Control Point GCP Entry portion of the dialog described below In addition a small red dot will be placed at the click location to make it easy to see If you also hold down the CTRL key when clicking the left mouse button the Reference Image view will be recentered on the associated point if there have been enough control points entered to convert the coordinates If you hold down the SHIFT key when left clicking the current control point will automatically be added to the GCP list just as if you had pressed the Add GCP to List button Reference Images The Reference Images portion of the Image Rectifier dialog allows the user to view what is currently loaded in the main Global Mapper view and to enter ground coordinates by left clicking on an appropriate place on the view This ca
321. sert Vertices at Intersections of Selected Features option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will find all intersections between selected line features and insert new vertices in the selected lines at the intersection locations if there are not already vertices at the intersection Once the operation is complete you will also be prompted as to whether or not you want to split the selected lines at the locations where intersections were found Table of Contents 153 Global Mapper User s Manual This is a very powerful command allowing you to make a line network have node to node connectivity and even make sure that lines terminate at intersections if required for your application This is commonly used for making routable street maps Finding Non Connected Line Endpoints i e Connectivity Checks If two of more line features are selected the Find Non Connected Line Endpoints option will appear when right clicking Selecting this will display a dialog allowing you to either mark all line endpoints that do not connect to an endpoint not an interior vertex of another selected line or those line endpoints that don t connect and are within some distance of another selected line endpoint This is a very useful feature for allowing easy identification and fixing of connectivity issues within loaded vector data Any line endpoints that do not connect based on the selected criteria will be displayed with a blue circle over that e
322. sh Dot Dot and Null Only the Solid value is valid for lines with a width greater than 1 eL ABEL ON LINE if this is set to YES or TRUE the label if any for this line feature should be rendered centered on the line e CLOSED if this is set to YES or TRUE the feature will be treated as a closed area feature if it has at least three vertices e ISLAND if this is set to YES or TRUE the feature will be treated as an island of the previous closed parent area feature if it has at least three vertices If there are no previous parent areas this attribute will be ignored e FONT NAME specifies the name e g Arial Times New Roman etc of the font to use when displaying the display label if any for this feature e FONT COLOR specifies the color of the font to use when displaying the display label if any for this feature The values must be formatted according to the guidelines layed out for the COLOR attribute in order to be recognized e FONT ANGLE specifies the angle in degrees of the font to use when displaying the display label if any for this point feature e FONT SIZE specifies the point size of the font to use when displaying the display label if any for this feature e FONT HEIGHT METERS specifies the height in meters of the font to use when displaying the display label if any for this feature Using this causes the actual point size of the font to vary as you zoom in and out e FONT CHARSET spe
323. shair Red Diag Crosshair Yellow bod Dot Dot Blue Dot Green Dot Red Dot White Dot Yellow Elevation Shaded Fish jt IH pu ire AT Table of Contents 266 Global Mapper User s Manual Fuel Geyser Golf Hospital Library Lighthouse Little Blue X Lodging Marina Mine No Symbol Park Phone Picnic Area Post Office Resturant Restroom Rock Scenic View School Shopping s a e om u o o s o earem shen et Table of Contents 267 Global Mapper User s Manual e a cn veo fe e Dee OR Symbols Geology Table of Contents 268 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper Built In Symbols Symbol 2X Sym Details Geology Arrow Medium Aqua Geology Arrow Medium Black Geology Arrow Medium Green Geology Arrow Medium Red Geology Arrow Small Aqua Geology Arrow Small Black Geology Arrow Small Green Geology Arrow Small Red Geology Cleavage Medium Aqua Geology Cleavage Medium Black Table of Contents 269 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Cleavage Medium Green Geology Cleavage Medium Red Geology Cleavage Small Aqua Geology Cleavage Small Black Geology Cleavage Small Green Geology Cleavage Small Red Geology Dip Bedding Medium Aqua Geology Dip Bedding Medium Black Geology Dip Bedding Medium Green Ge
324. solution The units are the units of the current global projection For example if UTM was the current global projection and you wanted to use a grid with a 30 meter spacing the parameter value pair would look like SPATIAL_RES 30 0 30 0 If you do not provide a SPATIAL RES value a good default for the input data will be chosen so in most cases it is best just to leave this off e GLOBAL BOUNDS specifies the grid bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum y e GLOBAL BOUNDS SIZE specifies the grid bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y eL AT LON BOUNDS specifies the grid bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude Table of Contents 182 Global Mapper User s Manual e LAYER_BOUNDS specifies that the grid generation should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to generate contours to the bounds of the file c test tif you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the
325. ssing on the files Other right click options include the ability to remove all archive files like zip and tar gz from the list and to fill the source files list with files listed in a text file Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to perform batch conversions Combine Terrain Layers Command The Combine Terrain Layers command allows the user to generate a new gridded elevation or other gridded value layer by combining and or comparing the elevation values from two other loaded terrain layers When selected the command displays the Combine Terrain Options dialog which allows the user to set up generation of the new terrain layer Once completed the new terrain layer is added to the Overlay Control Center and displayed Table of Contents 63 Global Mapper User s Manual Combine Terrain Options Combine Terain Layers Options Export Bounds Description Combined Elevation Grid Operation Subtraction Difference Signed select First Hevation Layer to Combine lt blue springs 4 quads dem gt BLUE SPRINGS MO United States Elevation Data NED 30m Resolution Select Elevation Layer to Combine the First Layer With quads dem gt BLUE SPRINGS MO United States Elevation Data NED 30m Resolution Vertical Units METERS Sample Spacing X axis 30 meters Y axis 30 meters Always Generate Square Grid Cells If you wish to change the ground units that the sample spacing is speci
326. st Fresnel Zone Frequency GHz 24 Percent Clear En Obstructions trom Vector Data fe buildings fences Iw Use Vector Features with Heights i Heights of Vector Features Relative to Ground zblue sprngs opt BLUE SPRINGS MO MULTIPLE CATE Start Angle n Swept Angle 360 Earth Curvature i Ignore Earth Curvature Atmospheric Correction The earth curvature settings are used to simulate the curvature af the earth when performing view shed analysis For short distances the curvature typically doesn t affect the results much but the effect over large distances can be significant Iw Generate Area Features in Covered Areas Transmitter Location Display Color Atmospheric comection is used to account for the effect the earth s atmosphere has on different kinds of transmissions For example a value of 1 333 i often used to emulate how microwave transmissions travel through the atmosphere The View Shed Setup dialog provides options that allow the user to precisely setup the view shed analysis that they wish to perform The Description provides the user with a place to enter a name to identify this view shed analysis This name will be displayed in the Overlay Control Center and will also be the name of the transmitter point created by the analysis for display on the map The Transmitter Elevation section allows the user to specify the height of the transmitter that the view shed analysis will be simulating
327. t Arbitrary Base Elevation button will allow you to quickly populate the list of elevation values with a series of evenly spaced values starting at some specified elevation You can then assign the colors as desired after that For example you could use this to quickly populate the list with all elevations from 0 meters to 5000 meters with an elevation every 500 meters then modify those as desired The Initialize from Other Shader button will allow you to initialize the list of color elevation pairs to those used by either the Global Shader built into Global Mapper or another user created custom shader This allows users to easily create a slightly modified version of an existing shader if they d like The Initialize from Palette File button allows you to initialize the list of color elevation pairs from a color palette file in any recognized format like a comma delimited file of R G B components on each line Since palette files don t contain elevation values the elevations will be incremented by one for each color and set to automatically scale the colors between loaded elevation values The Initialize from Surfer CLR File button allows you to initialize the list of color elevation pairs with a a CLR file created by the Surfer application by Golden Software You can use the Save to Surfer CLR File button to save your custom shader to a CLR file This is useful for making copies of a custom shader and providing them to other users Table of Conten
328. t Idrisi Command Export JPG Command Export JPG2000 Command Export KML KMZ Command Export Lidar LAS Command Export Leveller Heightfield Command Export NITF Command Export Optimi Terrain Command Export PGM Grayscale Grid Command Export PLS CADD XYZ File Command Export PNG Command Export RockWorks Grid Command Export STL Command Export Surfer Grid ASCII Format Command Export Surfer Grid Binary v6 Format Command Export Surfer Grid Binary v7 Format Command Export Terragen Terrain File Command Export Vulcan3D Triangulation File Command Export XYZ Grid Command Export ZMap Plus Grid File Command e Export Vector Data Export Arc Ungenerate Command Export CDF Command Export CSV Command Export Delft 3D LDB Command Export DeLorme Text File Command Export DGN Command Export DLG O Command Export DXF Command Export Garmin TRK PCX5 File Command Table of Contents Global Mapper User s Manual Export Garmin WPT PCX5 File Command Export GOG Generalized Overlay Graphics Command Export GPX Command Export InRoads ASCH Command Export KML KMZ Command Export Landmark Graphics Command Export Lidar LAS Command Export Lowrance USR Command Export MapGen Command Export MapInfo MIF MID Command Export MapInfo TAB MAP Command Export MatLab Command Export Moss Command Export NIMA ASC Command Export Platte River File Command Export PLS CADD XYZ File Command
329. t be used with no additional export time being required Grayscale Palette This palette consists of 256 scales of gray ranging from black to white DRG Optimized Palette This palette is optimized for the exporting USGS DRG data The palette consists of only the standard DRG colors DRG DOQ Optimized Palette As the name suggests this palette is optimized for exporting a mixture of USGS DRG data and grayscale satellite photos 1 e USGS DOQs The palette consists of the 14 standard DRG colors with the remaining 242 colors being a range of gray values ranging from black to white Halftone Palette The palette consists of a blend of 256 colors evenly covering the color spectrum This palette is the best choice when exporting anything but DRGs and grayscale satellite photos Custom Palette from File This option allows the user to choose a pal file describing the palette to use for the export A pal file should be a text file with one line per color with the red green and blue color components for each color in the palette separated by a comma You can save a pal file for an existing palette based file by opening the Overlay Control Center selecting the palette based layer press Options then the Transparent Color button then selecting the option to save a color palette file Grayscale Min is Black Palette This palette creates an 8 bit per pixel grayscale image with no color map stored in the image Black will be stored as zero with vary
330. t up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export VRML Command The Export VRML command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data and raster data sets to a VRML file for display in a VRML viewer such as the Cortona VRML Client When selected the command displays the VRML World File Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing vertical exaggeration and compression options and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Virtual Earth Tiles Command The Export Virtual Earth Tiles command allows the user to export any loaded data to JPG or PNG files tiled in the configuration required for display in using the Microsoft Virtual Earth interface This command will create both the image tiles and a sample HTML file for displaying the data with the Virtual Earth interface You can just load the HTML file into your web browser to view the data once the export is over You can also customize the HTML file however you need to Table of Contents 37 Global Mapper
331. te New Datum dialog pictured below is shown allowing you to enter the parameters for either a 3 parameter Molodensky datum transformation or a 7 parameter Bursa Wolfe datum transformation The Abbreviation field is what will be displayed for the datum name in the status bar The datum information will be stored in the custom datums txt file in the same folder as the Global Mapper installation so to share your datums just copy that file to another user s computer If a needed ellipsoid is not built in to Global Mapper use the Add Ellipsoid button to add a new one or Edit Ellipsoid to edit an existing custom ellipsoid definition Create New Datum Datum Name BUKIT RIMPAH Abbreviation Optional BUKIT Ellipzoid Spheroid Selection Bessel 1841 Add Ellipscid Edit Ellipzaid Datum Transformation Method 3 parameter Molodensky Transformation t T parameter Bursa alfe Transformation Shifts ta WE See meters m Rotation ta WO See arc seconds A ohit 3894 Y Shit B54 zz Shift 48 Scale L arrection to Vv 584 parts per million Scale ppm Cancel The Planar Units pull down select the ground units to use with the projection The Zone selection allows you to select the zone for use with the UTM State Plane Gauss Krueger and other zoned projections For those projections that require additional parameters to fully define them the Attributes table allows you to enter the values for each a
332. ted This is useful for things like selecting a point feature that is on top of a line area border You can add to an existing selection by holding down the CTRL key while performing a selection with any of the above described methods You can deselect features by holding down the SHIFT key while performing a selection You can toggle the selection state of features by holding down both the SHIFT and CTRL keys while performing a selection As a final option holding the P key when clicking to select the feature may be used to select the topmost area feature at a location This 1s useful for selecting area features that may be overlaid by a line or point feature It s functionally equivalent to using the Vector Display tab of the Configuration dialog to enable only the Select From Areas option a temporary selection filter If you are planning on moving lots of features you can speed up the process by holding down the ALT key when selected features and or vertices Doing this will cause you to automatically put into move mode when selecting new features and or vertices You can also select area line and point features within selected area features by first selecting one or more area features using the previously described methods then right clicking and selecting the appropriate option under the Advanced Selection Options submenu This makes it easy to find and edit all of the point line and or area features within some other area feature s
333. tered Trees Assign Loaded Line Features the Classification Railroad Assign Loaded Point Features the Classification Tower Include attributes from lines with coordinate data a HALE iw Treat 3rd coordinate value as elevation Break Line Area Features on Change in Field 3 Select Coordinate Offset Scale The Import Type section allows the user to specify how they want the data in the file to be treated The different import types are defined as follows e Point Only All lines from the file which are determined to contain coordinate data will result in a single point feature to be generated e Point Line and Area Features Any string of two or more consecutive lines with coordinate data will result in a line or area feature All isolated coordinate lines will result in a point feature e Elevation Grid All lines from the file which are determined to contain 3D coordinate data will be use generated a triangulated terrain which 1s then gridded to create a elevation grid This grid has all the capabilities of an imported DEM including contour generation line of sight and view shed analysis and raster draping When selecting this option the Create Elevation Grid dialog will appear after setting up the ASCII file import options to allow setting up the gridding process The Coordinate Column Order section allows the user to specify in what order the coordinates are found on Table of Contents 9 Glo
334. test blue spr Select Export Points File Select The shapefile format does not allow the mixing of different entitiy types i e points lines and areas within a single shape file Thus you need to specify which entity types you wish to export and what file to export them to Generate projection PRJ file tor each entity type Note Iv that some software i e Arc Explorer cannot handle shapefiles with a PRJ file so disable if you have trouble Iw Generate 3D Features Using Loaded Elevation Data Iv Add Feature Type LAYER Attribute to DBF Split Into Separate Files by Feature Layer Description The Export Areas Export Lines and Export Points options enable area line and point export respectively Pressing the Select button next to each of those options allows you to select the name of the SHP file to generate In addition to the SHP file containing the actual geometry of the features an shape index file SHX and attribute database file DBF will be created as well with the same name as the SHP file If selected the Generate Projection PRJ File option causes a projection file describing the ground reference system of the shapefile to be generated for each shapefile created The PRJ files will have the same name as the SHP file with the prj extension Table of Contents 54 Global Mapper User s Manual If selected the Generate 3D Features Using Loaded Elevation Data option specifies that 3D objects
335. the nearest integer e g 75 transparency 0 75 x 255 191 25 use 191 As an example the default field attributes for the Anchorage Area Type are GM TYPE Anchorage Area BORDER COLOR RGB 255 0 255 BORDER WIDTH 1 BORDER STYLE Comb Right Only FILL COLOR RGB 255 0 255 FILL STYLE No Fill To change the type s transparency to 35 the FILL ALPHA field attribute value should be set equal to 89 0 35 x 255 89 25 GM_TYPE Anchorage Area Table of Contents 238 Global Mapper User s Manual BORDER COLOR RGB 255 0 255 BORDER WIDTH 1 BORDER STYLE Comb Right Only FILL COLOR RGB 255 0 255 FILL STYLE No Fill FILL ALPHA 89 Area Types Global Mapper s View gt Background Color color designation influences which areas can be seen Any area whose color is the same as the Global Mapper Backgrond Color will not be seen Example for a white Background Color RGB 255 255 255 the Snow or Glacier Area will not be visible Global Mapper Built In Area Types u NEN a D i u i County Subdivision Coverage Quad Coverage Quad T o A Us Table of Contents 0 235 0 County Subdivision No Fill 0 0 0 No Fill 183 183 0 Border Width Border Border Style Color 0 0 0 Null 128 128 128 0 0 0 0 0 0 239 Global Mapper User s Manual Dry Lakebed Intermittent Lake Intermittent Stream River Intertidal Area Intertidal Ar
336. the surrounding data to come up with a color for the point in question This option is off by default specify FILL_GAPS YES to turn it on e POLYGON CROP FILE specifies the full path and filename of a vector file containing a polygon feature to which the export should be cropped If multiple polygons are found in the specified file the polygon which has the largest intersection with the data to be exported will be used as the crop polygon see POLYGON CROP USE ALL for exception e POLYGON CROP NAME specifies the name of a polygon shape previously defined using the DEFINE SHAPE command to which the export should be cropped The coordinates in the shape need to have been provided in whatever projection the export is being done in e POLYGON CROP USE ALL specifies that if a POLYGON CROP FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the export will be cropped to all polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon e ONLY GENERATE METADATA GEOTIFF JPEG and PNG only specifies that only metadata files like world files TAB files and PRJ files should be created for this file This is useful for things like generating world and TAB files from GeoTIFF files without doing a whole new export Just make the output filename the same as the loaded file to create the metadata for e USE LZW GEOTIFF only specifies that LZW compression should be used for this RGB or palette based GeoTIFF file LZW compression typically results in much s
337. the terrain surface or at the elevation values associated with the feature You can specify whether the elevation values are relative to ground level or sea level if drawing the features above the terrain If area features are drawn above the terrain the Extrude Areas option allows you to control whether or not they will also be extruded which means they will extend back to the terrain surface making them look like solid 3D features If this option is not checked the areas will just be drawn in space as a surface and not a 3D closed object If the Fake 2D Area Heights to Maintain Area Draw Order option is checked exported 2D area features will be assigned fake elevation values in order to attempt to get them to layer properly when displayed in Google Earth This is only necessary if you have overlapping areas that do not display in the correct order without this option checked The Filled Area Translucency section allows the user to control the degree to which filled polygons are see through in the created file If the Create Compressed KMZ File option is checked a compressed KMZ file will automatically be created This will result in much smaller files and is highly recommended unless you plan on manually editing the export result yourself in a text editor If the Include Attribute Values in Feature Description option is checked any feature attributes will be included in the description for a feature If the Hide Point Features by Default When Loading
338. ting features Once you ve completed drawing the line the Modify Feature Info dialog will appear allowing you to setup the label classification drawing style and attribution for the line The length of the line feature will be added as a default attribute The units for the length measurement can be modified on the General tab of the Configuration dialog See Editing Feature Attributes and Drawing Styles for more details Once you have completed have completed creating the line the Digitizer Tool will remain in the line creation mode so you can simply start left clicking to draw another line or right click to choose a different mode You can also create new line features from selected area features by selecting one or more areas then right clicking and selecting the Advanced Feature Creation Options gt Create New Line Feature s from Selected Area Feature s menu command This will create a single closed line feature from each selected area feature Creating New Line Features with Distance Bearing COGO Input After selecting the Create New Line with Dist Bearing COGO popup menu option you can proceed to select the starting location of the new line feature by left clicking at the desired start location Note that while selecting the start point for the line you can use the Snapping feature to help align the line with existing features After selecting the starting location the Distance Bearing COGO Input dialog pictured below will disp
339. tion allows you to edit the attributes that are associated with this feature The Add File Link s button in this section allows you to easily add attributes that point to files somewhere on disk without having to manually type in the file name These file links can later be followed from the Feature Information dialog displayed with the Feature Info tool Table of Contents 149 Global Mapper User s Manual When more than one area line and or point feature is selected there is an option on the right click popup menu allowing you to edit the selected features Selecting that option displays a dialog dialog which allows you to modify the Name Feature Type Feature Layer and Drawing Style and Attributes for the selected features Deleting Undeleting Features Removing an unwanted feature is quite simple All that you need to do is select the feature s that you wish to delete then either select the Delete option from the right click popup menu or press the DELETE key Once you ve done that the feature is marked for deleted and will no longer appear on the display unless the Render Deleted Features option is enabled on the Vector Options tab of the Configuration dialog If you decide that you didn t want to delete a feature simple enable the Render Deleted Features option see above to show the deleted features then select the deleted features and select the Undelete Feature s option from the right click popup menu Moving Features
340. tion file describing the ground reference system of the output file to be generated for each output file in addition to the output file itself The PRJ file will have the same name as the output file with the prj extension e Generate World File causes a world file describing the location of the output file to be generated for each output file The world file will have the same name as the output file with the appropriate world file extension for the output type i e TFW for GeoTIFF JGW for JPEG etc e Include Display Labels as Attributes causes DXF attributes containing the name of the vector object to be associated with DXF POLYLINE entities As some software packages cannot handle attributes in DXF files you may have to turn this option off with the associated loss of information to get your exported DXF files to work with some packages e Include Feature Attributes in DBF causes the attributes other than layer and elevation of each feature if any to be stored in the DBF file associated with the generated Shapefile In addition selecting this option will cause the DLG 3 attribute codes matching each feature to be stored in the DBF file e Include Feature Names in DBF causes the name of each feature if any to be stored as a NAME attribute in the DBF file associated with the generated Shapefile e Make Single Color Transparent allows the user to select a single color to treat as transparent in the source data files e Minimize
341. tions dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export NIMA ASC Command The Export NIMA ASC command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a NIMA ASC format file that can be used on many shipboard radar displays When selected the command displays the NIMA ASC Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Table of Contents 50 Global Mapper User s Manual Export Platte River File Command The Export Platte River File command allows the user to export any loaded area features to a Platte River Digitizer ASCII format file These files can be used with several applications When selected the command displays the Platte River Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export The township range section and meridian values saved for each area feature exported are derived either from the attribute values for the area
342. tions dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing and format a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Idrisi Command The Export Idrisi command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to an Idrisi file When selected the command displays the drisi Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing and format a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export JPG Command The Export JPG command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to a JPG file When selected the command displays the JPG Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of
343. tizer Tool is active you have the option to create new area line and point features simple by right clicking and selecting either the Create New Area Feature Create New Line Feature or Create New Point Feature options on the popup menu pictured below Any new features created can be exported to new vector files in any of the supported vector export format DXF Shapefile etc Table of Contents 140 Global Mapper User s Manual amp Global Mapper REGISTERED KER File View Tools Search Help Create Mew Line Feature Create Mew Point Feature Show Area and Line vertices I 4 mil mL a E iM s E 250 rm S00 m YoU rm Right Click to Display Option Menu UTM MAD27 387801 1 4319610 9 m 38 020216 M 94 296035 W Creating New Area Features After selecting the Create New Area Feature popup menu option you can proceed to draw a new area feature with the mouse To draw the feature simple left click at each place that you d like to drop a vertex To finish the area feature right click at the desired location of the last vertex to complete the area You can cancel creation of the new area at any time by pressing the Escape key Note that while drawing the area you can use the Snapping feature to help align the area with existing features Once you ve completed drawing the area the Modify Feature Info dialog will appear allowing you to setup the label classification drawing style and attribut
344. to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export If you would like to generate a lossless JPG2000 format file simply slide the Target Compression Ratio slider all the way to the right 1 1 target compression ration Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Erdas Imagine Command The Export Erdas Imagine command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to an Erdas Imagine file When selected the command displays the Erdas Imagine Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing and format a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Float Grid Command The Export Float Grid command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Float Grid format file The Float Grid file will consist of a 4 byte IEEE floating point number for each elevation sample in the file starting at the top left corner and proceeding across then down In addition to the elevation data file an ESRI format hdr file and prj file will also be generated There is also an option to allow exporting slope values in degrees or slope directions in bearings where 0 is north 9
345. to the view that was last drawn on the main map You can use this to back up threw recently drawn view locations and zoom levels Name and Save Current View The Name and Save Current View command associates the current map view bounds with a user specified name The saved view can later be restored from a list of named views using the Restore Named View command This feature allows you to save multiple views with descriptive names then easily restore those views at a later time Restore Named View The Restore Named View command allows you to restore a previously saved map view You can save map views for later restoration using the Name and Save Current View command Search Menu Table of Contents 70 Global Mapper User s Manual The Search menu currently provides the following commands e Search By Name e Search By Attributes Name and Description e Find Address Search By Name The Search By Name command allows for searching for features in all loaded vector data by name When selected the Find By Name dialog is displayed Find By Name Search String CPLR Types To Search Iw Areas W Lines Iv Points Chloride Gulch Valley Chloride Gulch Valley Chloride Mine Mine Chloride Mine Mine Colard Ranch Locale Coloradian Mine Mine Coloradium Mine Mine Colorado Academy School Colorado Agricultural Canal Canal T L l The Find By Name dialog displays a list of all of the vector features areas lines and or poi
346. top Measuring from the list using a left click Notice that Stop Measuring and Close polygon choices are now grayed out The measurement s will be displayed on the left side of the status bar below 4 In order to change measurements right click and choose a new unit using a left click You may continue to change the measurement display by selecting different units The distance will be displayed in kilometers meters miles or feet for a line and in square feet square meters square miles acres or hectares for areas Note that if you place a point along your measurement that you do not want you can press Ctrl Z to remove the last placed point in the measurement You can also save a measurement to a separate feature by right clicking and selecting Save Measurement from the list that pops up You can then export these measurements to new vector files such as Shapefiles or DXF or modify them with the Digitizer Tool There is also an option to copy the measurement text to the clipboard when you right click Global Mapper REGISTERED File View Tools Search GPS Help allele leis i ea 4 oe E 3 ELT Seg Len 46 7 m Seg Brg 53 7 Total Len 239 m Enclosed Area 0 477 acres GEO MAD83 96 74097857 40 84180457 40 841805 N If you have gridded elevation data loaded under the measurement you can also calculate the Cut and Fill volume either within the measurement area or within some distance
347. ts 104 Global Mapper User s Manual Elevations shaded with a custom shader will use the color specified for each elevation value Any elevation values between two elevation color values will be a blend of the two bounding colors if the Blend Colors Between Elevation Values option is checked For example if an elevation of 500 meters was set to black and an elevation of 1000 meters was set to white an elevation of 750 meters would be colored a medium shade of gray Any elevations below the minimum specified elevation will use the same color as the minimum elevation The reverse is true for any elevations over the maximum elevation If the blend colors option is not checked any elevation between two elevation values will be set to the color associated with the lower of the elevation values If you would like the elevation values selected to scale to the elevation range of the currently loaded data rather than stay at fixed elevation values check the Scale Shader to Loaded Elevation Values This will make your shader behave similar to most of the built in shaders like the Atlas or Color Ramp shaders For example if you check this option and specify that an elevation of 0 meters is blue and 1 meter is red and the actual loaded data has a range of 100 meters to 500 meters then 100 meters will be blue and 500 meters will be red with the values gradually shaded in between if you have the blend colors option checked Projection The Projection
348. ull Global Mapper User s Manual Small Metro mall Wletre Area Solid Fill 255 247 181 Area Null 0 0 0 Snow or Glacier cnow or Glacier Solid Fill 255 255 255 Null 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 tate No Fill 0 0 0 EN a m Survey Section No Fill 0 0 0 u i po Unclassified Unclassified Area Feature Null 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Null 0 0 0 No Fill 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Area Feature Unknown Area Unknown Area Type No Fill 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Type VIEW Era View bhed Coverage Area No Fill 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Coverage Area Table of Contents 204 Global Mapper User s Manual Wetland Solid Fill 125 191 167 1 Null iis es Vr Backwards Wooded Area Md ld SSS EEO S lf f 7 Diagonal 165 145 97 f AELA AA uy Cross Hatch Area Fill Patterns Global Mapper Fill Patterns Fill Pattern u L B Backwards Diagonal Cross Hatch Cross Hatch Diagonal Cross Hatch Table of Contents 205 Global Mapper User s Manual Forward Diagonal Cross Hatch Horizontal Hatch Vertical Hatch Intermittent_Water_Pattern Black Cross Pattern Table of Contents 206 Global Mapper User s Manual Black Dot Pattern Area Border Styles Global Mapper Border Styles Border Style Dash Dot Dot Table of Contents 207 Global Mapper User s Manual v D i Eo Comb Left Only Uu Comb Right Only D Comb Long Teeth Left Only Ld Comb Long Teeth Right Only Im Comb
349. ult attributes and values to use for new features of this type created using the Digitizer Tool If you right click on the list of types a menu will appear allowing you to save and restore your style settings using a Style file This provides an easy way to setup a set of styles to use then restore them at a later date for use with a particular set of data Table of Contents 97 Global Mapper User s Manual Configuration General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles Point Styles Vertical Options Shader Options Projection Point Types Right Click for More Options Spot Elevation spot Sounding Strike and Dip Swimming Area Tower Unclassified Point Feature Unknown Point Feature Symbol Dip Bedding Medium Rec Rotation e From apte i Iv Show Labels for Points of This Type Select Label Font Restore Default Style l Custom Symbols 102 VULCANO DI FANGO 103 CENTRO ERUTTIVO 104 DIAPIRO DI FANGO 105 BLOCCO STRATIFICATO Add Symbol 3 Remove Symbol If you press the Select Label Font button the font selection dialog pictured below for the selected point type will appear This dialog allows you to select the font to use for the point as well as set up other label display options for the point including where to position the label relative to the point what angle if any to rotate point labels at how to fill the background for the labels and whether or n
350. um General Options The General panel pictured below controls options for the display of vector data areas lines and points as well as position format on the status bar Configuration Point Styles Vertical Options Shader Options Projection General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles Grid Display Shift G f No Grd Lat Lon Grid Curent Projection Grid r Grid Spacing j Show All Grid Lines Regardless of Zoom Scale Extend Grid Lines Beyond Loaded Data Bounds Distance Scale Display Units Shift 5 C No Scale amp Display Scale Using Distance Units Hevation Legend Display Units Shit L f NoLegend Metric meters Statute feet Position Display Format Lat Lon dd mm ss ssss h d Area Measure Units Acres Distance Measure Units Metric im km Miscellaneous Advanced Options Prefer World File TFW Coordinates for Gea TIFF Files Iv Maintain Export Bounds Instead of Sample Spacing IL Export Old Format PRJ Files IL BIL Format Ask if 16 bit Files are Imagery bd ee m Restore Default Settings Cancel 5pply Help Table of Contents 89 Global Mapper User s Manual The Grid Display options allow for the control of whether or not grid lines are displayed and if so what projection they will be in The No Grid option is the default and causes no grid lines to be displayed or exported The Lat Lon Grid options causes a grid to be displayed alo
351. up the portion of the loaded elevation grid data they wish to consider when generating the contours Contour Generation Options Contour Options Simplification Export Bounds Less Simplification More Simplification Larger Files Smaller Files Simplification is the process by which points that do nat significantly contribute to the shape of a line are removed Using a larger simplification threshold right side of slider will result in a smaller data file however the curves in the contour lines will be less smooth Using a smaller simplification threshold left side of slider will result in larger data files that better maintain the Integrity of the contour line shape Cancel Help Print Command The Print command allows the user to print the contents of the current view window When selected the Print dialog picture below is displayed which allows the user to set up the print process Table of Contents 66 Global Mapper User s Manual Print Options General Print Bounds Header zz Esr ac Select Font Footer Total Len 27 7 km Total Brg 110 97 En Select Font Print in Black and White if Use White Background Color v Printto Scale 1 1500 Extra Margin Around Printout a inches Print To File Print to an Image File Rather Than to a Printer m Format f BMP C JPG PNG TIF If you are having trouble printing on your system a good workaround is to print to a graphics fil
352. ure description as the layer name in the exported file If selected the Generate Projection PRJ File option causes a projection file describing the ground reference system of the DXF file to be generated in addition to the DXF file itself The PRJ file will have the same name as the DXF file with the prj extension If selected the Create 3D Features Using Loaded Elevation Data option will cause any underlying elevation data like DEMs to be used to retrieve elevation values for 2D features being exported and generate new 3D Table of Contents 45 Global Mapper User s Manual features in the exported DXF file The units used by the elevation values are determined by the Elevation Display Export Units setting on the Vertical Options tab of the Configuration dialog If selected the Generate ECEF Coordinates option will cause the exported DXF file to use Earth Centered Earth Fixed ECEF X YZ coordinate values rather than XY values in the current export projection If selected the Generate Zero Width Lines option causes and line features created in the DXF file to be marked as having zero width Use this option if you intend to use the resulting DXF file with a product such as MicroStation which has problems with lines of non zero thickness Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Garmin TRK PCX5 File Command The Export Garmin TRK PCX5 File command allows the user to export any loade
353. urrent global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER BOUNDS EXPAND z 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom Table of Contents 181 Global Mapper User s Manual e SIMPLIFICATION specifies the simplification threshold to use when generating the contours This specifies how far off a straight line in the units of the current projection that a point has to be before it is kept Generally you should not specify a simplification value as the default value of half of the sample spacing works quite well This is an option for advanced users only e GEN HEIGHT AREAS generate area features colored based on the current elevation shader in addition to generating contour lines Use a value of YES to enable the generate of the height areas e GEN SPOT ELEVATIONS generate spot elevations at min max elevations Use a value of YES to enable the generate of min max spot elevation points e SINGLE LEVEL ONLY specifies that the INTERVAL value is actually a value indicating the only height that a contour should be generated at Use a value of YES to turn this functionality on e FILL GAPS specifies that small gaps in between and within the data sets being used to ge
354. used as the display label on the map the symbol to use an optional description and which layer in the Control Center to place the new point feature There is also a Modify Location button which allows you to fine tune the location of the point by manually entering coordinates Once you have completed have completed creating the strike and dip point the Digitizer Tool will remain in the strike and dip creation mode so you can simply left click to create additional points centered on another location or right click to choose a different mode If you hold down the Ctrl key when left clicking to create additional points the new strike and dip point will automatically be created at the clicked location using the same parameters as the last strike and dip point that was created allowing you to quickly place a lot of points without going through the dialog each time Enter Strike and Dip Parameters Strike Azimuth Specify the strike azimuth direction in degrees where North is 0 E ast is HU South is 180 and West is 270 The dip azimuth will be offset SU degrees clockwise right af fram the strike azimuth Azimuth la degrees relative to True Morth Dip Value 20 Madity Location Symboal Geology Dip Bedding Medium Black x A Description Rock Duteropping Feature Layer User Created and Modified Features Cancel Editing Existing Features In addition to creating new vector features the Digitizer Tool is a
355. ute names for line features are recognized as containing address information e FR ADDR R R FROM ADR starting address number on the right side of the road e FR ADDR L L FROM ADR starting address number on the left side of the road e TO ADDR R R TO ADR ending address number on the right side of the road eTO ADDR L L TO ADR ending address number on the left side of the road e PLACE R R CITY city or town on the right side of the road e PLACE L L CITY city or town on the left side of the road e STATE R R STATE state or province on the right side of the road e STATE L L STATE state or province on the left side of the road e ZIP_R R ZIP R PCODE postal code on right side of road e P L L ZIP L PCODE postal code on left side of road e COUNTRY R R COUNTRY country on right side of the road e COUNTRY L L COUNTRY country on left side of the road e PARITY R R PARITY numeric parity value on right side of road A value of 1 means odd parity addresses are all odd a value of 2 means even parity address are all even and a value of 3 means there is not parity addresses can be even and odd For any other value the parity will be automatically determined e PARITY L L PARITY numeric parity value on left side of road A value of 1 means odd parity addresses are all odd a value of 2 means even parity address are all even and a value of 3 means there is not parity addresses can be even and odd For any
356. want to include in the path profile then press the left mouse button again Right click on the last location in the path profile to complete selecting points and display the Path Profile Line of Sight dialog pictured below The Path Profile Line of Sight dialog will appear displaying the 3D path profile of the selected path Any points along the path that did not have elevation data underneath will be treated as an elevation of zero You can also generate 3D path profiles for existing line features by selecting the line feature in the Digitizer Tool right clicking then selecting the Generate Path Profile From Line option on the menu that is displayed Table of Contents 130 Global Mapper User s Manual Su i lll Path Profile Line of Sight File Options Calculate From Pos 38 996235 N 94 419336 W To Pos 38 008852 N 94 354725 Select From Position Select To Position EE e Display Elevations in Feet Display Elevations in Meters w Draw Elevation Guide Lines Set Background Color Set Terrain Color Set TexkiGrid Color Display Fram Ta Coordinates in Selected view Projection w Display From To Coordinates with Selected Position Display Format 0 5 mi 1 0 mi Line of Sight Cutand Fill Volumes Show Path Details The Path Profile Line of Sight dialog displays the 3D path profile and provides several options related to the profile A vertical scale is displayed on the left hand side of the prof
357. ws the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Vector Data The commands on the Export Vector Data submenu allow the user to export loaded vector data to various formats Export Arc Ungenerate Command The Export Arc Ungenerate commands allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to an Arc Ungenerate format file When selected the command displays the Arc Ungenerate Export Options dialog which consists of an Export Bounds panel that allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export CDF Command The Export CDF command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a CDF Common Data Format file When selected the command displays the CDF Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a CDF Options panel which allows the user to set up the attribute code to assign to features and the text size in the export file and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export If the Use
358. ws the user to export any loaded datato JPG or PNG files tiled in the configuration required for display in using the Google Maps interface This command will create both the image tiles and a sample HTML file for displaying the data with the Google Maps interface You can just load the HTML file into your web browser to view the data once the export is over You can also customize the HTML file however you need to When you select the command the Google Maps Export Options dialog pictured below appears allowing you to setup the export This dialog allows you to specify the display name of the map set in your web browser the zoom level setup the Google Maps API key to use the format of the imagery and some additional options There is also an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Google Maps Export Options Google Maps Options Export Bounds Data Set Name Blue Springs DEM Zoom Level Setup Select the resolution to use for the maximum detail level in the exported tiles The default selection will preserve full detail for any loaded raster elevation data set Level 14 9 6 meters pixel Number of Zoom Levels ta Use 5 Google Maps API Key Enter the Google Maps API key to include in the generated HTML file You can get one of these from http www google com apis maps signup html jyour key here a Tile Image File End JPG Good for Imagery
359. ws the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export GPX GPS eXchange Format Command The Export GPX GPS eXchange Format commands allows the user to export any loaded point and line data to a GPX GPS eXchange Format file Table of Contents 46 Global Mapper User s Manual When selected the command displays the GPX Export Options dialog which consists of an Export Bounds panel that allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export If you want to fill in the amp ltcmt amp gt field of a feature during a GPX export simply add a COMMENT attribute to the feature with the desired comment Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export InRoads ASCII Command The Export InRoads ASCII command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to an InRoads ASCII format file When selected the command displays the InRoads ASCII Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export KML KMZ Command The Export KML KMZ
360. y Y Raster W Ext Spatial Ref 7 Features Level 4 Projections DATUM Nate CONUS UNIT meters Options Pressing the Options button displays a dialog containing the available display options for the selected overlay s Options can be set on multiple raster or elevation overlays at the same time The available display options depend on the type of the selected overlays The following display options are used Table of Contents 111 Global Mapper User s Manual e Vector Data Options e Raster Data Options Display Tab Color Contrast Adjustment Tab Cropping Tab Band Setup Tab Palette Tab Feathering Tab Color Grade Tab e Elevation Data Options Display Tab Alter Elevation Values Tab Feathering Tab Vector Data Options Selecting the Options button while a vector i e SHP DXF E00 etc overlay is selected displays the Vector Options dialog pictured below Vector Options Feature Types Prajection m Mame Features Using tribute Value C Do Not Use an Attribute Value for Name f Use Selected Attribute Value for Name OBJNAM Object name p f Use Multiple Attributes for Name n Get Elevations From Attribute Value ELEVATION Classify Unclassified Area Features As Classify Unclassified Line Features As Bathymetric Contour Major r Classify Unclassified Point Features As The Feature Types tab provides the ability to specify which attribute
361. y is blended with underlying overlays in addition to the Translucency setting These settings allow Photoshop style filters to be applied to overlays resulting in often stunning results What you get from a particular set of overlays from a particular blend mode setting can often be hard to predict so rather than try to understand what is technically happening for each blend mode it s best to just experiment with different ones until you find one that you like The Hard Light setting seems to work well with satellite imagery overlaid on DEMs but the others can be quite useful as well For example the Apply Color setting is useful for applying color to a grayscale overlay such as using a low resolution color LANDSAT image to colorize a high resolution grayscale satellite image The SPOT Natural Color blend mode combines the color channels in the topmost layer using the common algorithm for generating natural color imagery from images from the SPOT HRV multi spectral sensor Red B2 Green 3 B1 B3 4 Blue 3 B1 B3 4 The Pseudo Natural Color blend mode combines the color channels within a single image using a common algorithm for generating natural color imagery from CIR imagery The Transparent option allows a particular color or colors to be displayed transparently making it possible to see through a layer to the layers underneath For example when viewing a DRG on top of a DOQ making the white in the DRG transparent makes it possi
362. y of some types of imagery e Clamp Export to Lat Lon Boundary causes the export bounds of each image being converted to be clamped to the nearest 3 75 lat lon boundary This can be useful in limited cases such as when reprojecting to geographic arc degrees and the source images had a tiny collar to make the image square in the native projection e Convert to Grayscale causes the exported imagery to be generated in only shades of gray e Crop to Selected Areas this option specifies that each exported file will be cropped to any area features selected with the Feature Info or Digitizer Tools If this option is selected no output file will be generated for any input file that does not intersect any of the selected crop areas e Export Areas Export Lines and Export Points these options respectively control whether area line and or point shapefiles are generated from the source vector data files At least one of these options must be selected e Fill Small Gaps in Data this option specifies whether or not small gaps in the elevation or raster file being exported will be filled by interpolating between nearby known values e Force Square Pixels in Output causes the newly created files to have square pixels in whatever projection they are created in This allows the files to be used with the widest variety of other software packages many of which do not correctly handle non square pixels e Generate Projection PRJ File causes a projec
363. y requires that at least 60 the default of the first Fresnel zone for the specified frequency be clear of obstructions If Fresnel zone clearance is being selected the specified percentage of the first Fresnel zone will be drawn on the line of sight analysis dialog as a dotted line underneath the straight sight line The Earth Curvature section allows the user to specify whether they want to take the curvature of the earth into account while performing the line of sight calculation In addition when earth curvature is being used they can specify an atmospheric correction value to be used The atmospheric correction value is useful when determining the line of sight for transmitting waves whose path is affected by the atmosphere For example when modeling microwave transmissions a value of 1 333 1s typically used to emulate how microwaves are refracted by the atmosphere Selecting the Exclude Endpoints when Finding Minimum Clearance options causes the first and last 5 of the elevations along the profile to be ignored when finding the minimum clearance point After setting up the line of sight calculation in the dialog and pressing the OK button the line of sight will be displayed in the path profile window pictured below Along with the line depicted the actual line of sight the position and vertical separation of the minimum clearance of the line of sight will be displayed with a Table of Contents 133 Global Mapper User s Manual das
364. y zoom levels of 21 19 and 17 bits the same feature would Table of Contents 52 Global Mapper User s Manual only show up in the most detailed 21 bit layer as features are always present in at least one layer of the map If you want a feature to always show up at all zoom levels in your map regardless of what zoom levels are present just add a MP_BIT_LEVEL attribute with a value of 1 The Template File sections allows you to select a file to use as a template for the new MP file The new file with use all of the settings from the selected template file except for the map ID unless you check the Keep Image ID from Template MP File option and if you provide a map name the map name This includes the Dictionary setting and all levels settings This provides a way for advanced users to set up one MP file exactly how they want and then export new maps with the same settings You can also check the Copy Entire Contents of Template File option to have everything from the template file copied to the new file verbatim including any feature data in the template file If selected the Create as Marine Map option specifies that the created MP file will be marked as a marine map and marine features will be used if appropriate Note that the Marine version of cGPSMapper is required to create marine maps The Make All Point Features Searchable controls whether or not all point features in the final map created from the MP file should be searchable on t

Global Mapper - User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents